UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual

UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual
Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a
.pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your
specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and
your individual printer may not have the capability to print the
document correctly.
Programming Manual
INT-2041 (UNIV)
ISSUE 1.0
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright 2008
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development
Preface
THIS MANUAL
The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary information for
programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a Multiline Terminal.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
UNIVERGE SV8100 General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the SV8100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment.
UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
This manual provides detailed information for each of the system features. If you are not familiar with
the features, the Table of Contents lists each of the features and where to find the feature within the
manual.
UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual
This manual provides information on networking the SV8100 using K-CCIS, IP K-CCIS, and NetLink.
UNIVERGE SV8100 PC Programming Manual
This manual provides information on installing and using the application that allows programming the
SV8100 system via a computer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1
Before You Start Programming ......................................................... 1-1
Section 2
How to Use This Manual .................................................................... 1-1
Section 3
How to Enter Programming Mode ..................................................... 1-2
Section 4
How to Exit Programming Mode ....................................................... 1-3
Section 5
Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs ................................. 1-4
Section 6
Programming Names and Text Messages ....................................... 1-5
Section 7
Using Softkeys For Programming .................................................... 1-6
Section 8
What the Softkey Display Prompts Mean ......................................... 1-7
Section 9
System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2
Section 1
Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming Your System ............................................................... 2-1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-3
10-02 : Location Setup ........................................................................... 2-4
10-03 : ETU Setup ................................................................................. 2-5
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup ............................................................... 2-16
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup ................................................. 2-18
10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup ...................................................................... 2-19
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup ................................................................... 2-20
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup .......................................... 2-21
10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup .................................................. 2-22
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup ............................................................ 2-25
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
i
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
10-14 : Managed Network Setup ......................................................... 2-26
10-15 : Client Information Setup .......................................................... 2-27
10-16 : Option Information Setup ........................................................ 2-28
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup ......................................................... 2-32
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup ..................................................... 2-33
10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection ................................................ 2-34
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment ......................................... 2-35
10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup ................................................ 2-37
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup .......................................... 2-38
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup ........................................................... 2-39
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup ................................................... 2-41
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup ..................................................... 2-42
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup ................................................ 2-43
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup .................................................. 2-45
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup ..................................... 2-48
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-49
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup ............................... 2-51
10-37 : UPnP Setup ............................................................................. 2-52
10-38 : BGM Resource Setup ............................................................. 2-53
10-39 : Fractional Setup ...................................................................... 2-54
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability ................................................................. 2-55
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting ................................................ 2-56
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup ........................................................... 2-57
10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup ............................................. 2-58
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup ............................ 2-60
10-48 : License Activation ................................................................... 2-61
10-49 : License File Activation ............................................................. 2-62
10-50 : License Information ................................................................. 2-63
10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA ................................................ 2-67
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information .............................................. 2-68
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package ................................ 2-69
10-55 : Package Network Setup .......................................................... 2-70
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone ............................................................... 2-72
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering .................................................................. 2-73
11-02 : Extension Numbering .............................................................. 2-81
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering ................................................... 2-83
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering ....................................................... 2-85
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers ........................................... 2-86
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number .......................................................... 2-87
11-09 : Trunk Access Code ................................................................. 2-88
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) ...................... 2-90
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) .................... 2-93
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) ............................... 2-97
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) .............................................. 2-101
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) .............................................. 2-103
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) ..... 2-105
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup ........................................... 2-107
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number ...................................................... 2-109
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table ................................................ 2-110
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup ................................................... 2-111
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns .......................................... 2-112
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-114
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-116
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions ...................... 2-117
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks ............................ 2-118
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode ...................................................... 2-119
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range .................................................... 2-120
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup .................................................. 2-121
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins ..................................................... 2-122
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions .................. 2-123
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
iii
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name ......................................... 2-124
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group ........................................................ 2-126
13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name .............................. 2-127
13-08 : Telephone Book System Name ............................................. 2-128
13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name ............................................... 2-129
13-10 : Telephone Book Routing ....................................................... 2-130
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup ........................................................ 2-131
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup ...................................................... 2-138
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup ................................................................. 2-141
14-05 : Trunk Group .......................................................................... 2-142
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing ............................................................. 2-143
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup ...................................................... 2-145
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks .......................................... 2-147
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks .................... 2-148
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk ............................................................. 2-149
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk ....................................... 2-150
14-13 : CCIS System Route ID .......................................................... 2-151
14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment ................................................. 2-152
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup .................................................. 2-153
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup .................................. 2-155
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup .............................. 2-163
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup ............................. 2-166
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions ......................................... 2-170
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys ............................................... 2-171
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup ........................ 2-181
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment ....................................... 2-183
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup .............. 2-184
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment ......................... 2-186
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ............. 2-187
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ........................................... 2-188
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension ..................................... 2-189
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication ............................................ 2-190
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options .............................. 2-191
15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension ....................... 2-192
15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment .......................................... 2-193
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup ......................................................... 2-194
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup .................................... 2-195
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions ..................... 2-198
16-03 : Secondary Department Group ............................................... 2-199
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups ....................... 2-200
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options ..................................................................... 2-201
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones .............................. 2-203
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones ......................... 2-206
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions .................................. 2-208
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions ............................................. 2-209
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) ..................... 2-210
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) ................. 2-213
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) ................. 2-216
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) ........................... 2-218
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) ................. 2-220
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) ................ 2-223
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) ............... 2-224
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M ................................ 2-229
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup ................................................................... 2-231
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages ................................................ 2-233
20-17 : Operator Extension ................................................................ 2-236
20-18 : Service Tone Timers ............................................................. 2-237
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID ................................................. 2-239
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
v
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data ................................. 2-240
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation ................................. 2-241
20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service ..................... 2-242
20-23 : System Options for CTI ......................................................... 2-243
20-25 : ISDN Options ........................................................................ 2-244
20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO ......................................................... 2-246
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation ................................................. 2-247
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension ..................................................... 2-248
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks .......................................................... 2-249
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment ............................................. 2-250
20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting ................................................. 2-254
20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting ....................................................... 2-255
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup .......................................... 2-256
20-38 : Operator Group Setting ......................................................... 2-257
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls ....................................... 2-259
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................................... 2-263
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks ............................................ 2-264
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions ..................................... 2-265
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class ............................................................. 2-266
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup .......................................... 2-269
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup ............................. 2-272
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup ................................................................. 2-273
21-09 : Dial Block Setup .................................................................... 2-274
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension ........................... 2-275
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment ........................... 2-276
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks ....................... 2-277
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions ................ 2-278
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup .............................. 2-279
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................... 2-280
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk ........... 2-281
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension .............................................................................. 2-282
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension .... 2-283
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) ....... 2-284
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings ........... 2-285
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls ....................................... 2-287
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup .................................................... 2-289
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range ........................................................ 2-291
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment ........................ 2-293
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment ............................... 2-294
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode ................................................. 2-295
22-07 : DIL Assignment ..................................................................... 2-296
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination ............................................ 2-297
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup ............................................................ 2-298
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup ................................................. 2-300
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion ..................................... 2-302
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group ...................................................... 2-306
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment ............... 2-308
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG ............................................. 2-309
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group ..................... 2-311
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup ................................. 2-313
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern ......... 2-314
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup .............................................. 2-315
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup ....................................... 2-316
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups ................................................................ 2-317
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer ............................................. 2-318
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions ..................... 2-320
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold ........................................................ 2-321
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
vii
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
24-02 : System Options for Transfer ................................................. 2-323
24-03 : Park Group ............................................................................ 2-325
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup ................. 2-326
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup ............................ 2-327
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding ........................................................... 2-328
24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise ............................................ 2-329
24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex ....................................................... 2-330
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings .................................................... 2-331
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup ......................................... 2-333
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message ....................................................... 2-334
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing ......... 2-335
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy ........ 2-336
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment ................................. 2-337
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup ......................... 2-338
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA ............................................... 2-340
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup .............................................................. 2-342
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users ........................................... 2-343
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA .............................................. 2-344
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class ................................................... 2-345
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA ............................... 2-346
25-13 : System Option for DISA ........................................................ 2-347
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service ....................................... 2-349
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR .......................................... 2-351
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments ............................................................. 2-353
26-04 : ARS Class of Service ............................................................ 2-355
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table ....................................................... 2-356
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS .......................... 2-357
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode .............................................. 2-359
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment .................................... 2-360
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment .............................................. 2-361
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer ............................................. 2-368
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table ..................................................... 2-369
30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup ........................................... 2-371
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging ......................... 2-373
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment ........................................ 2-375
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings ............................................. 2-376
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group ................................................. 2-379
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page ............................... 2-380
31-06 : External Speaker Control ...................................................... 2-381
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments ............................................ 2-383
31-08 : BGM on External Paging ....................................................... 2-384
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup ......................................................... 2-385
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment ................................................... 2-386
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup ........................................................... 2-387
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup ........................................................... 2-388
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup .............................................................. 2-389
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group .............................................. 2-390
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup ..................................................... 2-391
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service .............................................. 2-393
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines ............................... 2-394
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class ...................................... 2-395
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction ......................................... 2-396
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line ......................................... 2-397
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer ............................................................... 2-398
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines ................................. 2-399
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
ix
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options .................................................... 2-400
34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment ..................................... 2-403
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options ...................................................................... 2-405
35-02 : SMDR Output Options ........................................................... 2-407
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group .............................. 2-410
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups ................... 2-411
35-05 : Account Code Setup ............................................................. 2-412
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table ................................................. 2-414
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup .......................................................... 2-415
40-02 : Mailbox Setup ........................................................................ 2-416
40-03 : Message Recording Setup .................................................... 2-417
40-04 : Live Recording Setup ............................................................ 2-418
40-05 : Call Information Setup ........................................................... 2-419
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup ........................ 2-420
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS ...................... 2-421
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes .............. 2-422
40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup ............................. 2-423
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option .................................... 2-424
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment ............................................ 2-426
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for ACD ....................................................... 2-427
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments ..................................... 2-428
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group ................ 2-429
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor .......................................................... 2-431
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules ................................................. 2-432
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules .......................................................... 2-433
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup ................................................ 2-434
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options .......................................................... 2-435
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting ................................................. 2-437
___________________________________________________________________________________
x
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement ..................................................... 2-438
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement .................................................... 2-439
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup ................................................... 2-441
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement .................. 2-442
41-14 : ACD Options Setup ............................................................... 2-443
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information .............................................. 2-446
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow ....................................................... 2-448
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup ......................................................... 2-449
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ............................................ 2-450
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement .................................. 2-452
41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings ................................................ 2-454
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel ............................................. 2-457
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup ................................................ 2-458
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) .................................. 2-459
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes .................................... 2-461
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer ..................................................... 2-462
42-06 : PMS Service Setting .............................................................. 2-463
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table .............................. 2-464
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route .......................................... 2-465
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access ........................ 2-466
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table ............................................... 2-468
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ........................... 2-470
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table ............................................................... 2-471
44-06 : Additional Dial Table .............................................................. 2-473
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access ..................................... 2-474
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route ........................................... 2-476
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-478
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-479
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
xi
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options .............................................. 2-481
45-02 : NSL Option Setup ................................................................. 2-483
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment .......................................... 2-484
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits ... 2-485
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options ............................................ 2-487
47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options ............................... 2-495
47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options ................................. 2-501
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options ....................................... 2-503
47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options .............................. 2-508
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options ................................................ 2-510
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options ........................................... 2-512
47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options ............................................... 2-514
47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options .................................. 2-516
47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules ........................................ 2-520
47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables ........................................ 2-529
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options ........................................ 2-536
47-16 : InMail Language License ...................................................... 2-537
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options .................................... 2-539
47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup ................................................. 2-540
47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup ................................................. 2-541
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-01 : CCIS System Setting ............................................................. 2-543
50-02 : Connecting System Settings ................................................. 2-544
50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings ........................................ 2-546
50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment .............................................. 2-547
50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter ...................... 2-548
50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability ...................................................... 2-549
50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office .................................. 2-550
50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment .............. 2-551
___________________________________________________________________________________
xii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-552
50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment .................. 2-554
50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-555
50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-556
50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment ................ 2-557
50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return ...................... 2-558
50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting ................................. 2-559
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting ........................................... 2-561
51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting ......................................... 2-563
51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting ...................... 2-565
51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of
NetLink .................................................................................. 2-567
51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings .......................................................... 2-568
51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting ...................... 2-570
51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting ............... 2-571
51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting ......................................................... 2-572
51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings ................................... 2-573
51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting ................................................................. 2-575
51-11 : NetLink System Information .................................................. 2-576
51-12 : Primary System Information .................................................. 2-577
51-13 : NetLink Options ..................................................................... 2-578
51-14 : NetLink System Control ......................................................... 2-579
51-15 : Demonstration Setting ........................................................... 2-580
51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting .................... 2-581
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup ............................................................... 2-583
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup ................................................................. 2-589
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup .................................................. 2-591
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ....................................... 2-593
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
xiii
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System ...................................... 2-595
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup ..................... 2-596
80-09 : Short Ring Setup ................................................................... 2-597
80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup ...................................................... 2-600
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-603
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup ....................................................... 2-606
81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-608
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ...................... 2-610
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup ............ 2-611
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup .................... 2-613
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port ........................... 2-616
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup ........................................................... 2-617
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting .................................... 2-622
81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-624
81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup .............................................................. 2-626
81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup ................................................. 2-629
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone .............................................................. 2-631
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup .......................................... 2-633
82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-635
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port ......................... 2-637
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup ......................................................... 2-638
82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup ............................................. 2-639
82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-641
82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-642
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup ................................... 2-643
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup ............................ 2-647
84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup ........................................ 2-649
84-06 : PVA Data Setting .................................................................. 2-651
___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup .................................................... 2-653
84-08 : Firmware Name Setup ........................................................... 2-654
84-09 : VLAN Setup ........................................................................... 2-655
84-10 : ToS Setup .............................................................................. 2-656
84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-658
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup ......................... 2-661
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup ....................................... 2-664
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup ...................................... 2-666
84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup ........................................... 2-667
84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup (IN Level) ........................ 2-668
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup ................... 2-669
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup ................................. 2-672
84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .................... 2-673
84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup ............................. 2-677
84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup .............................. 2-678
84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup ................ 2-680
84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup ............................. 2-684
84-26 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-688
84-27 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-690
84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup ................................. 2-692
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup ................. 2-693
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date ..................................................................... 2-695
90-02 : Programming Password Setup .............................................. 2-696
90-03 : Save Data .............................................................................. 2-698
90-04 : Load Data .............................................................................. 2-699
90-05 : Slot Control ............................................................................ 2-700
90-06 : Trunk Control ......................................................................... 2-701
90-07 : Station Control ....................................................................... 2-702
90-08 : System Reset ........................................................................ 2-703
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup .................................... 2-704
90-10 : System Alarm Setup .............................................................. 2-705
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
xv
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
90-11 : System Alarm Report ............................................................ 2-714
90-12 : System Alarm Output ............................................................ 2-716
90-13 : System Information Output .................................................... 2-717
90-16 : Main Software Information .................................................... 2-718
90-17 : Firmware Information ............................................................ 2-719
90-19 : Dial Block Release ................................................................ 2-720
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup ...................................................... 2-721
90-21 : Traffic Report Output ............................................................. 2-723
90-22 : Terminal Version information ................................................ 2-724
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones ................................. 2-725
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup ...................... 2-726
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup .................................... 2-727
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup ................................................ 2-728
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup ..................................... 2-729
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet ..................................................... 2-730
90-34 : Firmware Information ............................................................ 2-731
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup ......................................... 2-732
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting .............................................. 2-733
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset ................................................ 2-735
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data ...................... 2-736
90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information ...................... 2-737
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 ..................................... 2-738
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface .......................... 2-739
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone ......... 2-740
90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone ........................ 2-741
90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone .................... 2-742
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup ................................................. 2-743
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange ............................... 2-744
90-52 : System Alarm Save ............................................................... 2-746
90-53 : System Alarm Clear .............................................................. 2-747
90-55 : Free License Select ............................................................... 2-748
90-56 : NTP Setup ............................................................................. 2-749
___________________________________________________________________________________
xvi
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data .......................................................... 2-750
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data ......................................................... 2-751
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data ........................................................... 2-752
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information ......................................... 2-753
90-61 : Manual Slot Install ................................................................. 2-754
90-62 : Security ID Information .......................................................... 2-755
90-63 : DT700 Control ....................................................................... 2-756
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program ....................................................................... 2-757
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers ............................................... 2-761
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number ............................................. 2-762
92-04 : Extension Data Swap ............................................................ 2-763
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password ........................................... 2-766
92-06 : Fill Command ........................................................................ 2-767
92-07 : Delete Command ................................................................... 2-769
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
xvii
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
xviii
Table of Contents
LIST OF TABLES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 1-1
Keys for Entering Data ...................................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-2
Keys for Entering Names .................................................................................. 1-5
Table 1-3
Softkey Display Prompts ................................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-4
System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................................... 1-8
Table 2-1
Programming Modes ......................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-2
License Information ......................................................................................... 2-64
Table 2-3
System Numbering Default Settings ............................................................... 2-75
Table 2-4
Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern ............................................................... 2-162
Table 2-5
Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-162
Table 2-6
Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-182
Table 2-7
Ringing Cycles .............................................................................................. 2-232
Table 2-8
Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-291
Table 2-9
LED Patterns for DSS Console ..................................................................... 2-370
Table 2-10
47-02-16 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-499
Table 2-11
47-06-14 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-507
Table 2-12
47-07-03 Default Table
Table 2-13
47-10-03 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-515
Table 2-14
47-16-01 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-538
Table 2-15
Basic Tones ................................................................................................... 2-584
Table 2-16
Frequency 1/2 Table ..................................................................................... 2-597
Table 2-17
Ring Cycle Table ........................................................................................... 2-598
Table 2-18
Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-599
Table 2-19
Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-602
Table 2-20
Description of Alarm ...................................................................................... 2-705
.............................................................................. 2-509
___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual
xix
Issue
1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
xx
List of Tables
1
Introduction
SECTION 1
BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system
programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature
associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about
each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the
program data into system memory.
SECTION 2
Introduction
Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter
first.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program
10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end.
The information on each program is subdivided into the following
headings:
Description describes what the program options control. The Default
Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the
system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the
Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special
considerations that may apply to the program.
The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is
the program access level. You can only use the program if your access
level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to Section 3
How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system
access levels and passwords.
Programming Manual
1-1
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the
program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a
program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did
not intend.
Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into
system memory. For example:
1.
Enter the programming mode.
2.
15-07-01
15-07-01 TEL
KY01 = *01
←
→
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial
pad. After you do, you will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of
the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number
(01), and that the options are being set for the extension . The second row of the
display “KY01 = 01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry
of 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right,
depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming
mode, refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below.
SECTION 3
HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE
To enter programming mode:
1.
Go to any working display telephone.
In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
2.
Do not lift the handset.
3.
Press Speaker.
4.
#
#
.
Password
5.
1-2
Dial the system password + Transfer.
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the
passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup.
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Password
User
Name
Level
47544
necii
1 (MF)
Programs at this Level
Manufacturer (MF):
All programs
12345678
tech
2 (IN)
Installation (IN):
All programs in this section not listed below for SA and
SB
0000
ADMIN1
3 (SA)
System Administrator – Level 1 (SA):
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17,
10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09,
15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08,
30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06,
41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14,
41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07,
90-18, 90-19
9999
ADMIN2
4 (SB)
System Administrator – Level 2 (SB):
13-04, 13-05, 13-06
SECTION 4
HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
To exit the programming mode:
When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit
(pressing the Answer key will exit the program option).
1.
Press Answer key to exit the program options, if needed.
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2
2.
Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System
Data" is displayed.
3.
The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the
telephone to an idle mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank USB Drive is required. Insert the USB Drive into
the CD-CP00-US and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the USB Drive.
(Program 90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a USB Drive
can only hold one customer database. Each database to be saved requires a separate
drive.
Programming Manual
1-3
Issue 1.0
SECTION 5
UNIVERGE SV8100
USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS
Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter
data, edit data and move around in the menus.
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data
Keys for Entering Data
Use this key...
0~9 and
Transfer
Recall
Hold
Answer
When you want to...
Enter data into a program.
Complete the programming step you just made (e.g., pressing Enter
on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press Transfer
to bypass the entry without changing it.
Delete the entry to the left (e.g., pressing Backspace on a PC
keyboard).
Delete or clear all characters to the right of the cursor.
Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being
viewed.
For example, if programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing Answer
allows you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing Answer
again allows you to select a new program in the 15-XX series.
Pressing Answer a third time allows you to enter a new program
beginning with 1. Pressing Answer one last time brings you to the
beginning program display, allowing you to enter any program
number.
MIC
LINE KEYS
Switch between the different input data fields by pressing MIC. The
cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing MIC again
moves the cursor back to the middle row.
Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These
settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1
(on) to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE
3 = 15, etc.
For programs with this option, the line key, which currently matches
the programmed setting, lights steady.
The display can also indicate Softkey, which will allow you to select
the values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed
settings.)
1-4
LINE KEY 1
Program a pause into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2
Program a recall/flash into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3
Program an @ into a Speed Dialing bin.
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data (Continued)
Keys for Entering Data
Use this key...
When you want to...
Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
VOL
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling forward.
Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
VOL
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling backward.
SECTION 6
PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES
Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you
to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the
keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second
character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key
six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
1
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
Programming Manual
Æ ¨
%
&
’
(
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
α ε θ
1-5
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
+
#
SECTION 7
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
B E σ S ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In
system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Conf
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to
the right.
USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING
Each UNIVERGE SV8100 display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive
feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on
where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey located below
the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.
_
Base
Program Mode
Service
OP1
Pressing the VOLUME
OP2
or VOLUME
will scroll between the menus.
_
CCIS
1-6
Program Mode
Hard Mtnance
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 8
Issue 1.0
WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN
When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are
displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the
programs.
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts
Softkey Display Prompts
If you press this
Softkey . . .
back
The system will. . .
Go back one step in the program display.
You can press VOLUME
or VOLUME
backward through a list of programs.
↑
Scroll down through the available programs.
↓
Scroll up through the available programs.
select
Programming Manual
to scroll forward or
Select the currently displayed program.
←
Move the cursor to the left.
→
Move the cursor to the right.
-1
Move back through the available program options.
+1
Move forward through the available program options.
1-7
Issue 1.0
SECTION 9
UNIVERGE SV8100
SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES
The following table provides the capacities for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
System
Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP)
32/64 channels
Classes of Service
15
Day/Night Mode Numbers
8
Day/Night Service Patterns
32
Dial Tone Detector
DTMF Receiver
64
Toll Restriction Classes
15
Verifiable Account Code Table
2000
Trunk
Trunk Port Number
200
Trunk Ports (Total):
200
176
176
200
44
88
200
Analog Trunks
BRI Trunk Ports
T1/PRI Trunk Ports
E&M Analog Trunk Ports
DID Analog Trunk Ports
VoIP Trunk Ports
DID Translation Tables
DID Translation Table Entries
20
2000
DISA:
Classes of Service
Users
1-8
15
15
Ring Groups
100
Tie Line Classes of Service
15
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes
15
Trunk Access Maps
200
Trunk Group Numbers
100
Trunk Routes
100
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Extension
Telephone Extension Ports
Multiline Terminals
Single Line Phones/Analog Devices
VoIP Extensions
SIP DECT Wireless
512
256
256
512
504
DLCA:
Physical Ports
01~16
Physical Ports
01~16
LCA:
Telephone Extension Number Range
1~89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
Virtual Extension Ports
Virtual Extension Number Range
256
1~89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
56
ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters
240
UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless – SIP DECT Access Points
Door Boxes
Door Box Numbers
Unlimited
8
1~8
DSS Consoles Numbers:
60 Button DSS Console
Operator Access Number
32
0 (Default)
Operator Extension
15
Ringdown Assignments
512
SLT Adapters
16
HF-R Adapters
240
Programming Manual
1-9
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing Groups
Speed Dialing Bins
Speed Dialing Table-Common
64
0~1999
1000
ACD
ACD Groups
64
ACD Agent Extensions
512
ACI
ACI Groups
16
ACI Ports
96
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers
1~100
Conference
Conference Circuits
64 - maximum
(32 Parties Per Conference)
Data Communication Interfaces
APR Software Port Numbers
449~512
APA Adapters
240
APR Adapters
240
CTA or CTU Adapters
32
(Only works with DTH/DTR style
telephones)
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group Numbers
1~64
Call Pickup Group Numbers
1~64
Hotline
1 - 10
Internal Hotline
512
External Hotline
512
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers
0, 01~64
External Page Group Numbers
0, 1~8
External Speakers
9
(1)
(1~8)
CD-CP00-US( )-U10
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Park Group Numbers
1~64
Park Orbits
1~64
SMDR
SMDR Ports
1~8
VRS/VM8000 InMail
VRS/VM8000 InMail
VRS/VM8000 InMail Channels
VRS Attendant Messages
VRS Recordable Messages
VM8000 InMail Ports
1
16 (Note 1)
3
100
8 (Note 1)
VoIP
ADA2 (Recording Jack) Adapters
240
PSA (Power Failure) Adapters
256
RTP Ports
0~65535
RTCP Ports
0~65535
DSP Resources
128 (Note 2)
Note 1: The PZ-VM21 supports up to 16 ports and they are shared by the VM8000 InMaill and VRS.
Note 2: The maximum number of VOIP DSP Resources depend on which PZ-IPLA is installed.
Passwords
Programming Passwords:
Programming Manual
Level 1 (MF)
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
47544
necii
Level 2 (IN)
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
12345678
tech
1 - 11
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
Number Plan/Capacities
Level 3 (SA)
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
0000
ADMIN1
Level 4 (SB)
PCPro/WebPro User Name:
9999
ADMIN2
Programming Password Users
8
Footnotes
Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering
feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual.
1 - 12
Introduction
Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 1
2
PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM
The programming blocks are organized into the following programming
modes.
Table 2-1 Programming Modes
Program Number : Program Name
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100
The information contained in this chapter provides the information
necessary to properly program your UNIVERGE UNIVERGE SV8100
system.
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
Programming Manual
2-1
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Programming Modes (Continued)
Program Number : Program Name
Program 31 : Paging Setup
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
Program 41 : ACD Setup
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : InMail
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service (CCIS)
Program 51 : NetLink Service
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Program 92 : Copy Program
2-2
Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date
through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728
to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
01
Year
00~99
No Setting
Enter 2 digits for year (00~99).
02
Month
01~12
No Setting
Enter 2 digits (01~12) for the
month.
03
Day
01~31
No Setting
Enter 2 digits (01~31) for the day.
04
Week
1~7
(Sun~Sat)
No Setting
Enter digit for the day of the week
(1=Sunday, 7=Saturday).
05
Hour
00~23
No Setting
Enter 2 digits for the hour (00~23).
06
Minute
00~59
No Setting
Enter 2 digits for the minute
(00~59).
07
Second
00~59
No Setting
Enter 2 digits for the second
(00~59).
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Clock/Calendar Display
Programming Manual
2-3
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
01
Country
Code
Dial (up to
four digits):
0~9, , #
1
Enter the country code.
02
International
Access Code
Dial (up to
four digits):
0~9, , #
No setting
03
Other Area
Access Code
Dial (up to
two digits):
0~9, , #
9
04
Area Code
Dial (up to six
digits):
0~9, , #
No setting
Enter the local area code.
05
Trunk
Access Code
Dial (up to
eight digits):
0~9, , #
No setting
Enter the trunk access code
digits required to place an
outgoing call.
Enter the international access
code.
Enter the other area access
code
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-4
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data
for each blade. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then
plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to
reseat the blade.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Input Data
For CNF PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
01~16
Item
Logical Port Number
Input Data
Default
0~256
0
For DLCA PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
Programming Manual
01~16
Item
Terminal Type (B1)
Input Data
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Not set
Multiline Terminal
SLT Adapter
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
DSS Console
--- Not Used ---
Default
0
2-5
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
02
Item
Logical Port Number
(B1)
Input Data
Default
0
=
=
=
=
Not set
Multiline Terminal (1~256)
SLT Adapter (1~256)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) (1~8)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone Ringer)
(1~8)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) (1~8)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI) (1~96)
DSS (1~32)
--- Not Used ---
0
1
2
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
8
9
10
11
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Optional Installed Unit 1
(Only applies to DTH/
DTR–style telephones)
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
None
APR Module
APA Module
ADA Module
CTA/CTU Module
0
05
Optional Installed Unit 2
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
None
APR Module
APA Module
ADA Module
CTA/CTU Module
0
B-Channel 2
Item
No.
2-6
Item
06
Terminal Type (B2)
0
6
7
8
9
12
07
Logical Port Number (B2)
0
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
Input Data
Default
Not set
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
APR (B2 Mode)
0
= Not set
= PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext. Speaker)
= PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/Tone
Ringer) = (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) =
(1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) = (1~96)
12 = APR (for B2 mode) (193~512)
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
08
Multiline Telephone Type
0
1
2
= DT3**
= Dterm 8
= Dterm 7
0
09
Side Option Information
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No option
8LK Unit
16LK Unit
24ADM
0
10
Bottom Option
Information (Only applies
to DTL–style telephones)
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No option
APR
ADA
BHA
0
11
Handset Option
Information
0
1
2
= No option
= PSA/PSD
= Bluetooth Cordless Handset
0
For LCA PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01~16
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Logical Port Number
0~256
0
03
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
32 (0dB)
04
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
32 (0dB)
For COTA Unit Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
Programming Manual
Item
Logical Port Number
1~8
Input Data
Default
0~200
0
2-7
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
For ODTA PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01~04
Item
01
Logical Port Number
02
2/4 Wire
03
E&M Line Control Method
Input Data
Default
0~200
0
0 = 2 Wire
1 = 4 Wire
1
0 = TYPE I
1 = TYPE V
0
For DIOP PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
2-8
01~04
Item
Input Data
Default
01
LD/OPX Specification
0
1
= LD Trunk
= OPX
0
02
Logical Port Number
0
1
= 1~200 (LD Trunk)
= 1~256 (OPX)
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
For BRIA PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
Item
No
01~04
Item
Input Data
Default
01
ISDN Line Mode
0
1
= Not Used
= T-Point
1
02
Logical Port Number
0
1
= Not Used
= For T-Bus (1~200)
0
= Point-to-Multipoint
= Point-to-Point
0
The starting port number of a BRI
line is displayed. Two logic ports are
automatically assigned to a BRI line.
03
Connection Type
0
1
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1~5
1
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
0
1
= Enblock Sending
= Overlap Sending
1
0
1
= Keypad Facility
= Called Party Number
0
0
1
= Slave System
= Master System
0
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
0
Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up
for every type using Program 81-06
(T-Bus).
05
CLIP Information Announcement
Based on this setting, the system
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Dial Sending Mode
ISDN Protocol definition
09
Dial Information Element
ISDN Protocol definition
[Only when Dialing Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending]
10
Master/Slave System
If set to 0, system is synchronized to
network clock. If set to 1, system is not
synchronized to the network clock.
11
--- Not Used ---
14
--- Not Used ---
15
--- Not Used ---
17
ISDN Line Ringback Tone
If Telco does not provide ringback tone,
SV8100 can if set to 1:Enable.
Programming Manual
2-9
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No
18
Item
Type of Number
ISDN Protocol definition
19
Numbering Plan Identification
ISDN Protocol definition
2 - 10
--- Not Used ---
23
Straight/Cross Wiring
24
--- Not Used ---
Default
Unknown
International number
National number
Network specific number
Subscriber number
Abbreviated number
2
Unknown
ISDN numbering plan
Data numbering plan
Telex numbering plan
National standard numbering
plan
= Private numbering plan
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
5
22
Input Data
0 = Auto
1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
For PRTA PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
Item
No.
01~24
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
Logical Port Number
Input Data
1
= for T-Bus
1~200
Default
1
The start port number of a PRI line is
displayed.
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1~5
1
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
2
0
1
= Enbloc Sending
= Overlap Sending
0
0
1
= Keypad Facility
= Called Party Number
0
Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up
for each type in
Program 81-06 (T-Bus)
05
CLIP Information
Based on this setting, the system
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.
06
Length of Cable
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Dial Sending Mode
ISDN Protocol definition
09
Dial Information Element
ISDN Protocol definition
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
(Only when Dialing Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap
Sending)
10
--- Not Used ---
11
--- Not Used ---
12
--- Not Used ---
Programming Manual
2 - 11
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
13
Item
Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit
If the transmit/receive voltage is less
than the setting in 10-03-13, the system
considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and
the PRTA does not come up. Note that
there are different values based on the
setting in 10-03-12 for the PRI.
14
--- Not Used ---
15
--- Not Used ---
16
--- Not Used ---
17
ISDN Ringback Tone
If Telco does not provide ringback tone,
SV8100 can if 10-03-17 is set to
1:Enable.
18
Type of Number
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the number type for the ISDN
circuit.
19
Numbering Plan Identification
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the Numbering Plan used for the
ISDN circuit.
20
Network Exchange Selection
Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN
circuit.
21
2 - 12
Number of Ports
Input Data
Level 0 (lowest sensitivity)
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7 (highest sensitivity)
Default
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
Unknown
International number
National number
Network Specific number
Subscriber number
Abbreviated number
2
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
1
5
Unknown
ISDN numbering plan
Data numbering plan
Telex numbering plan
National standard numbering
plan
= Private numbering plan
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Standard (same as NI-2)
reserved
reserved
DMS (A211)
5ESS
DMS (A233)
4ESS
NI-2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
Auto
4 Ports
8 Ports
12 Ports
16 Ports
20 Ports
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
22
--- Not Used ---
23
Straight/Cross Wiring
Input Data
Default
0
0 = Auto
1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)
For DTI (T1) PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
01~24
Item
Logical Port Number
Input Data
Default
0~200
0
The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.
02
T1 Signal Format Selection
0
1
= D4 (12 Multi Frame)
= ESF (24 Multi Frame)
1
03
Zero Code Suppression
0
1
= B8ZS
= AMI/ZCS
0
04
Line Length Selection
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0
05
T1 Clock Source
0
1
= Internal
= External
1
06
Number of Ports
0
1
2
3
4
5
=
=
=
=
=
=
Auto
4 Ports
8 Ports
12 Ports
16 Ports
20 Ports
0
07
Straight/Cross Wiring
0 = Auto
1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)
0
Programming Manual
0 feet ~ 133 feet
133 feet ~ 266 feet
266 feet ~ 399 feet
399 feet ~ 533 feet
533 feet ~ 655 feet
2 - 13
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
For IPLA PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
001~128
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Trunk Logical Port Number
0~200
0
02
Trunk Type
0
1
= H.323
= SIP
1
03
CCIS Trunk
0
1
= Not CCIS
= CCIS
0
For VM00 PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
01~16
Item
Logical Port Number
Input Data
Default
0
0~256
For CCTA PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
01~24
Item
Logical Port Number
Input Data
Default
0~200
0
The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.
2 - 14
02
T1 Signal Format Selection
0
1
= D4 (12 Multi Frame)
= ESF (24 Multi Frame)
1
03
Zero Code Suppression
0
1
= B8ZS
= AMI/ZCS
0
04
Line Length Selection
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
0
05
T1 Clock Source
0
1
= Internal
= External
0 feet ~ 133 feet
133 feet ~ 266 feet
266 feet ~ 399 feet
399 feet ~ 533 feet
533 feet ~ 655 feet
1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
06
Number of Ports
0
1
2
3
4
5
Auto
4 Ports
8 Ports
12 Ports
16 Ports
20 Ports
0
07
Straight/Cross Wiring
0 = Auto
1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)
0
=
=
=
=
=
=
Conditions
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the
new device in to have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type
manually.
The system must have a blade installed to view/change the options for that type of
blade.
Feature Cross Reference
Universal Slots
Programming Manual
2 - 15
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source.
For internal Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or
one of eleven synthesized selections.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Music on Hold
Source Selection
Input Data
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Default
Internal MOH
External MOH
Service Tone
VMDB
2
Description
The Music on Hold (MOH)
source can be internal
(synthesized) or from a
customer-provided music
source.
The customer-provided source
can connect to a PGD(2)-U10
ADP or the connector on the
side of the Base Cabinet MOH/
IN connection.
Trunk MOH and Extension
MOH music source use the
same Music on Hold source.
2 - 16
02
Music on Hold
Tone Selection
[In case Item 1 is 0]
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[In case Item 1 is 1, 2,
or 3]
1~100 = VRS Message
Number
1
03
Audio Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Background Music
Music on Hold
Programming Manual
2 - 17
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits
(5~8) on PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for General Purpose Relay.
Input Data
General Purpose Relay No.
Item
No.
01
1~8
Item
Input Data
Slot No.
Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No.
Slot No: 0~24
DLCA Port: 0~16
Relay No: 0, 5~8
Default
0-0-0
After each entry, press
the Transfer Key to
advance to the next
entry.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 18
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-06 : ISDN-BRI Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-06 : ISDN - BRI Setup to configure the ISDN - BRI Terminal
Endpoint Identifier (TEI), mode of operation, and Service Profile Identifier (SPID)
number for each circuit B-Channels.
Input Data
SLOT Number
1 ~ 24
ISDN - BRI Circuit
1~4
Item
No.
01
Item
TEI Selection
Selects the method the system
uses when assigning Terminal
Endpoint Identifier (TEI) values
to BRI ports.
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Select by SPID number
= Select by Channel ID number
0
= Route by Called Party Number
= Route by Redirecting Number
0
02
DID Mode
0
1
03
SPID 1
Dial up to 20 digits
No Setting
04
SPID 2
Dial up to 20 digits
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual
2 - 19
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk
calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of
ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with
the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when
the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on
when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Description
Pre-Ringing
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0
Conditions
Used with Analog Trunks only.
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Synchronous Ringing
2 - 20
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on
the CD-CP00-US for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CD-CP00-US
has 32 circuits initially, and an addition 64 circuits are added when a PZ-BS10 is
installed. These are used as follows:
Extension
DTMF receiver for single line telephone
Trunk
DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection
for analog trunks
Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number
Item
No.
01
01~160
Input Data
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default Setting
Circuit/Resource 01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource 09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
(Circuit/Resource 33~96 are not used.)
Circuit/Resource 97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is installed, 97~160 are
available.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Caller ID
Central Office Calls, Placing
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Tie Lines
Programming Manual
2 - 21
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-12 : CD-CP00-US Network Setup to setup the IP Address,
Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses.
Caution! If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be
reset for the changes to take affect.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
IP Address
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
Description
192.168.0.10
Set for CD-CP00-US.
255.255.255.0
The setting of Subnet
Mask is invalid when
all Host Addresses
are 0.
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
02
Subnet
Mask
128.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0
252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
128.0,
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
191.255,
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
If the network section
is:
0,
127,
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet
Mask is invalid.
03
Default
Gateway
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
IP Address for Router.
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
2 - 22
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
04
Time Zone
05
NIC
Interface
Input Data
0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours)
0 = Auto Detect
Default
Description
+7
(-5 hours)
Determine the offset
from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its
respective value. For
example, Eastern
Time (US and
Canada) has a GMT
offset of -5. The
program data would
then be 7 (0= -12, 1=
-11, 2= -10, 3= -9, 4=
-8, 5= -7, 6= -6, 7= -5,
……24= +12)
0
1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
NIC Auto Negotiate
(CD-CP00-US)
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
06
07
08
09
Network
Address
Port
Translation
(NAPT)
Router
Setup
0 = No (Disable)
NAPT
Router IP
Address
(Default
Gateway
[WAN])
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
ICMP
Redirect
0= (Enable)
IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0
If using an external
NAPT Router or not.
0.0.0.0
Sets the IP address
on the WAN side of
router.
1 = Yes (Enable)
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0
1= (Disable)
172.16.0.10
When receiving ICMP
redirect message, this
determines if the IP
Routing Table
updates automatically
or not.
Set for IPLA.
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Programming Manual
2 - 23
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
10
11
Item
Subnet
Mask
NIC Setup
Input Data
Default
128.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0
252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
0 = Auto Detect
Description
255.255.0.0
Set for IPLA.
0
Set for IPLA.
1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex
6 = 1 Gbps, Half Duplex
Conditions
The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 24
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the
CD-CP00-US blade.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
DHCP Server
Mode
0
1
02
Lease Time
Days 0~255
0 day
Hour 0~23
0 hour
= Disable
= Enable
Minutes 1~59
05
Last DHCP Data
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
0
Description
Enable or disable the use of the
built-in DHCP Server.
Lease Time of the IP address to a
client.
Pressing the Transfer Key
increments to the next setting
data.
30 minutes
1
If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting
determines if DHCP resource is
enabled or disabled.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 25
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address
which the DHCP Server leases to a client.
Item
No.
Item
01
The Range of the IP address
to Lease.
When Maximum has not been
entered, the maximum value
equals the minimum value.
Input Data
Minimum:
Default
Related
Program
172.16.0.100
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
When Single is selected in
10-13-04, only 1 scope range
can be entered.
Maximum:
When Divide Same Network is
selected in 10-13-04, a
maximum of 10 scope ranges
can be entered.
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
172.16.5.254
1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 26
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when
the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.
Input Data
Client Number
Item
No.
01
1~512
Item
The IP address should be
assigned out of the scope
range set up in Program 10-14.
Input Data
MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Default
00-00-00-00-00-00
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 27
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the
DHCP server to each client.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
3 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
6 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
TFTP Server
Code number 0~255
66 (Fixed)
Set the name for the TFTP
Server.
Maximum 64 character strings
No setting
MGC
Code number 0~255
129 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
Code number 0~255
12 (Fixed)
Maximum 64 character strings
No setting
Code number 0~255
15 (Fixed)
Maximum 20 character strings
No setting
DNS Server
Set IP address of DNS Server.
03
05
06
Client Host Name
Set the Client Host Name.
07
DNS Domain Name
Set the DNS Domain Name.
2 - 28
Default
Code number 0~255
Router
Set the Router IP address.
02
Input Data
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
Download Protocol
Code number 0~255
43 (Fixed)
Set Download Protocol used
for AutoConfig (for DT700
Series).
Sub code number
163
1 = FTP
2 = HTTP
1
Encryption Information
Code number 0~255
43 (Fixed)
Set an Encryption Information
used for AutoConfig (for DT700
series).
Sub code number
164
Maximum 128 character
strings
No setting
FTP Server Address
Code number 0~255
43 (Fixed)
Set a FTP Server Address
used for AutoConfig.
Sub code number
141
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Config File Name
Code number 0~255
43 (Fixed)
Set a File Name used for
AutoConfig.
Sub code number
151
Maximum 15 character strings
No setting
Code number 0~255
60 (Fixed)
Maximum 256 character
strings
NECDT700
Code number 0~255
69 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
70 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
120 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
Vender Class ID
SNMP Server
POP3 Server
SIP Server (IP Address)
2 - 29
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
17
SIP Server (Domain Name)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
27
2 - 30
FTP Server
Config File Name
LDS Server 1
LDS Server 2
LDS Server 3
LDS Server 4
Next Server IP Address
SIP Server Receive Port
Input Data
Default
Code number 0~255
120 (Fixed)
Maximum 20 character strings
No setting
Code number 0~255
141 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
151 (Fixed)
Maximum 15 character strings
No setting
Code number 0~255
162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Code number 0~255
168 (Fixed)
Port: 1~65535
5080
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 31
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper
information.
Item
01
Name
Gatekeeper Mode
Set IP Address either
automatically or manually if
using an external
Gatekeeper.
Input Data
0
1
2
= No Gatekeeper
= Automatic
= Manual
02
Gatekeeper IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
04
Preferred Gatekeeper
Maximum 124 characters
Default
0
0.0.0.0
No setting
When 10-17-01 is set to 1,
this is used and sets the
preferred ID of multiple
Gatekeepers.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
IP Trunk – H.323
2 - 32
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered
to the outside H.323 Gatekeeper.
Input Data
Number of Alias
Item
01
Name
Alias Address
Set the telephone number
(Alias Address) to external
gatekeeper.
02
1~6
Alias Address Type
Input Data
Dial up to 12 digits
(0~9, , #)
0
= E164
Default
No setting
0
Set the Alias Address Type
to external gatekeeper.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
IP Trunk – H.323
Programming Manual
2 - 33
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each
DSP resource on the VoIP blade.
Input Data
Slot Number
1
DSP Resource Number
01~128
Input Data
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VoIP DSP Resource Selection
Input Data
Default
0 = Common use for both IP
extensions and trunks
1 = IP Extension
2 = SIP Trunk
3 = CCIS
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked
Resource 1 = 1
Resource 2~128 = 0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 34
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/
address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.
Input Data
Type of External Equipment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
CTI Server
ACD MIS
Not Used
Networking System
SMDR Output
DIM Output
Reserved
Reserved
1st Party CTI
ACD Agent Control
O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel
Service
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
01
TCP Port
0~65535
External Device 1 (CTI Server) = 0
External Device 2 (ACD MIS) = 4000
External Device 5 (SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM Output) = 0
External Device 11 (O&M Server) = 8010
External Device 12 (Traffic Report Output) = 0
External Device 13 (Room Data Output for
Hotel Service) = 0
03
Keep Alive Time
1~255 (sec)
30
2 - 35
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 36
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-21 : CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup to set up various hardware,
such as the baud rate of COM port and the switch for control on CD-CP00-US blade.
Input Data
Item
No.
04
Item
External
Source I/O
Selection on
CD-CP00-US
Determines the
external music
source input/
output selection
for CD-CP00-US
CN8 and CN9.
Input Data
0
1
2
= External MOH (CN8)/
External Speaker(CN9)
= BGM source (CN8)/
External Speaker(CN9)
= External MOH (CN8)/BGM
source (CN9)
Default
Related
Program
1
Relationships between CN
number and Relay number are
as follows:
CN8 = Relay2
CN9 = Relay1
05
General
Purpose Relay
Switch
Selection on
CD-CP00-US
0
1
2
= Off
= Relay 1 on CD-CP00-US
= Relay 2 on CD-CP00-US
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 37
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system
is interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port
number and alias address for SV8100 system interconnection.
Input Data
System Number
001~1000
Input Data
Item No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
System
Interconnection
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
02
IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
03
Call Procedure
Port
1~65535
1720
04
Dial Number
Up to 12 digits (0~9)
None
0
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 38
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight
savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the
system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in
which the system is installed.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Daylight Savings Mode
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to
adjust the time for daylight savings/standard
time.
02
Time for Daylight Savings
Input Data
Default
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
00:00~23:59
02:00
Enter the time of day when the system should
adjust for daylight savings time.
03
Start Month (Summer Time)
Enter the month when the system should
adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01~12).
04
Start of Week
Enter the week of the month when the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time. The week will start on the day listed in
10-24-05.
05
Start of Week Day
Enter the day of the week when the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
06
End of Month
Enter the month when the system should
adjust the time for standard time (01~12).
07
End of Week
Enter the week of the month when the system
should adjust the time for standard time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.
Programming Manual
1~12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
3
0 = Last Week of Month
0~5
2
1~7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
1
1~12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
11
0 = Last Week of Month
0~5
1
2 - 39
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
08
Item
End of Week Day
Enter the day of the week when the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
Input Data
Default
1~7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Clock/Calendar Display
2 - 40
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix
registered to the outside gatekeeper.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Gateway Prefix Entry
0 = Off
1 = On
02
Gateway Prefix Value
Up to 12 digits (0~9, , #)
Default
0
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 41
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to
Peer feature for SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Peer to Peer Mode
0 = Off
1 = On
1
02
RTP Forwarding Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
03
SIP Peer to Peer Mode
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Conditions
Disabling 10-26-01 will result in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls
utilizing a DSP resource.
SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in
utilizing a DSP resource.
Disabling 10-26-03 will result in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls utilizing a
DSP resource.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 42
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Domain Name
This sets the domain
name of the SIP-URL.
None
None
Host Name
Up to 48 Characters
(ex.:[email protected])
03
Transport Protocol
0 = UDP
1 = TCP
This sets the host name
of the SIP-URL.
04
UserID
User ID in the SIP Invite
Setup message. It is
also used for outbound
caller ID information if
no information is
assigned in commands
21-17, 21-19, 15-16,
14-12, and 10-36. A
call can not be
completed across the
span if there is no
outbound CID info at
all. The reason for this
is: the “from” and
“display” portion of the
invite message would
be blank, and it would
not know where the call
originated from.
Default
Up to 64 Characters
(ex.:[email protected])
02
This sets the protocol
for the connection.
Programming Manual
Input Data
Up to 32 Characters
When assigning the User ID, the ID may
contain only alpha characters. (A space
and/or special characters are not allowed in
the User ID field).
(ex.:[email protected])
0
None
2 - 43
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
05
Domain Assignment
If the information from
Telco was a domain
name
([email protected])
then set to domain. If
the information for
Telco was a IP address
then set to IP Address.
06
IP Trunk Port
Binding
Trunk port binding is
only used for SIP trunks
to the provider in “NonRegistration Mode
only”. When this is
disabled, an inbound
call comes in and
follows your DID routing
but it comes in on the
first available trunk.
When enabled, the
inbound call comes in
and follows your normal
DID routing but maps to
that specified trunk. If
that trunk is busy, we
will send back a busy
unless you build a hunt
group. To build the
hunt group, it
references command
14-12-02 (pilot register
ID). This then points
you to command 10-3602. All the numbers
with the same pilot
would be in the same
hunt group.
0 = IP Address
1 = Domain Name
0
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 44
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup
for outbound/inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or
not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if
10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the SV8100 still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Default Proxy
(Outbound)
This sets whether
the SIP message is
always sent through
the Default Proxy.
02
Default Proxy
(Inbound)
Need to be
registered in
registration mode.
Input Data
Default
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
This sets whether
the SIP message is
always received
through the Default
Proxy.
03
Default Proxy IP
Address
This is optional and
used if the provider
gives you a proxy
address that is
different than the
registration address.
If the provider is
using domain names
instead of IP
addresses, leave
this at default.
Programming Manual
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
2 - 45
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
04
Default Proxy Port
Number
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 65535
5060
0 = None
1 = Manual
0
The port number of
the Default Proxy is
set.
05
Registrar Mode
The mode registered
in the registration
server is set.
06
Registrar IP
Address
IP address of the
SIP registration
server is set.
07
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Registrar Port
Number
0 ~ 65535
DNS Server Mode
0 = Off
1 = On
0.0.0.0
5060
The port number of
the SIP registration
server is set.
08
This setting
determines if the
DNS server is used.
09
DNS Server IP
Address
If 10-29-08 is 1, this
is effective. This sets
the IP address of the
DNS server.
0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
53
10
DNS Port Number
0 ~ 65535
11
Registrar Domain
Name
Up to 128 Characters
None
Up to 64 Characters
None
Up to 48 Characters
None
If 10-29-08 is 1, this
is effective. This sets
the port number of
the DNS server.
This sets the domain
name of the
registration server.
12
Domain Name
This specifies the
domain name of the
SIP server.
13
2 - 46
Proxy Host Name
This specifies the
host name of the SIP
server.
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
14
SIP Carrier Choice
This selects the
carrier type of the
SIP server.
15
Registration
Expiry (Expire)
Time
Input Data
0~7
0 = Standard
1 = Carrier A
2 = Carrier B
3 = Carrier C
4 = Carrier D
5 = Carrier E
6 = Carrier F
7 = Carrier G
120 ~ 65535 seconds
Default
0
3600
This sets the
expiration time when
the SIP trunk
registers to the Sip
server. When half
the time set here
passes, the
registration update is
automatically done.
17
DNS Source Port
0~65535
53
(10-29-08 must be
On)
This sets the DNS
source port number.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 47
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the
authentication options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
User Name
Input Data
Default
Up to 64 Characters
None
Up to 32 Characters
None
This sets the user
name of the SIP
trunk.
03
Password
This sets the SIP
trunk password.
04
Authentication
Trial
0~9
1
This is how many
times it will try an
authenticate before
timing out and not
registering.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 48
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the
registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Registration
Expire Time
Input Data
Default
60 ~ 65535
3600
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
After this timer
expires, the UA’s are
forced to reregister
with the CPU. This
allows the CPU to
keep a current
location of the entire
end UA’s.
02
Authentication
Mode
Check here if a
password is desired
for the IP SIP
phones to register.
When checked,
15-05-16 must have
a password entered
and also the SIP
phone must have the
same password.
When using
Authentication, the
station number is the
authorization name.
03
Registrar/Proxy
Domain Name
Up to 64 Characters
None
This sets the domain
name of the SIP
proxy.
Programming Manual
2 - 49
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
04
Registrar/Proxy
Host Name
Up to 48 Characters
None
This sets the domain
name of the SIP
proxy.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 50
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP
trunk registration information.
Input Data
Register ID
1~31
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Registration
This setting
determines if the SIP
trunk information is
registered.
02
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
0
Up to 32 Characters
None
Authentication
User ID
Up to 64 Characters
None
Authentication
Password
Up to 32 Characters
None
User ID
This sets the SIP
trunk User ID.
03
This sets the SIP
trunk Authentication
User ID.
04
This sets the SIP
trunk authentication
password.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 51
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options
for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
UPnP Mode
Router must support
UPnP.
02
Retry Time
Input Data
Default
0
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0,60 ~ 3600
(1~59 cannot be input)
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 52
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-38 : BGM Resource Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup to configure the Background Music
Source input.
Input Data
Ite
m
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
BGM Resource Type
0 = CD-CP00-US
(MOH/IN)
1 = ACI Port
0
02
ACI Port Number for BGM Source
(only used if 10-38-01 is set to 1)
0 ~ 96
0
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Background Music
Programming Manual
2 - 53
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use
fractional T1 or PRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Fractional
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 54
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP
trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled.
Input Data
Slot Number
1
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
IP Trunk
Availability
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
02
Number of Ports
0~128
0
04
Number of IP
CCIS Ports
0~128
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 55
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual
Loop Back Port.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Number of Loop Back Ports
0~30 (0 = No setting)
0
02
Logical Trunk Port Number
0~168
0
03
Logical Station Port Number
0~480
0
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
1~5
1
05
Calling Party Number
0 = No
1 = Yes
1
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 56
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table.
Input Data
Routing Table Number
001~100
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Network
Address
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 ~ 191.254.255.254
0.0.0.0
192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254
02
03
Subnet
Mask
Default
Gateway
128.0.0.0
192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0
252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
0.0.0.0
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 57
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup to setup the information of
SIP Multiline (DT700 series) Server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Register Mode
0 = Normal mode:
When the phone boots up it
will report the ext. assigned
in the phone or choose the
next available extension in
the system. No password
is required.
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0
0 = Normal
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
1= Auto:
If set to Auto then the SIP
user name and password
must be entered into the
actual IP phone. These
settings must match 84-22/
15-05-27, or the phone will
not come on-line.
2 = Manual:
When the phone boots up it
will prompt user to enter a
user id and password
before logging in. It checks
this user id/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If
there is no match, the
phone will not come online.
04
Server Name
Up to 32 characters
sipphd
Assign the Server name to
be used in the SIP URL.
2 - 58
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
06
Item
Register Port
Input Data
0~65535
Default
Related
Program
5080
Assign the port number in
which the SIP messages
are sent to on the IPLA.
This same port number
must be assigned in the
SIP Multiline terminals.
If this command is
changed, it requires a CPU
reset.
07
Encryption Mode
0 = Off
1 = On
0
08
Encryption Type
0 = Mode1
0
09
One Time Password
Up to 10 characters
(0~9, , #)
10
Start Port
1~512
11
Multicast IP Address
224.0.0.0~
239.255.255.255
This sets the Multicast IP
address so that two or
more main devices don’t
overlap on the same
network, or if Multicast is
used by other IP services.
12
Multicast Port
0~65535
None
10-46-07
1
10-46-01
224.0.0.10
30000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 59
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the
information of Terminal License Server.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Register Port of
TCP I/F
0~65535
02
TCP Keep Alive
Time
1~255 seconds
Default
Description
6080
5
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 60
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-48 : License Activation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the
license server.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Software Key
Code
20-digit character
None
02
Activation Code
8-digit hexadecimal number
None
03
Feature Code
7-digit number
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 61
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-49 : License File Activation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the
license file via USB memory which is issued from the license server.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Save License File
on USB Drive
Input Data
Dial 1 + TRF
(Press TRF to cancel)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 62
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-50 : License Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is
stored in a system.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Read Data
01
License Name
None
02
License Quantity
0~32767
03
Free License Quantity
0~32767
04
Free License Remaining
Days
0~9999
2 - 63
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Refer to the following table to assist with licensing information.
Table 2-2 License Information
2 - 64
License Code
License
Name
Reset
Required
0001
712 Port
Yes
0002
NetLink
Yes
0007
Hotel/Motel
(PMS)
Yes
0008
SMDR
0009
Remote
Upgrade
Yes
On
0014
256 Port
Yes
On/Off
0021
Main S/W
Version
Yes
0111
1stPartyCTI
Ether
0112
3rdPartyCTI
Clien
0123
OAI Interface
1001
VRS
1
16
1002
InMail
1
8
1011
InMail Multi
Lan
1
20
1401
UMS Port
1
16
1402
UMS Fax Port
1
4
1403
UMS TTS Port
1
6
1404
UMS Client
1
512
1406
UMS Multi
Languag
1
25
1407
UMS Hosp.
and PMS
1408
UMS Hosp.
Languag
1409
UMS Amis/
Plus Net
1410
UMS TTS
Language
2001
ACD
On/Off
2102
ACD-MIS
Basic
On/Off
Min
Max
Note
On/Off
1
49
On/Off
On/Off
USB Drive
required to
load software
1
16
1
128
Yes
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
1
10
On/Off
1
10
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)
License Code
License
Name
Reset
Required
Min
Max
Note
2103
ACD-MIS
Add.Monit
1
4
2104
ACD-MIS
Agent
1
197
2105
ACD-MIS XML
Manag
1
200
3000
CA-Basic
On/Off
3001
CA-256
Station
On/Off
3002
CA-Up 20 to
256
On/Off
3003
CA-Network
Client
1
999
3004
CAAddRemote
Site
1
999
3005
CARemoteSiteSo
ft
1
999
3006
CA-Traffic
Analys
On/Off
3007
CA-PMS
Intergratio
On/Off
3008
CA-Web
Reporting
On/Off
3009
CA-IPKII CA
Migra
On/Off
3010
CA-IPKII
CESMigra
On/Off
3013
CA-Add
Stations
1
256
5001
IP Trunk
1
128
Limited by IPL
Channels
5101
IP Terminal
Basic
1
512
Limited by IPL
Channels
5111
IP Terminal
Advan
1
512
Limited by IPL
Channels
5131
IP Megaco
Migrati
5301
SoftPhone
Programming Manual
On/Off
1
128
2 - 65
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-2 License Information (Continued)
License
Name
License Code
Reset
Required
Min
Max
5303
SoftPhone
Enhance
1
128
5304
Attendant
1
128
5305
Assistant
1
128
6000
PVA-CONF
Port
1
16
6101
PVA-IVR Port
1
16
Note
Conditions
Confirm license by entering Feature Code No. (0~9999)
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 66
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA to select whether the CD-PRTA
works as PRI or T1.
Input Data
System ID
0~50
Slot Number
01~24
Input Data
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
PRI/T1 Selection
Chose whether the CD-PRTA
works as PRI or T1.
Input Data
0 = PRI
1 = T1
Default
0 = PRI
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 67
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free
of charge/Demo license.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Remaining days of Free/
Demo License
Read Data
0~9999
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 68
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license
information for each unit.
Input Data
Slot Number
1~24
License Index Number
1~32
Input Data
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Read Data
01
License Code
0000~9999
02
License Quantity
0~255
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 69
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-55 : Package Network Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-55 : Package Network Setup to set the network information for
each unit. This program sets the SPOE of each package.
Input Data
Slot Number
1~24
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
IP Address
02
--- Not Used ---
03
04
Input Data
0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254
172.16.1.100
Main/Add-on
0
1
1
Sub Net Mask
128.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
254.0.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.255.0.0
= Main
= Add-on
255.255.224.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.254
05
2 - 70
Default
Default
Gateway
192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
248.0.0.0
252.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.240.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 71
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone to set the contents of XML portal page
provided to the IP Phone. The XML Portal Page is included in the XML application
name and URL Link information. XML URL Link Information can be set for up to five
system bases.
Input Data
XML URL Information Link
1~5
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Name
Up to 40 characters.
No Setting
02
URL
Up to 256 characters.
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 72
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The
numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits
an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as
service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet
the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the
site.
CAUTION!
Program
11
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system
operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering
plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use
the chart for Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on
page 2-75 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup
copy of your system data.
Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:
Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change
You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column
in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-75 table, the
nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12,
etc.) are for two digit codes.
Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with
that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning
with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire
range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2
the entries affected are 600~699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries
affected are 6000~6999.)
Programming Manual
2 - 73
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials.
For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning
with 60. In the default program, only and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes
are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make
separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is
because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are
undefined.
Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (PRG 11-20)
to define the codes.
Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change
After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits
comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-3
System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-75 table.
Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected
After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is
the Dial Type column in the Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings on page
2-75 table. The choices are:
Dial
Types
2 - 74
Dial Type Description
Related Program
0
--- Not Used ---
1
Service Code
2
Extension Number
3
Trunk Access Code
11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
4
Special Trunk Access
11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code
5
Operator Access
6
ARS/F-Route Access
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
11-02 : Extension Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
20-17 : Operator Extension
44-xx
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dial
Types
9
Dial Type Description
Dial Extension Analyze
Related Program
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates.
Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. To make extension
numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on
each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program
11-10 ~ 11-16.)
Default
See the following tables for default settings.
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
Programming Manual
New
Dial Type
Default
1X
3
2
11
0
0
12
0
0
13
0
0
14
0
0
15
0
0
16
0
0
17
0
0
18
0
0
19
0
0
10
0
0
1
0
0
1#
0
0
2X
3
2
21
0
0
22
0
0
23
0
0
24
0
0
25
0
0
26
0
0
New
2 - 75
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
2 - 76
New
Dial Type
Default
27
0
0
28
0
0
29
0
0
20
0
0
2
0
0
2#
0
0
3X
4
2
31
0
0
32
0
0
33
0
0
34
0
0
35
0
0
36
0
0
37
0
0
38
0
0
39
0
0
30
0
0
3
0
0
3#
0
0
4X
3
1
41
0
0
42
0
0
43
0
0
44
0
0
45
0
0
46
0
0
47
0
0
48
0
0
49
0
0
New
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
Programming Manual
New
Dial Type
Default
40
0
0
4
0
0
4#
0
0
5X
3
1
51
0
0
52
0
0
53
0
0
54
0
0
55
0
0
56
0
0
57
0
0
58
0
0
59
0
0
50
0
0
5
0
0
5#
0
0
6X
3
1
61
0
0
62
0
0
63
0
0
64
0
0
65
0
0
66
0
0
67
0
0
68
0
0
69
0
0
60
0
0
6
0
0
6#
0
0
New
2 - 77
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
2 - 78
New
Dial Type
Default
7X
3
1
71
0
0
72
0
0
73
0
0
74
0
0
75
0
0
76
0
0
77
0
0
78
0
0
79
0
0
70
0
0
7
0
0
7#
0
0
8X
1
1
81
0
0
82
0
0
83
0
0
84
0
0
85
0
0
86
0
0
87
0
0
88
0
0
89
0
0
80
0
0
8
0
0
8#
0
0
9X
1
3
91
0
0
92
0
0
New
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
Programming Manual
New
Dial Type
Default
93
0
0
94
0
0
95
0
0
96
0
0
97
0
0
98
0
0
99
0
0
90
0
0
9
0
0
9#
0
0
0X
1
5
01
0
0
02
0
0
03
0
0
04
0
0
05
0
0
06
0
0
07
0
0
08
0
0
09
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0#
0
0
X
2
1
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
New
2 - 79
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-3 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)
Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special
Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension
Analyze, 0=Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
New
Dial Type
Default
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#
0
0
#X
0
0
#1
2
1
#2
2
1
#3
2
1
#4
2
1
#5
2
1
#6
2
1
#7
2
1
#8
2
1
#9
2
1
#0
2
1
#
4
1
##
2
1
New
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Flexible System Numbering
2 - 80
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The
extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number
should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to
move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.
Input Data
Extension Port Number
Item
No.
Extension
Number
01
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
001 ~ 512
Description
Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line
telephones (including SLTII Adapter, APR), and IP telephones.
Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.
Default
Programming Manual
1
101
2
102
3
103
199
100
3101
~
99
~
~
Extension
Number
~
Extension Port
Number
512
3513
2 - 81
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Calling
Flexible System Numbering
Intercom
2 - 82
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension
numbers. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s)
of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.
Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Virtual Extension
Number
Dial (up to 8 digits)
001~256
Description
Set up Virtual Extension numbers.
The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.
Default
Programming Manual
1
201
2
202
3
203
299
100
3601
~
99
~
~
Extension
Number
~
Virtual Port
Number
256
3757
2 - 83
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Flexible System Numbering
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
2 - 84
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number
to be used for the ACI. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first
and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program
11-20.
Input Data
ACI Port Number
Item
No.
ACI
Extension
Number
01
Dial
(Up to 8 digits)
01~96
Description
The extension number cannot be
duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04,
11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.
Related Program
10-03 : Basic Configuration
for each blade.
Default
ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Flexible System Numbering
Programming Manual
2 - 85
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users
dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have
up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in
Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item
No.
Extension
Group Pilot
Number
01
Dial
(Up to 8 digits)
Description
Use this program to assign
department group pilot
numbers.
The number set up by Program
11-02 (Extension Numbering)
cannot be used.
The extension number cannot
be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-08, and
11-17.
01~64
Related Program
16-01 : Department (Extension)
Group Basic Data Setup
16-02 : Department Group
Assignment for Extensions
16-03 : Secondary Department
Group
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
2 - 86
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI
Groups set in Program 33-02. The pilot number can have up to four digits. The first
and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program
11-20 as type 2.
Input Data
ACI Group Number
Item
No.
01
ACI Group Pilot
Number
Dial
(Up to 8 digits)
01~16
Description
The extension number cannot be duplicated in
Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-07, and 11-17.
Related
Program
33-02
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming Manual
2 - 87
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9).
The trunk access code can be set from 1~8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in
Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route
Selection. The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is
desired for an outgoing line.
Caution!
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits
Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you
must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.
Input Data
Item
No.
Trunk Access
Code
01
Dial
(Up to four digits)
Description
Default
Related Program
Use this program to
assign the trunk access
code (normally 9). This is
the code extension users
dial to access Automatic
Route Selection.
9
11-01 : System
Numbering
14-01 : Basic Trunk
Data Setup
14-05 : Trunk
Group
14-06 : Trunk
Group Routing
21-02: Trunk Group
Routing for
Extensions
2 - 88
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
02
Trunk Access
Code
2nd Trunk Route
Access Code
Description
Default
Related Program
Use this program to
define additional trunk
access codes.
When a user dials the
Alternate Trunk Route
Access Code, the system
routes their call to the
Alternate Trunk Route.
No
Setting
11-01 : System
Numbering
14-01 : Basic Trunk
Data Setup
14-05 : Trunk
Group
14-06 : Trunk
Group Routing
21-02 : Trunk
Group Routing for
Extensions
21-15 : Individual
Trunk Group
Routing for
Extensions
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection
Central Office Calls, Placing
Trunk Group Routing
Programming Manual
2 - 89
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the
Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service
Codes in Programs 11-11~11-16. The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~42).
The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing (item 26) allows users to force a trunk line to
disconnect.
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 90
Item
Terminals
Default
MLT, SLT
718
Related
Program
01
Night Mode Switching
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Setting the System Time
MLT
728
04
Storing Common Speed Dialing
Numbers
MLT
753
05
Storing Group Speed Dialing
Numbers
MLT
754
06
Setting the Automatic Transfer for
Each Trunk Line
MLT
733
24-04-01
07
Canceling the Automatic Transfer
for Each Trunk Line
MLT
734
24-04-01
08
Setting the Destination for
Automatic Trunk Transfer
MLT
735
24-04-01
09
Charging Cost Display by the
Supervisor
MLT
Not Set
10
--- Not Used ---
11
Entry Credit for Toll Restriction
MLT
Not Set
12-xx
20-07-01
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Related
Program
Terminals
Default
MLT
618
12-xx
20-07-01
12
Night Mode Switching for Other
Group
13
--- Not Used ---
14
--- Not Used ---
15
--- Not Used ---
16
Leaving Message Waiting
(Requires CPU to be licensed for
Hotel/Motel)
MLT
626
11-11-09
17
Dial Block by Supervisor
MLT
601
90-19
18
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door
Box
MLT
722
13-05
19
--- Not Used ---
20
VRS - Record/Erase Message
MLT, SLT
616
20-07-13
21
VRS - General Message Playback
MLT, SLT
611
20-07-14
22
VRS - Record or Erase General
Message
MLT, SLT
612
20-07-15
23
SMDR - Extension Accumulated
Printout Code
MLT
621
20-07-18
24
SMDR - Group Accumulated
Printout Code
MLT
622
20-07-19
25
Account Code Accumulated
Printout Code
MLT
623
20-07-20
26
Forced Trunk Disconnect
MLT, SLT
Not Set
20-07-11
27
Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing
Calls
MLT, SLT
645
20-07-12
28
--- Not Used ---
29
--- Not Used ---
30
--- Not Used ---
31
--- Not Used ---
32
Set Private Call Refuse
MLT, SLT
Not Set
33
Entry Caller ID Refuse
MLT
Not Set
34
Set Caller ID Refuse
MLT, SLT
Not Set
35
Dial-In Mode Switching
MLT, SLT
Not Set
Programming Manual
2 - 91
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
MLT, SLT
Not Set
36
Change the Guidance Message
Number on Voice Mail Auto
Attendant
41
Date Setting
MLT
Not Set
42
Maintenance Service
MLT
Not Set
Related
Program
20-07-30
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to Input Data chart on the previous pages.
2 - 92
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to
customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~65).
The function of the Service Code.
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 725 (item 18) allows users to turn on or turn
off Background Music.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
01
Call Forward – All
MLT, SLT
741
02
Call Forward – Busy
MLT, SLT
742
03
Call Forward – No Answer
MLT, SLT
743
04
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
MLT, SLT
744
05
Call Forward – Both Ring
MLT, SLT
745
06
--- Not Used ---
07
Call Forwarding – Follow-Me
MLT, SLT
746
08
Do Not Disturb
MLT, SLT
747
09
Answer Message Waiting
MLT, SLT
0
10
Cancel All Messages Waiting
MLT, SLT
773
11
Cancel Message Waiting
MLT, SLT
771
12
Alarm Clock
MLT, SLT
727
20-01-06
13
Display Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
MLT
678
15-02
Programming Manual
11-10-16
2 - 93
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
14
Text Message Setting
MLT
No
Setting
15
Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls
MLT
721
20-09-05
20-02-12
16
Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls
MLT
723
20-09-05
20-02-12
17
Programmable Function Key Programming
(2-Digit Service Codes)
MLT
751
15-07
11-11-38
18
BGM On/Off
MLT
725
19
Key Touch Tone On/Off
MLT
724
20
Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones
MLT
720
21
Check Incoming Ring Tones
MLT
711
22
Extension Name Programming
MLT
700
23
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL
MLT
679
24
Change Station Class of Service
MLT
677
20-13-28
20-11-17
24-05
15-02
15-01
Allows an extension user to change the COS of
another extension. Must be allowed in Program
20-13-28.
2 - 94
25
Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension
Group
MLT, SLT
602
26
Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
MLT, SLT
603
27
Destination of Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
MLT
604
20-11-17
24-05
28
Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group
MLT, SLT
605
20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08
29
Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
MLT, SLT
606
20-11-17
30
DND Setup for Each Extension Group
MLT, SLT
607
31
DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group
MLT, SLT
608
32
--- Not Used ---
33
Dial Block
MLT, SLT
600
34
Temporary Toll Restriction Override
MLT, SLT
775
35
Pilot Group Withdrawing
MLT, SLT
650
36
Toll Restriction Override
MLT, SLT
663
21-07
21-14
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
37
Ring Volume Set
MLT
729
38
Programmable Function Key Programming
(3-Digit Service Codes)
MLT
752
39
Station Speed Dial Number Entry
MLT, SLT
755
40
--- Not Used ---
41
Tandem Ringing
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
42
--- Not Used ---
43
Headset Mode Switching
MLT, SLT
688
44
Auto Attendant
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
45
Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split)
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
46
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split)
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
47
Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split)
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
48
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split)
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
49
Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
50
Set Message Waiting Indication
SLT
No
Setting
15-03-03
45-01-01
51
Cancel Message Waiting Indication
SLT
No
Setting
15-03-03
45-01-01
52
Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
MLT, SLT
790
53
Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No
Split)
MLT, SLT
791
54
Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination
(No Split)
MLT, SLT
792
55
Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No
Split)
MLT, SLT
793
56
Telephone Book Lock Service
MLT
No
Setting
57
Set Do Not Call Table
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
Programming Manual
15-07
11-11-17
15-07
30-03
2 - 95
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
58
Call Forward with Personal Greeting
MLT, SLT
713
59
Call Forward to Attendant except Busy
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
15-01-08
60
Call Forward to Attendant/No Answer
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
15-01-09
62
Headset Ring Volume Adjustment
MLT
662
11-11-37
15-02-12
15-02-41
15-02-42
63
Double Height Character Indication
MLT
No
Setting
15-02-45
64
Reverse Display Indication
MLT
No
Setting
15-02-44
65
Headset Mode Switching
MLT
No
Setting
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to the Input Data chart above.
2 - 96
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the
Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional
Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~59).
The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 705 (code 05) cancels a previously set
Camp-On.
Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Bypass Call
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
MLT, SLT
707
11-16-09
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override.
This code is available only if you disable the voice
mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.
02
Conference
MLT, SLT
#1
03
Override (Off-Hook Signaling)
MLT, SLT
709
04
Set Camp-On
MLT, SLT
750
05
Cancel Camp-On
MLT, SLT
770
06
Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call
MLT, SLT
712
07
Step Call
MLT, SLT
708
08
Barge-In
MLT, SLT
710
09
Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
10
Station Speed Dialing
MLT, SLT
#2
Programming Manual
16-02
2 - 97
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
2 - 98
Item
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
11
Group Speed Dialing
MLT, SLT
#4
12
Last Number Dial
MLT, SLT
#5
13
Saved Number Dial
MLT, SLT
715
14
Trunk Group Access
MLT, SLT
704
15
Specified Trunk Access
MLT, SLT
#9
16
Trunk Access Via Networking
MLT, SLT
No
Setting
17
Clear Last Number Dialing Data
MLT, SLT
776
18
Clear Saved Number Dialing Data
MLT, SLT
785
19
Internal Group Paging
MLT, SLT
701
20
External Paging
MLT, SLT
703
21
Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging
Group
MLT, SLT
764
22
Meet-Me Answer to External Paging
MLT, SLT
765
23
Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group
MLT, SLT
763
31-02-01
24
Combined Paging
MLT, SLT
1
31-02-01
31-07
25
Direct Call Pickup - Own Group
MLT, SLT
756
26
Call Pickup for Specified Group
MLT, SLT
768
23-02
27
Call Pickup
MLT, SLT
#
23-02
28
Call Pickup for Another Group
MLT, SLT
769
23-02
29
Direct Extension Call Pickup
MLT, SLT
30
Specified Trunk Answer
MLT, SLT
672
31
Park Hold
MLT, SLT
#6
24-03
32
Answer for Park Hold
MLT, SLT
6
24-03
33
Group Hold
MLT, SLT
732
34
Answer for Group Hold
MLT, SLT
762
35
Station Park Hold
MLT, SLT
757
36
Door Box Access
MLT, SLT
702
37
Common Canceling Service Code
MLT, SLT
620
31-01-01
31-02-01
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
MLT
783
MLT, SLT
#7
Related
Program
38
General Purpose Indication
15-07-56
15-07-57
39
--- Not Used ---
40
Station Speed Dialing
41
Voice Over
MLT
690
42
Flash on Trunk lines
SLT
#3
43
Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer)
MLT, SLT
#0
44
Callback Test for SLT
SLT
799
45
Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT)
SLT
749
15-03-07
46
Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT)
SLT
759
15-03-08
47
Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer
SLT
794
11-12-03
SLT
##
11-16-08
14-05
14-06
Splitting (switching) between calls
48
Account Code
49
--- Not Used ---
50
General Purpose Relay
MLT, SLT
780
51
VM Access (InMail and VMS)
MLT, SLT
8
52
Live Monitoring (InMail)
53
54
MLT
No
Setting
Live Recording at SLT
MLT, SLT
654
VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS
MLT, SLT
782
MLT
786
Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS
Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature,
this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.
55
--- Not Used ---
56
E911 Alarm Shut Off
Enter the Service Code that an extension user can
dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.
57
Tandem Trunking
MLT, SLT
#8
58
Transfer Into Conference
MLT, SLT
624
Assign the Service Code users dial to Transfer a
call to a Conference call.
Programming Manual
21-01-13
21-01-14
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
2 - 99
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
59
Item
Trunk Drop Operation for SLT
Terminals
Default
SLT
No
Setting
Related
Program
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages.
2 - 100
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service
Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~13).
The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
01
ACD Log In/Log Out (for KTS)
02
ACD Log Out (for SLT)
SLT
655
03
Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
SLT
656
04
Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
SLT
657
05
Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
SLT
658
06
Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
SLT
659
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Agent ID Code Login
MLT
No Setting
MLT
No Setting
MLT
667
MLT
668
MLT, SLT
5
Allows an AIC Agent to log into a group.
09
Agent ID Code Logout
Allows an AIC Agent to log out of a group.
10
ACD Agent Login by Supervisor
Allows an ACD Supervisor to log into a group.
11
ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor
Allows an ACD Supervisor to log out of a group.
Programming Manual
2 - 101
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
12
Terminals
Item
Change Agent ACD Group by Supervisor
Default
MLT
669
MLT
670
When using service code 669 to change an agent ACD
group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit number for
the group. For example, to change to ACD group 4, the
entry would be 669 04.
13
ACD Agent Changing Own ACD Group
Using this service code, an ACD Agent can reassign
themselves to another ACD Group.
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 102
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service
Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional
Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can
only be used at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~18).
The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Terminals
Default
01
Set DND for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
627
02
Cancel DND for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
628
03
Set DND for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
629
04
Cancel DND for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
630
05
Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
631
06
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
632
07
Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
633
08
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
634
09
Set Room to Room Call Restriction
MLT, SLT
635
10
Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel)
MLT, SLT
636
11
Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
637
12
Check-In
MLT, SLT
638
13
Check-Out
MLT, SLT
639
2 - 103
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
14
Room Status Change for Own Extension
MLT, SLT
640
15
Room Status Change for Other Extension
MLT, SLT
641
16
Room Status Output
MLT
642
17
Hotel Room Monitor
MLT, SLT
675
18
Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction
MLT
666
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
2 - 104
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to
customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in
the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs
11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~14).
The function of the Service Code.
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
The default entry.
Programs that may be affected when changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Terminals
Default
01
Remote Maintenance
730
02
ACD Access in Dial-In Conversion Table
760
03
Backup Data Save
MLT
#
#9
#
Related
Program
22-04
22-11
This option saves the user’s soft key settings
(extension programmed Call Forwards, DND, etc.).
This feature should be used before upgrading the
system software.
Programming Manual
04
--- Not Used ---
05
System Programming Mode, Log-On
MLT
#
06
Wake on LAN to APSU Unit
MLT
No
Setting
07
--- Not Used ---
08
Network Message Lamp Control
11-01
10-22
766
2 - 105
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
09
Transfer to Incoming Ring Group
10
--- Not Used ---
11
Ethernet Port Reset
12
Extension Data Swap
13
Remote Access from DISA
14
Modem Access
Terminals
Default
Related
Program
No
Setting
MLT
92-04
No
Setting
22-02
740
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
2 - 106
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize
additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.
The following chart shows:
The number of each code (01~11).
The function of the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension
switches the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently
defined).
Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Default
Related
Program
01
Step Call
2
11-12-07
02
Barge-In
No Setting
11-12-08
03
Switching of Voice/Signal Call
1
11-12-06
04
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
05
Camp-On
06
DND/Call Forward Override Bypass
07
11-12-03
#
11-12-04
No Setting
11-12-01
Message Waiting
0
11-12-09
08
Voice Over
6
11-12-41
09
Access to Voice Mail
8
11-12-51
10
(Department) STG All Ring Mode
No Setting
11-12-09
16-01-05
11
Station Park Hold
No Setting
11-12-35
Programming Manual
2 - 107
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages.
2 - 108
Program 11 : System Numbering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for
each ACD Group. This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group.
Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 500) for the master
number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default, has a port number
assigned (for example: in the 101~199, 3101~3257), first remove the default
assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as an ACD Master Number,
first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
01~64
Item
No.
ACD Group Pilot Number
01
Dial (Up to eight digits)
Default
No ACD Group Pilot Numbers assigned to any ACD Group (1~64).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys
Programming Manual
2 - 109
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on
three or more digits. This program is only relevant if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9
(Dial Extension Analyze).
Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table
01~128
Item No.
Dial Extension Analyze Table
01
Dial (Up to eight digits: 0, 1~9, #, , @)
02
Type of Dials:
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access
Default
Dial Extension Analyze Tables are not set at default.
Conditions
When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial
type, the lower table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and
Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to determine the dial type.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 110
Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode
options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Manual Night
Mode Switching
02
Automatic Night
Mode Switching
Input
Data
Related
Program
Default
Description
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Allows or prevents
activating Night Service
by dialing a service
code.
11-10-01
0 = Off
1 = On
0
According to a preset
schedule, enable or
disable Automatic Night
Service for the system.
12-02
12-03
12-04
12
Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the
schedule set up.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 111
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern
of the Automatic Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns
are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Time Pattern Number
01~10
Set Time Number
01~20
Item
Description
Input Data
01
Start Time
0000~2359
02
End Time
0000~2359
03
Operation Mode
1~8
Example:
Time Pattern 1
0:00
Mode 3
(midnight)
9:00
Mode 1
(day)
12:00
Mode 4
(rest)
13:00
Mode 1
(day)
17:00
Mode 4
(rest)
18:00
Mode 2
(night)
22:00
Mode 3
(midnight)
0:00
To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:
Time setting 01:
Time setting 02:
Time setting 03:
Time setting 04:
Time setting 05:
Time setting 06:
Time setting 07:
2 - 112
00:00 to 09:00
09:00 to 12:00
12:00 to 13:00
13:00 to 17:00
17:00 to 18:00
18:00 to 22:00
22:00 to 00:00
Mode 3 (midnight)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 2 (night)
Mode 3 (midnight)
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Time Pattern 2
0:00
Mode 2
(night)
0:00
Time setting 01:
00:00 to 00:00
Mode 2 (night)
Default
All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
02
03
04
:
20
0000
0800
1700
0000
:
0000
0800
1700
0000
0000
:
0000
2
1
2
1
:
1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
02
:
20
0000
0000
:
0000
0000
0000
:
0000
2
1
:
1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
:
20
0000
:
0000
0000
:
0000
1
:
1
Time Pattern 2
Time Pattern 3~10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 113
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule
of night-switch settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Item No.
01~32
Day of the Week
Time Schedule
Pattern Number
01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
01
04 = Wednesday
0~10
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
Default
Day of the Week
2 - 114
Time Schedule
Pattern Number
01 = Sunday
2
02 = Monday
1
03 = Tuesday
1
04 = Wednesday
1
05 = Thursday
1
06 = Friday
1
07 = Saturday
2
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 115
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule
of holiday night-switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days
when the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Item
No.
01
01~32
Days and Months
Time Pattern Number
0101~1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec. 31)
0~10
(0 = No Setting)
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
2 - 116
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign
Day/Night Mode Group for each extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Item
No.
Night Mode Service
Group Number
Default
01
01~32
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 117
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/
Night Mode Group for each trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Night Mode Service
Group Number
Default
01
01~32
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
2 - 118
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message
which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
01
Text Message
Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric)
Default
Mode 1 = No setting
Mode 2 = <Night>
Mode 3 = <Midnight>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 = <Day2>
Mode 6 = <Night2>
Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
Mode 8 = <Rest2>
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 119
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of
toggle key for each Day/Night Mode.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01~32
Item No.
Range
01
2~8
(default = 2)
Example:
When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed (SC 751, 09 +0), the
following modes are switched:
Press once = Night
Press twice = Mid-night
Press third = Day
Default = 2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
2 - 120
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing
functions.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
0
Set where the Speed Dial bins
will use Trunk Routing (0) or
dial the bin as though it is an
Intercom number (1).
1
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Number of Common Speed
Dialing Bins
Assign the number of Speed
Dial bins that will be used for
System Speed Dials.
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
= Trunk
Outgoing
Mode
= Intercom
Outgoing
Mode
0
13-05
0~2000
0 = No Common
Speed
Dialing
1000
13-04
Program
13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Programming Manual
2 - 121
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to
be used by each Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group
Assignment for Extensions).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Speed Dialing
Group Number
Start Address of
Speed Dialing Bin
End Address of
Speed Dialing Bin
0~1990
0, 9~1999
01~64
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
2 - 122
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign
Speed Dialing Group for each extension. There are 64 available Speed Dialing
groups.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item No.
Group Number
Default Value
01
01~64
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Programming Manual
2 - 123
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data
in the Speed Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned
to the Speed Dialing numbers.
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
Item
No.
0~1999
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Speed Dialing Data
1~9, 0, , #,
Pause (Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)
No
Setting
02
Name
Maximum 12 Characters
(Use dial pad to enter name)
No
Setting
03
Transfer Mode
0
1
2
04
Transfer Destination Number
If Transfer mode is (Refer to
13-04-03):
= Not Used
= Internal Dial
= Incoming Ring Group
(IRG)
Related
Program
0
No
Setting
13-04-03
1 = Internal Dial Mode
1~9, 0, , #, P, R, @
(Maximum 24 Characters)
2 = Incoming Ring Group
0 ~ 100 (IRG Number)
P=Pause
R=Recall
@= Additional Digits when
using ISDN functionality
2 - 124
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
05
Item
Incoming Ring Pattern
Input Data
Incoming Ring Pattern
0 = Normal Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1~4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1~5)
Default
Related
Program
0
13-04-03
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Programming Manual
2 - 125
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be
seized for each Speed Dialing number.
If this program has an entry of ‘0’ (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk
access group routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is
available only in External Speed Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
0~1999
Item No.
Trunk Group Number
01
0~100
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
2 - 126
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name to set up the dial
number and name of each Telephone Book Number.
Input Data
Telephone Book Number
Item
No.
0~100
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Speed Dialing Data
1~9, 0, , #,
Pause (Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)
No
Setting
02
Name
Maximum 12 Characters
(Use dial pad to enter name)
No
Setting
04
Group Number
1~20
Related
Program
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 127
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-08 : Telephone Book System Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name to set up the name of the
Telephone Book.
Input Data
Telephone Book Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Telephone Book Name
0~100
Input Data
Default
Up to six characters
No
Setting
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 128
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name to set up the group name of
the Telephone Book.
Input Data
Telephone Book Number
Item
No.
01
0~100
Item No.
Group Number
01
0~20
Item
Input Data
Group Name
Up to 12 characters
Default
Related
Program
1 = Group 01
2 = Group 02
3 = Group 03
:
:
:
20 = Group 20
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 129
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-10 : Telephone Book Routing
Level:
SB
Description
Use Program 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing to set up outgoing mode when
using the Telephone Book. Trunk outgoing mode follows Program 14-06 setting.
Input Data
Telephone Book Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Outgoing Mode
0~100
Input Data
0 = Trunk Outgoing
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Default
Related
Program
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 130
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for
each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its
range and default setting.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Name
Set the names for
trunks. The trunk
name displays on a
multiline terminal for
incoming and
outgoing calls.
02
Transmit Level
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain for the trunk. The
option sets the gain
(signal amplification)
for the trunk you are
programming.
03
Receive Level
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain for the trunk. The
option sets the gain
(signal amplification)
for the trunk you are
programming.
Programming Manual
14
001~200
Input Data
Default
Up to 12
Characters
Line 001
Line 002
Line 003
:
Line 200
1~63
(-15.5dB~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
32 (0dB)
1~63
(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
32 (0dB)
Program
Related
Program
2 - 131
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
04
Item
Input Data
Default
Transmit Gain Level
for Conference and
Transfer Calls
1~63
(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
32 (0dB)
1~63
(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
16 (-8dB)
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.
05
Receive Gain Level
for Conference and
Transfer Calls
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.
06
SMDR Printout
Use this option to
have the system
include/exclude the
trunk you are
programming from the
SMDR printout. Refer
to Program 35-01 and
35-02 for SMDR
printout options.
07
Outgoing Calls
Use this option to
allow/prevent
outgoing calls on the
trunk you are
programming.
08
Toll Restriction
Use this option to
enable/disabled Toll
Restriction for the
trunk. If enabled, the
trunk follows Toll
Restriction
programming
(example: Programs
21-05, 21-06). If
disabled, the trunk is
a toll free line.
2 - 132
= No Print
Out
= Prints Out
0
0
1
= Deny (No)
= Allow
(Yes)
1
0
= Restriction
Disabled
(No)
= Restriction
Enabled
(Yes)
1
0
1
1
Related
Program
35-01
35-02
21-04
21-05
21-06
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
09
Item
Private Line
0
1
10
11
DTMF Tones for
Outgoing Calls
0
Use this option to
enable (1) or disable
(0) DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls.
1
Account Code
Required
0
1
12
--- Not Used ---
13
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
0
Use this option to
enable (1) or disable
(0) loop supervision
for the trunk. This
option is required for
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise and
Tandem Trunking
only.
1
Long Conversation
Cutoff
0
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Long Conversation
Cutoff feature for
each trunk.
1
Long Conversation
Alarm Before Cutoff
0
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Long Conversation
Alarm for each trunk.
1
14
15
Programming Manual
Related
Program
Input Data
Default
= Disable
Private
Line
(Normal)
= Enable
Private
Line
(Private
Line)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
1
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
1
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
20-21-03
20-21-04
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
20-21-01
20-21-02
2 - 133
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
16
17
Item
Forced Release of
Held Call
0
Use this option to
enable/disable forced
release for calls on
Hold. If enabled, the
system disconnects a
call if it is on Hold
longer than a
programmed interval
(Program 24-01-05).
If disabled, forced
disconnection does
not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects
this option.
1
Trunk to Trunk
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
Alarm
0
1
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
feature for DISA
callers.
18
Warning Beep Tone
Signaling
0
1
19
2 - 134
Privacy Mode
Toggle Option
0
Use this option to
enable or disable a
trunk ability to be
switched from private
to non-private mode
by pressing the line
key or Privacy
Release function key.
1
Input Data
Default
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
Related
Program
24-01-01
24-01-05
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
20
21
Item
22
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
14-01-21
14-01-20
0
Allow (1) or prevent
(0) the system from
automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID
information when a
user places a call. If
allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system
automatically inserts
the Caller ID block
code (defined in
14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits.
1
Caller ID Block Code
Dial (up to eight
digits)
67
Caller ID to Voice
Mail
0
0
Enable or disable the
system ability to send
the Caller ID digits
(Remote Log-On
Protocol) to voice
mail.
1
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
23
--- Not Used ---
24
Trunk-to-Trunk
Outgoing Caller ID
through Mode
Enable (1) or Disable
(0) the ability to send
the original Caller ID
through when the call
is Forward OffPremise.
Programming Manual
Default
Block Outgoing
Caller ID
Enter the code, up to
8 digits, that should
be used as the Caller
ID Block Code. This
code is automatically
inserted before dialed
digits if Program
14-01-20 is set to 1.
0
1
Related
Program
Input Data
2 - 135
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
25
Item
Continued/
Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk
Conversation
0
1
Enable (1) or Disable
(0) the ability to dial a
service code code to
continue or
disconnect the Trunkto-Trunk conversation
after the alert tone is
heard.
Default
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
24-02-11
24-02-12
26
Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Mode
0 = Normal
Transfer
(Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
0
27
Caller ID Refuse
Setup
0
0
1
Related
Program
Input Data
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
28
Effectivity of
“Conversation
Recording
Destination for
Extension”
0 = No Effect
(No)
1 = Available
(Yes)
1
15-12
30
Flexible Ringing by
Caller ID
0
1
13-04
1
32
Anti-trombone
Function
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0 = No Effect
(No)
1 = Available
(Yes)
0
Default
2 - 136
Trunk Port
Number
Name
1
Line 001
2
Line 002
:
:
200
Line 200
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to features in the Input Data table.
Programming Manual
2 - 137
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each
analog trunk port. Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001~200
Item
Default
= Dial Pulse (10
PPS)
= Dial Pulse (20
PPS)
= DTMF
2
0
1
= Normal/delayed
= Immediate
Ringing
1
0
1
= Open Loop Flash
= Ground
0
0
= Timed Flash
(Hooking)
= Disconnect (Cut)
0
81-10-07
81-10-08
= Dial Tone
Detection Not
Used
= Dial Tone
Detection Used
0
21-01-04
Signaling Type (DP/DTMF)
0
This option sets the signaling type for
the trunk.
1
2
02
Ring Detect Type
This option sets Extended Ring Detect
or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk.
For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this
option must be set to 1 for the trunks to
ring and light correctly.
03
Flash Type
This option selects the flash type (open
loop flash or ground). Always set this
option for open loop flash.
04
Hooking Type
This option lets you use Flash for
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing the
FLASH key while on a trunk call.)
05
2 - 138
Related
Program
Input Data
1
Dial Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
0
Use this option enable/disable dial tone
detection for directly accessed trunks.
If disabled, the system outdials on the
trunks without monitoring for dial tone.
1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
06
Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in
Manual Dial Mode
07
DP to DTMF Conversion Options
Determine how a user can convert a
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For
each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF
conversion required. There are three
conversion options: Automatic (0),
Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual
(2).
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0
1
= No Pause (No)
= Pause (Yes)
1
21-01-06
0
1
= Automatic
= Automatic and
Manual
= Manual
2
21-01-03
= Polarity
Reversing
(Polarity)
= Polarity
Reversing or
Timer (Int Digit)
1
21-01-03
2
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to
DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk
to DTMF dialing.
08
Answering Condition
0
1
09
Busy Tone Detection
0
1
= Disable (No)
= Enable (Yes)
0
10
Caller ID
0
1
= No
= Yes
0
0
1
= Disable (No)
= Enable (Yes)
0
0
1
= Disable (No)
= Enable (Yes)
1
Enable or disable a trunk to receive
Caller ID information.
11
Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
Use this option to enable/disable the
system ability to skip over a trunk if dial
tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
12
Programming Manual
Detect Network Disconnect Signal
2 - 139
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
13
Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation
0
1
= Disable (No)
= Enable (Yes)
0
14
Loop Start/Ground Start
0
1
= Loop Start (Loop)
= Ground Start
(Ground)
0
16
--- Not Used ---
17
Sync. Ringing
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
= Disable
= Enable
0
Use this to specify whether or not CO/
PBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing.
Related
Program
Synchronous Ringing does not
apply to incoming DID calls,
off-hook ringing calls, or CO/
PBX ring transfer calls.
18
Busy Tone Detection on Talking
0
1
19
Busy Tone Detection Frequency
1~255
1
14-02-18
20
Busy Tone Detection Interval
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
14-10
21
Fax Branch Connection
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 140
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a
PBX. There is one item for each mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
1~200
Type of Connection
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Stand Alone (Trunk)
Behind PBX (PBX)
Not Used
CTX assume 9
Default
Related
Program
0
22-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual
2 - 141
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also
assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk
group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
Trunk Group Number
01
0~100
001~200
Priority Number
1~200
Default
Trunk Port
Group
Priority
1
1
1
:
:
:
200
1
200
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Trunk Groups
2 - 142
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for
the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the system
routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all
calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk
Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system
contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for
trunk access. There are 100 available Trunk Group Numbers.
Example for setting:
With less than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches
for an idle line in trunk group 2.
With more than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 – Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 – 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2
: Order 1 – Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the
system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.
Programming Manual
2 - 143
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Route Table Number
Item
No.
Priority Order
Number
01
1~4
001~100
Related
Program
Input Data
0 = Not Specify
1~100 : (Trunk Group Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 + Route Table
Number)
14-01-07
14-05
15-01-02
21-02
Default
Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1).
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified).
All Other Routes (2~100) and Order Numbers (1~4) = 0 (Not Specified).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 144
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets an extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can only
place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200 Access
Maps with all 200 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access.
An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06
to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access
options for each Access Map.
911 calls will override Program 14-07 settings.
Input Data
Access Map Number
Item
No.
Trunk Port
Number
01
001~200
001~200
Input Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No access
Outgoing access only
Incoming access only
Access only when trunk on Hold
Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
Incoming and Outgoing access
Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk
on Hold
Default
Access Maps 1~200 = Trunk Ports 1~200 assigned with option 7 access
(incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold).
Programming Manual
2 - 145
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 146
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold
source for a trunk as either the ACI or COI port.
If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be
selected in Item 2.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
02
001~200
Item
Input Data
Default
0 = Internal synthesized/external MOH
1 = A customer-provided source connected to
BGM port
2 = A customer-provided source connected to
ACI port
0
Select a Music on Hold source
for the trunk.
If the MOH Type is 2, the source port number
is 0~96.
0
MOH Type
Source Port Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Music on Hold
Programming Manual
2 - 147
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the
ACI Conversation Recording destination for each trunk.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
ACI Recording Destination Extension Number
001~200
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Default
No Setting
Enter the ACI extension number where the trunk
calls should be recorded.
02
ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
Determine if incoming trunk calls should be
automatically recorded in the ACI.
0 = Off
1 = On
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 148
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This
program refers to incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing
IP Trunk call. This program is used only for H.323.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
IP Trunk ID
001~200
Input Data
Default
0~65535
(0 = No setting)
0
Conditions
This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.
This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.
It is not notified when ID is 0.
Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the
partner system.
Feature Cross Reference
IP Trunk – H.323
Programming Manual
2 - 149
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register
ID for IP Trunks.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
001~200
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Register ID
0 ~ 31
0
02
Pilot Register ID
0 ~ 31
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 150
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-13 : CCIS System Route ID
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID to define the CCIS route ID to the trunk
group used for K-CCIS.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
Trunk
Group
Number
001~100
001~100
Input Data
Default
0 = Not Assigned
1 ~ 8 =CCIS Route IDs
CCIS Route IDs 5~ 8 are for
future use and should not be
used.
0
Related
Program
14-05-01
50-02-01
50-02-02
50-02-03
50-02-04
50-02-05
50-02-06
Conditions
Not used for IP-CCIS
Feature Cross Reference
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
Programming Manual
2 - 151
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment to define the CIC (Circuit
Identifier Code) to each voice channel (trunk port) used for K-CCIS.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 200
Trunk Group Number
001~200
Input Data
0 = Not Assigned
1~127 = CIC Numbers
Default
Related
Program
0
14-05-01
Conditions
CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.
The D-Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment.
This is not used for IP-CCIS.
Feature Cross Reference
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
2 - 152
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic
settings for each extension.
Program
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
Extension Name
Input Data
Up to 12 Characters
Define the extension/virtual
extension name.
02
Default
15
STA 101 =
Ext 101
STA 102 =
Ext 102,
etc.
0
1
= Off
= On
0
SMDR Printout
0
1
= Do not print on
SMDR report
= Include on
SMDR report
1
Use this option to include or
exclude the extension in the
SMDR report.
Outgoing Trunk Line
Preference
Related
Program
14-06
21-02
Use this option to set the
extension outgoing Trunk Line
Preference. If enabled, the
extension user receives trunk
dial tone when they lift the
handset. The user hears trunk
dial tone only if allowed by
Trunk Access Map
programming (Programs 14-07
and 15-06). Refer to the Line
Preference feature for more
details.
03
Programming Manual
2 - 153
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
04
Item
ISDN Caller ID
If both Program 15-01-04 and
10-03-05 are enabled, the
system includes Caller ID in
the Setup message as
Presentation Allowed. If these
options are disabled, it is
Presentation Restricted.
05
Restriction for Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
10-03-05
20-08-13
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
21-01-15
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
Enable or disable supervised
dial detection for an extension.
07
Do-Not-Call
0 = Off
1 = On
0
21-01-19
08
Call Attendant Busy
Message
0~100
(0 = No setting)
0
11-11-59
40-10-08
09
Call Attendant Answer
Message
0~100
(0 = No setting)
0
11-11-60
40-10-09
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 154
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various
Multiline telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Display Language Selection
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
02
Trunk Ring Tone
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for
the extension port you are
programming.
DTU/DTP-style telephones only
follow high, medium and low
range ring tone settings. They do
not follow Melodies.
Programming Manual
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Japanese
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Portuguese
Norwegian
Danish
Swedish
Turkish
Latin American Spanish
Romanian
Polish
1
11-11-13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
High
Medium
Low
Ring Tone 1
Ring Tone 2
Ring Tone 3
Ring Tone 4
Ring Tone 5
2
22-03
2 - 155
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
03
Item
Extension Ring Tone
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming extension
call ring for the extension port you
are programming. Also refer to
Program 15-08.
DTU/DTP style telephones only
follow high, medium and low
range ring tone settings. They do
not follow Melodies.
04
Redial (Speed Dial) Control
Use this option to control the
function of the extension Redial
key when used with Speed Dialing.
The Redial key can access either
the Common or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
05
Transfer Key Operation Mode
Use this option to set the operating
mode of the extension CONF key.
The keys can be for Call Transfer,
Serial Calling or Flash. When
selecting the Flash option
(selection 2), refer also to Program
81-01-14.
06
Hold Key Operating Mode
Use this option to set the function
of the Multiline Hold key. The Hold
key can activate normal Hold or
Exclusive Hold.
07
Automatic Hold for CO Lines
When talking on a CO call and
another CO line key is pressed, the
original trunk is placed on Hold (0)
or Disconnected (1).
08
Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to set whether
pressing a key accesses a
One-Touch Key or if it preselects
the key.
10
Ringing Line Preference for
Trunk Calls
Input Data
High
Medium
Low
Ring Tone 1
Ring Tone 2
Ring Tone 3
Ring Tone 4
Ring Tone 5
Default
Related
Program
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
1
= Common and Individual
Speed Dialing
= Group Speed Dialing
0
1
2
= Transfer
= Call back
= Hook
0
0
1
= Normal (Common)
= Exclusive Hold
0
0
1
= Hold
= Disconnect (Cut)
1
0
1
= Preselect
= One-Touch (Automatic
Handsfree)
1
0
1
= Idle (Off)
= Ringing (On)
1
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference
for trunk calls.
2 - 156
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
11
Item
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Off
= On
1
Off-Hook Ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
= Muted Off-Hook
Ringing
= No Off-Hook Ringing
= Not Used
= Beep in Speaker (SP)
= Beep in Handset (HS)
= Speaker & Handset
Beep
5
Use this option to set the telephone
Off-Hook signaling. Off-hook
signaling occurs when a telephone
user receives a second call while
busy on a handset call. To enable/
disable Off-Hook Signaling for an
extension Class of Service, use
Program 20-13-06.
Redial List Mode
0
1
1
= ICM/Trunk (Extension/
Trunk Mode)
= Trunk Mode
Callback Automatic Answer
Use this option to enable or disable
automatic answer of calls recalling
to a station. For example, if a
Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is
ringing back to a station, the
following happens:
Related
Program
If PRG 15-02-11 is enabled, the
station will automatically answer
the recall when it goes off-hook.
If PRG 15-02-11 is disabled, a
station will not automatically
answer the recall when it goes offhook. The user must first press the
line appearance of the recalling call
or press the answer key.
12
13
Select whether the Redial List
feature should store internal and
external numbers (0), or only
external numbers (1).
15
Storage of Caller-ID for
answered call
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
1
16
Handsfree Operation
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
1
Enable or disable an extension
ability to use the speakerphone on
outside calls. When disabled,
users can hear the conversation,
but cannot respond handsfree.
18
Power-Saving Mode
0
1
= Normal mode
= Power-Saving Mode
(Eco-Mode)
1
20-02-10
19
CTA Data Communication Mode
0
1
= CTI Mode
= Non Procedural Mode
(Non-SCS)
0
15-02-20
Select 0 if the dip switch settings
on the CTA Adapter are set to PC
connection (1=on, 2~8=off) or
select 1 if the DIP switches are set
to printer connection (1~2=on,
3~8=off).
Programming Manual
2 - 157
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
20
Item
Baud Rate for CTA Port
Select the baud rate to be used by
the CTA Adapter.
21
Virtual Extension Access Mode
(when idle Virtual Extension key
pressed)
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension/Call Arrival Key(CAR)
should function as a DSS key, a
Virtual Extension, or a CAR key.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1)
is selected, the key functions as a
virtual extension and can be used
for incoming and outgoing calls.
When Ignore (2) is selected, the
key functions as a CAR key and
can receive incoming calls only.
22
Multiple Incoming From
Intercom and Trunk
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
15-02-19
0
1
2
= 4800
= 9600
= 19200
2
0
1
2
= DSS
= Outgoing (OTG)
= Ignore
2
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
0
1
= Preview
= Outgoing Immediately
0
22-01-01
If enabled, this affects how a
Hotline key lights, based on the
setting in Program 22-01-01. If
22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk
priority, the Hotline key lights solid
when a trunk call rings in. If 2201-01 is set to 0 for intercom
priority, the Hotline key does not
light for incoming trunk calls, but
lights solid for intercom calls.
If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline
keys light solid for any incoming
calls regardless of the setting in
Program 22-01-01.
23
Speed Dial Preview Mode
This option defines how a speed
dial key functions when pressed. If
set to Preview (0), the speed dial
number can be previewed before
dialing. If set to Outgoing
Immediate (1), the number is dialed
immediately.
2 - 158
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
24
Item
Conference Key Mode
This option allows an extension
Conf key to be programmed for
Conference or for Transfer. When
set for Transfer (1), the user places
a call on hold, dials the extension
to which it should be transferred,
then presses the Conf key. The call
is then transferred. When set for
Conference (0), with an active call,
the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses
the Conf key twice. All the calls are
then connected.
26
MSG Key Operation Mode
Determine whether an extension
MSG key should function as a
Message key or Voice Mail key. If
set as a Message key, users can
press the key to call the voice mail
only when they have new
messages.
27
Handset Volume
Determine how an extension
handset volume is set after it is
adjusted during a call.
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Conference
= Transfer
0
0
1
= Message Key
= Voice Mail Key
0
0
1
= Back to Default (Back)
= Stay at previous level
(Stay)
1
0
1
= Green
= Red
1
Related
Program
When 1 is assigned in this
program and a user sets the
volume to maximum, the volume
is reset to a level to meet FCC
standards when the user hangs
up.
28
Message Waiting Lamp Color
Determine whether an extension
Message Waiting Lamp lights
Green (0) or Red (1) when a
message is received.
29
PB Back Tone Level
1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB)
This program allows adjustment of
the PB Back Tone Level when you
are calling an ISDN Line.
30
Programming Manual
Toll Restriction Class
0
Select the Toll Restriction Class to
be used when placing a call from a
virtual extension.
1
= Vir. Ext. (Virtual
Extension Class)
= Real Ext. (Real
Extension Class)
15-02-35
15-02-36
15-02-37
15-02-38
32
(0dB)
1
2 - 159
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
34
Item
37
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
7
15-02-28
15-02-36
15-02-37
15-02-38
3
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has Message Waiting set
to the extension.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
15-02-28
15-02-35
15-02-37
15-02-38
Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp
Color
0 = Green
1 = Red
1
15-02-28
15-02-35
15-02-36
15-02-38
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
3
15-02-28
15-02-35
15-02-36
15-02-37
Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for
Calling Extension
Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for
Called Extension
Select the color of the Large LED
when a voice mail message is
waiting at the extension.
38
Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp
Cycle
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has a VM Message
Waiting set to the extension.
40
Related
Program
0
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has set Message
Waiting.
36
Default
0 = Trunk Mode
1 = Extension/Trunk Mode
Call Register Mode
The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk
calls only (0), or both Internal and
Trunk calls (1).
35
Input Data
Additional Dial for Caller ID Call
Return
Up to four digits (0, 1~9, #, )
10-02-04
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using the
Caller ID Return function.
2 - 160
41
Incoming Ring Setup
0 = Speaker Normal Ring
1 = Headset Ring
0
42
Incoming Off-Hook Ring Setup
0 = Speaker Off-Hook Ring
1 = Headset Off-Hook Ring
0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
43
Headset Ring Duration
0 = No Switch to Speaker Ring
1 = 10 seconds
2 = 20 seconds
3 = 30 seconds
4 = 40 seconds
5 = 50 seconds
6 = 1 minute
0
44
Reversing Display Indication
0 = Normal Indication
1 = Reversing Indication
0
0 = Normal Indication
1 = Double height character
indication of calendar
display line
2 = Double height character
indication of name and
number display line
0
0 = Continuous on
1 = 5 seconds
2 = 10 seconds
3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds
2
0 = OFF
1 = ON
1
11-11-17
15-07-01
15-20-01
The display on the DT300/DT700
style telephones can be set to
Normal (0) or Reversed (1).
45
Double Height Character
Indication
On the DT300/DT700 style phones
Name and Number Line (2),
Calender Line (1) or No Line (0) set
to has double height characters.
46
Backlight LCD duration
On the DT300/DT700 style phones
set how long the Backlight LCD
stays on.
47
Icon display of DESI-less
On the DTL/ITL-8LD style phones
will icons be displayed (1), or not
displayed (0).
48
Short Ring Setup
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
80-09-01
49
Button Kit Information for
Multiline Telephone
0 =
1 =
2 =
3~9 =
10
0
90-48-01
Programming Manual
No setting
Not Used
Type-A with Cursor Key
Not Used
Type-A without Cursor
Key (Retrofit)
2 - 161
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-4 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern
Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38
Input
Cycle
1
Cycle 1
500ms – ON / 500ms – OFF
2
Cycle 2
250ms – ON / 250ms – OFF
3
Cycle 3
125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF
4
Cycle 4
125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 625ms – OFF
5
Cycle 5
875ms – ON / 125ms – OFF
6
Cycle 6
625ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF
7
Cycle 7
1000ms – ON
Table 2-5 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 1)
High
Middle
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 2)
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 3)
High
Middle
Low
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 4)
High
Middle
Low
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Internal Incoming Signal
Frequency
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to the Input Data chart.
2 - 162
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various
single line telephone options.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
SLT Signaling Type
Use this option to tell the system the type of
dialing the connected telephone uses.
Related
Program
Input Data
Default
0
1
= DP
= DTMF
1
15-03-03
45-01-01
0
1
= Normal
= Special
0
15-03-01
45-01-01
0
1
= No
= Yes
1
0
1
= Off
= On
0
For the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless
telephones to function correctly, this must be set
to 0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for DTMF,
after an outside call is placed, the system cannot
dial any additional digits.
This program change is automatically performed
when the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless
telephone is registered. When upgrading
software from prior versions, the previous default
of 1 is saved from the prior database so this
option must be changed manually.
03
Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after
the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
04
Flashing
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500
type) telephones.
05
Trunk Polarity Reverse
Not Used in U.S. – Do Not Change Default Entry
as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.
Programming Manual
2 - 163
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No
06
Item
Extension Polarity Reverse
0
Not Used in U.S. -Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues
may arise with voice mail.
1
Input Data
Default
= Disable
(Off)
= Enable
(On)
0
Related
Program
07
Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT)
0
1
= No
= Yes
1
11-12-45
08
Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT)
0
= Disable
(No)
= Yes
(Enable)
1
11-12-46
= Disable
(Off)
= Enable
(On)
0
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
1
0
1
= FSK
= DTMF
0
0
= Calling
Extension
Number
(Calling)
= External
Caller ID
(Forward)
0
0
1
= Normal
= Disc.
0
0
1
= No
= Yes
0
1
09
Caller ID Function - For External Module
0
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal
for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party
vendor telephone with Caller ID display.
1
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting must be
disabled for the system integration codes to be
correct.
With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed, this
must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a
talk path.
10
Caller ID Name
Determine if an extension user telephone should
display the Caller ID name.
11
Caller ID Type
Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or
DTMF.
14
Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode
Determine what the display shows when a
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside
call.
1
15
Disconnect without dial after hooking hold
Determine whether or not to disconnect a held
call when on-hook without any dialing after
hooking-hold.
16
Special DTMF Protocol Send
Determine whether or not to send the extension
number of the phone forwarded to the extension
when PRG 15-03-04 is set to Special (1) and not
in the VM group.
2 - 164
15-03-09
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No
Item
17
Input Data
Dial Tone Select
When the function of MW has been set from
another extension or VM, the dial tone upon off
hook is selected.
(1)
(2)
0
1
(3)
= Normal
= New DT
(4)
Default
Related
Program
0
(5)
Normal
Outgoing Call
Idle
Reverse
Normal
Incoming Call
Idle
Reverse
Normal
Call Pickup
Idle
Reverse
(1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Programming Manual
2 - 165
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic
settings for an IP telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Terminal Type
0
1
2
3
4
02
IP Phone Fixed
Port
Assignment
MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00 to
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
04
Nickname
Up to 48 characters
07
Using IP
Address
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
CODEC Type
1-Type 1
2-Type 2
3-Type 3
4-Type 4
5-Type 5
15
2 - 166
= NGT
= H.323
= SIP
= MEGACO
= SIP-MLT
Maximum eight digits
Related
Program
Default
Description
0
Viewing Only – No changes
permitted
00-00-00-00-00-00
MAC Address of registered
SIP MLT phone is stored
and/or can input the MAC
address of an SIP MLT
phone so when it comes
online it will be provided with
the extension in which the
MAC address matches.
15-05-01
No setting
Nickname section on Invite
message. Example:
Extension 100 has a
Nickname set to PAUL.
Extension 101 has
command 15-05-17 set to
Nickname. The inbound call
to extension 101, from 100,
will show PAUL.
15-05-17
Informational Only
15-05-01
0.0.0.0
registered IP Phones
1
Assign the CODEC Type of
the MLT SIP.
84-24-XX
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
16
Authentication
Password
Up to 24 characters
17
Calling Party
Display Info
0 = Nickname
1 = Display Name
2 = User Part
3 = Extension
Input Data
Default
Description
None
Assign the authentication
password for SIP single line
telephones.
0
Related
Program
15-05-01
The part of the Invite
message the calling party
information is taken from.
There are four choices:
Nickname: Displays the
nickname programmed in
15-05-04.
Display Name: Some SIP
phones have a Field called
“Display Name”. If
configured, in the SIP
phone, this will display upon
a call from that station.
User Part: Some SIP
phones have a field called
“User Part”. If configured in
the SIP phone, this will
display upon a call from that
station.
Extension: Display shows
extension of the SIP phone.
18
IP Duplication
Allowed Group
0 = Not Used
1 = Group 1
2 = Group 2
3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4
5 = Group 5
6 = Group 6
7 = Group 7
8 = Group 8
9 = Group 9
10 = Group 10
0
If there is an adapter that
has one IP address coming
into it but has multiple
extensions off of it. Assign
all the extensions to a group
so that way the CPU knows
that the one IP address is
assigned to multiple
extensions.
15-05-01
19
Side Option
Information
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
0
This is a read only program
that shows what type of Line
Key unit is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.
10-03-09
15-05-22
20
Bottom Option
Information
0 = No Option
1 = ADA
2 = BHA
0
This is a read only program
that shows what type of
adapter is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.
10-03-10
21
Handset
Option
Information
0 = Normal Handset
1 = Handset for power
failure (PSA/PSD)
2 = BCH
0
This is a read only program
that shows what type of
Handset is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.
10-03-11
15-05-23
Programming Manual
2 - 167
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
22
Side Option
Additional Data
23
Handset
Option
Additional
Information
Determine to
use TEN or not.
Default
Description
Related
Program
0 = No Setting
1~32 = DSS Console
number
0
This is a read only program
that shows the DSS console
number when one is
installed on a ITH-style
telephone.
30-01
30-02
30-03
30-04
30-05
30-06
0 = No Setting
1~16 = Terminal
equipment number
(TEN) of Bluetooth
Cordless Handset
(BCH)
0
Input Data
24
Protection
Service
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
0
26
DT700
Terminal Type
0 = Not Set
0
When this is enabled it
allows the MLT SIP
telephones to use the
"security" key. If disabled,
and the key is pressed,
nothing happens.
90-40-01
90-40-02
Used when the SIP Multiline
telephone is using manual/
auto registration. Assign
each phone a unique
personal index. Then go to
command 84-22 to assign
the user name and
password.
84-22-XX
1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1
2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL24BT1D/ITL- 4PA-1D
[without 8LKI(LCD)-L]
3 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL24BT1D/ITL-24PA-1D
[with 8LKI(LCD)-L]
4 = ITL-320C-1
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
7 = AGW
27
Personal ID
Index
0~512
0
28
Addition
Information
Setup
0 = Do not inform
1 = Inform
0
Select whether
to inform of
additional
information or
not.
29
2 - 168
Terminal WANside IP
Address
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Issue 1.0
Item
Input Data
Default
30
DTMF Play
during
Conversation
at Receive
Extension
0 = Do Not Play
1 = Play
0
31
Alarm Tone
during
Conversation
(RTP packet
loss alarm)
0 = Off
1 = On
1
32
Ten Key Pad
Talkie
0 = Off
1 = On
0
33
LAN Side IP
Address of
Terminal
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
34
Terminal Touch
Panel On/Off
0 = Off
1 = On
0.0.0.0.
1
Description
Related
Program
Read-only
Whether the touch screen
used on ITL-320C-1 (BK)
TEL can be used (On) or
cannot be used (Off).
Conditions
15-05-04 – Nickname must be unique in the system.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 169
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access
map for each extension. An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to
which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access
maps.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
Trunk Access
Map Number
Default
Related
Program
01
1~200
1
14-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 170
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a
multiline terminal line keys.
For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the
function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1.
You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes.
To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Default Settings
Line Key
LK01
:
LK08
Programming Manual
Function Number
01 (Trunk Line Key)
:
01 (Trunk Line Key)
Additional Data
1
:
8
LK09
0 (No Setting)
0
:
:
:
LK48
0 (No Setting)
0
2 - 171
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Line Key
Number
01
1~48
Function Number
Additional Data
0~99
(Normal Function Code) (Service Code 751 by
default)
* 00 ~ *99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 752 by
default)
Refer to Function
Number List.
Default
Programmable keys 1~8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2,
etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined.
Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
00
Not Defined
01
DSS/One-Touch
02
Microphone Key (ON/OFF)
Red On: Mic Off
Off: Mic On
03
DND Key
Red On: DND
04
BGM (ON/OFF)
Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05
Headset
Red On: Headset in use
06
Transfer Key
None
07
Conference Key
Red On: Conference call setup
occurring
08
Incoming Call Log
Rapid Blink (Red): New call log
Red On: Call log
Off: No call log
09
Day/Night Mode Switch
10
Call Forward – Immediate
2 - 172
Extension number or any
numbers (up to 24 digits)
Mode number (1~8)
Red On: Extension Busy
Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Red On: Mode active
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
11
Call Forward – Busy
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
12
Call Forward – No Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
13
Call Forward – Busy/No
Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
14
Call Forward – Both Ring
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarded
15
Follow Me
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded
18
Text Message Setup
Message Numbers (01~20)
Red On: Feature activated by Function
Key
19
External Group Paging
External Paging Number
(1~8)
Red On: Page Active
20
External All Call Paging
21
Internal Group Paging
22
Internal All Call Paging
None
23
Meet-Me Answer to
Internal Paging
None
24
Call Pickup
None
25
Call Pickup for Another
Group
None
26
Call Pickup for Specified
Group
Call Pickup Group Number
None
27
Speed Dial – Common/
Private
Speed Dial Number
(Common / Private)
None
28
Speed Dial – Group
Speed Dial Number (Group)
None
29
Repeat Redial
Red On: Waiting to redial
30
Saved Number Redial
None
31
Memo Dial
None
32
Meet – Me Conference
None
33
Override (Off-Hook
Signaling)
None
34
Break – In
None
35
Camp On
Red On: While camp-on activated
Programming Manual
Red On: Page Active
Internal Paging Number
(01~64)
Red On: Page Active
2 - 173
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
36
Step Call
None
37
DND/FWD Override Call
None
38
Message Waiting
None
39
Room Monitoring
Rapid Blink (Red): While being
monitored
Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring
40
Handset Transmission
Cutoff
Red On: Transmission cut-off
41
Buzzer
Extension Number
Red On: Transmission Side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42
Boss – Secretary Call
Extension Number
Red On: Boss – Secretary mode
43
Series Call
None
44
Common Hold
None
45
Exclusive
None
46
Department Group Log Out
Red On: Logged Out
47
Reverse Voice Over
48
Voice Over
49
Call Redirect
50
Account Code
51
General Purpose Relay
Relay No (0, 1~8)
Red On: Relay On
52
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Setup
Incoming Ring Group
(001~100)
Red On: Under setting
53
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Start
Red On: Active
54
External Call Forward by
Door Box
Red On: Active
55
Extension Name Change
None
2 - 174
Extension Number
Red On: extension busy
Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Green: Reverse Voice Over to
extension in progress
Slow Blink (Red): Voice Over – Active
Extension Number or Voice
Mail Number
None
Red On: While account code being
entered
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
56
General Purpose LED
Operation
Blink (Red): Active
57
General Purpose LED
Indication
Blink (Red): Active
58
Automatic Transfer at
Department Group Call
Extension Group Number
( 01~64)
Blink (Red): Active
59
Delayed Transfer at
Department Group Call
Extension Group Number
(01~64)
Blink (Red): Active
60
DND at Department Group
Call
Extension Group Number
(01~64)
Blink (Red): Active
61
--- Not Used ---
63
Outgoing Call Without
Caller ID (ISDN)
64
--- Not Used ---
66
CTI
67
--- Not Used ---
68
Voice Mail Service
0 = Skip
1 = Back Skip
2 = Monitor
2-In case of monitor mode
Slow Blink (Red): Monitor Setting –
Automatic
Red On: Monitor Setting – Manual
70
Automated Attendant for
Extension
Extension Number or
Department Group Number
None
71
--- Not Used ---
72
Keypad Facility Key
73
Keypad HOLD Key
74
Keypad RETRIEVE Key
75
Keypad Conference Key
76
--- Not Used ---
77
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Number
Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78
Conversation Recording –
Voice Mail
Programming Manual
Red On: Active
Red On: CTI active
Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
2 - 175
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
79
Automated Attendant
(In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Number
Red On: Set Up for All Calls
Fast Blink (Red): Set Up for No
Answer Calls
Stutter Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy
Calls
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
80
Tandem Ringing
1 = Set
0 = Cancel
Extension Number to Tandem
Ring
Red On: Active
81
Automatic Transfer to
Transfer Key
Trunk Line No. (001~200)
Blink (Red): Active
82
Dterm IP Call Log
83
Conversation Recording
Function (VMSU)
0 = Pause
1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
84
Drop Key
None
85
Directory Dialing
86
Private Call Refuse
None
Blink (Red): Active
87
Caller ID Refuse
None
Blink (Red): Active
88
Dial-In Mode Switching
PRG 22-17 Table No.
(1~100)
Off: Pattern 1, Pattern 5~8
On: Pattern 2
Slow flash: Pattern 3
Fast flash: Pattern 4
89
Do-Not-Call Setup
90
Do-Not-Call Data
Registration
91
Live Recording Key
InMail
94
Call Attendant
2 - 176
Fast flash: Setup – No Answer Calls
125ms:off
Slow flash: 125ms:on
625ms:off
125ms:on
On: Setup – Busy/No Answer Calls
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
97
98~99
Function
Door Box Access Key
Additional Data
Door Box Number (1~8)
LED Indication
On: Door Box Busy
Off: Door Box Idle
Fast flash: Door Box Incoming
--- Not Used ---
Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
00
ICM Key
None
Red On: Off Hook on Intercom Call
Red Blink: Intercom Call on Hold
01
Trunk Key
Trunk Number (001~200)
Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
02
Trunk Group
Trunk Group Number
(001~100)
Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
03
Virtual Extension Key
Extension Number or
Department Group Number
Red On: Trunk busy by another user
Slow Blink (Red): Incoming Call
04
Park Key
Park Number (01~64)
Slow Blink (Red): Call Placed in
Park by Another User
Fast Blink (Green): Extension
Placed Call in Park
06
Trunk Access Via
Networking
Network System Number
(01~50)
07
Station Park Hold None
08
CAP Key
CAP Orbit No. (0001~9999)
If CAP Orbit No.0000 is used,
the next available orbit is
automatically selected.
10
ACD Log-In/Log-Out
Red On: Under log-on
Off: Under log-off
12
ACD Emergency Call
Red On: Under monitor, Override,
Standby
Fast Blink (Red): Supervisor
Telephone Receiving Emergency Call
Programming Manual
2 - 177
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List (Continued)
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 752)
13
ACD Off Duty Mode
Red On: Under Off Duty
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
14
ACD Start/End
Red On: ACD Operation End
15
ACD Terminal Speech
Monitor
Red On: Under Monitor
16
ACD Waiting
Red On: Standby
17
ACD Work Wrap Up Time
Red On: Under Work Time
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
18
ACD Overflow Control
19
ACD Queue Status Display
Check
2 - 178
ACD Group Number
Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
LED Indication Reference:
ON = LED pattern 7 (On).
OFF = LED pattern 0 (Off).
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5 (IL).
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1 (FL).
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4 (IR).
Programming Manual
2 - 179
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
When a key is programmed using service code 752, that key cannot be
programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000).
For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 + 04 must be
undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key
by dialing 751 + 48.
When assigning a CAP key, 08, an orbit number must be used. If orbit 000 is
used, it automatically assigns the next available orbit.
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to Function Number List.
2 - 180
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a
ring tone range (0~4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension
key (Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key
rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-03. The chart below
shows the available tones. There are 256 available extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Programming Manual
Incoming Ring Pattern
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
Tone Pattern 1
Tone Pattern 2
Tone Pattern 3
Tone Pattern 4
Incoming Ring
Tone Extension
Maximum eight digits
Default
Description
0 = Tone Pattern 1
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the function
key on the key telephone, select the
ring tone when receiving a call on that
key.
For ACD CAR keys, only tone pattern
1 (entry 0) can be used. The
remaining patterns are not checked
with this feature.
2 - 181
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-6 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency
Pattern
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Pattern 1
High
Middle
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
Pattern 2
High
Middle
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Pattern 3
High
Middle
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
Pattern 4
High
Middle
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Internal Incoming Signal
Frequency
High
Middle
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 182
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing
options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer
Key which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode.
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01.
Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). There are 256 Virtual
Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Key Number
01~48
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
Ringing
0
1
= No Ringing
= Ring
Default
0
Conditions
Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before
removing the key from telephone programming.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 183
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set
the priority (1~4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When
Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest
order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There are 256 Virtual
Extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Priority
Order
01
1~4
Data
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
Tone Pattern 1
Tone Pattern 2
Tone Pattern 3
Tone Pattern 4
Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
Up to eight digits
Description
When two or more virtual
extensions are set on a
function key on the telephone,
and the tone pattern by which
the sound of each extension
differs, the priority of ring
sound is set up.
Related
Program
15-08
Default
By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order:
2 - 184
Priority
Order
Ring Tone
(Set in Program 15-08)
1
0 (Tone Pattern 1)
2
1 (Tone Pattern 2)
3
2 (Tone Pattern 3)
4
3 (Tone Pattern 4)
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 185
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the
delayed ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group
Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode. There are 256 Virtual Extension Ports.
Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual
extension ports. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in
Program 15-07 (code 03).
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01~48
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
Ringing
0
1
Default
= Immediate
Ring
= Delayed Ring
0
Related
Program
20-04-03
15-09-01
Conditions
Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
telephone programming.
PRG 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the
CAR/VE key to Delay Ring.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 186
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set
the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each extension.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
Number
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
ACI Recording Destination Extension Number
Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk
calls should be recorded.
02
ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls
Determine if an extension incoming calls should be
automatically recorded to the ACI.
Input Data
Default
Maximum eight
digits
No Setting
0
1
= Off
= On
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming Manual
2 - 187
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch
key data for each multiline terminal.
For each UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of
Range feature, enter the destination number (up to 24 digits) and name (up to 12
characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure to add any required trunk access
codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either through 15-14-01
or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also
changed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01~10
Item
No.
Dial Data
Name
Default
01
1~0, , #, Pause, Hookflash,
@ (Code for Answer-Wait)
Up to 24 digits
Up to 24 Digits
No Setting
02
Name
Up to 12 Digits
No Setting
Default
No entries for any extension.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
One-Touch Keys
2 - 188
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register
ID for Extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Register ID
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
None, 0~31
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 189
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting
LED Flash assignment on each CO line.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Up to eight digits
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
01
Item
LED Flash Assignment
Input Data
0 = LED Off
1 = LED On
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 190
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the
operation when a Virtual Extension Key is pressed.
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Item
No.
01
Item
Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode
Define if calls to a Virtual Extension Key
land on the Virtual or on the extension/
CAP/CO appearance.
Up to eight digits
Default
Related
Program
0 = Release
1 = Land on the
key
0
20-04-01
0 = Secondary
Extension
Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
0
Input Data
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key, not the extension it
resides on.
02
Display mode when placing a call on
Virtual Extension Key
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual
Extension Key name or the name of the
extension it resides on.
Default Settings
If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must
be set to 1, or the multiline terminal must have a CAP Key.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 191
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension to set the
operations of the Telephone Book for each extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Default
01
Telephone Book 1
0~100
Port 1 : 1
Port 2 : 2
:
:
Port 100 : 100
02
Telephone Book 2
0~100
0
06
Locking of Telephone Book
0 = On
1 = Off
0
07
Password
0000~9999 (Fixed
four digits)
Related
Program
0000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 192
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assigns a name to each
LCD Line Key of the SV8100 telephones and ADM option. Up to 13 characters can be
assigned.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Key Number
01~48
Name Assignment
Up to 13 characters
Default Settings
Line Key
Name
LK01
CO 001
:
:
LK06
CO 006
LK07
All Blank
:
:
LK48
All Blank
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 193
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the
Mobile Extension feature.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Mobile Extension Target
Setup
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Default
0~1999 (0 = No setting/1~1999 = target of mobile
extension)
0
0
1
2
= Always
= On Analog Line
= Never
0
0
1
= Use normal trunk access code (11-09-01)
= Use individual trunk access code (11-09-02)
0
Set which Speed Dial bin
is used to call when the
Mobile extension is
called.
02
Connect Confirmation
Select when a
confirmation (dial ) is
required to allow the call
to cut over to the called
mobile number.
03
Trunk Access Code
Select if the Normal (0) or
Individual (1) Trunk
access is used when
making the call to the
mobile number.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 194
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the
function mode for each department group. There are 64 available Department
Groups.
16
Input Data
Department Group Number
Item
No.
1~64
Item
Default
No
setting
11-07
= Normal Routing
(Priority)
= Easy – UCD
Routing (Circular)
0
16-02
= Normal (Intercom
caller to busy
department
member hears
busy)
= Circular (Intercom
callers to busy
department
member routes to
idle member)
0
16-02
Department Name
Maximum 12 characters
02
Department Calling Cycle
0
Use this option to set the call
routing for Department Calling.
Routing can be either circular
(cycles to all phones in group)
or priority (cycles to highest
priority extensions first).
03
Department Routing when
Busy (Auto Step Call)
Use this option to set how the
system routes an Intercom call
to a busy Department Group
member. Intercom callers to the
extension can either hear busy
or route to the first available
department number. This only
occurs for calls to the extension
directly, not the department
number assigned in Program
11-07.
Programming Manual
1
0
1
Related
Program
Input Data
01
Program
2 - 195
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
04
Item
Hunting Mode
Use this option to set the action
taken when a call reaches the
last extension in the Department
Group (0=hunting stopped,
1 =hunting repeats with circular
routing through the Department
Group).
05
Extension Group All Ring
Mode Operation
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Last extension is
called and hunting
is stopped
= Circular
0
1
= Manual
= Automatic
0
0
= Disable (Camp
On)
= Enable (Overflow
Mode)
0
= Disable (Recall)
= Enable (No
Recall)
0
0
Related
Program
11-16-10
Determine whether calls ringing
a Department Group should ring
all extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or
manually when using the
service code defined in Program
11-12-09.
When set to (1)
Automatic, only ICM
Calls and DID Calls will
ring all the stations in the
Department Group.
06
STG Withdraw Mode
1
07
Call Recall Restriction for
STG
0
1
Determine whether or not an
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall
the extension from which it was
transferred.
08
--- Not Used ---
09
Department Hunting No
Answer Time
0~64800 seconds
15
0
1
0
Set how long a call rings a
Department group extension
before hunting occurs.
10
Enhanced Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each
Extension (Department) Group.
2
3
2 - 196
= No queuing
= Hunting When
Busy
= Hunting When
Not Answered
= Hunting When
Busy or No
Answer
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Calling
Programming Manual
2 - 197
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the
Department Groups. The system uses these groups (64 Department Groups) for
Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in
Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program
16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group. When a call
comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Group
Number
Priority
Default
Description
01
1~64
1~999
1 – xxx
(See
Note)
Set up the Department Group called
by the pilot number and the extension
priority when a group is called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.
Related
Program
11-07
16-01
The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1~ 256. Virtual extension ports are 1~256.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Calling
2 - 198
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department
Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group.
There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item
No.
Secondary
Extension
Number
01
1~16
01~64
Extension
Number
Priority
Order
Maximum 8
digits
0~999
Description
This program is set up when placing
telephones in two or more groups.
Default
All extension groups : No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Calling
Programming Manual
2 - 199
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal
calls between members of different Department (Station) groups that can be
restricted on a per group basis. Each department group can restrict calls to up to eight
department groups in Department Group - Departmental Call Restriction.
Input Data
Extension (Department) Group Number
1~64
Restricted Group Index
1~8
Restrict
Department
Group Number
0~64
Description
Calls between members of different Department
(Station) groups can be restricted on a per group
basis.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 200
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
Related
Program
01
Operator Access
Mode
0
1
= Step Call
= Circular
0
Use this program to set up priority of
a call when calling an operator
telephone.
20-17
02
Text Message Mode
0
1
= Call mode
= No Answer/
Busy mode
1
Use this program to select the mode
when calling the telephone which set
up the text message.
11-11-14
15-07-08
04
--- Not Used ---
05
DTMF Receive
Active Time
0~64800 seconds
10
For OPXs, analog telephones and
certain analog trunks (like DISA), the
system attaches a DTMF receiver to
the port for this interval. The system
releases the receiver after the
interval expires.
25-07-01
06
Alarm Duration
0~64800 seconds
30
This time sets the duration of the
alarm signal.
11-12-05
07
Callback Ring
Duration Time
0~64800 seconds
15
Callback rings an extension for this
time.
11-12-05
15-07-35
08
Trunk Queuing
Callback Time
0~64800 seconds
15
Trunk Queuing callback rings an
extension for this time.
11-12-05
15-07-35
09
Callback/Trunk
Queuing Cancel
Time
0~64800 seconds
64800
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queueing request
after this time.
11-12-05
15-07-35
10
Trunk Guard Timer
0~64800 seconds
1
The amount of time the system waits
to seize the next outside line after
the system releases an outside line.
12
Telephone/Web Pro
Logout Time
1~84600 seconds
(84600sec =
1 day)
900
The system automatically logs out of
a Telephone/Web Pro session after
inactivity lasting this time.
Programming Manual
20
2 - 201
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Refer to the Input Data table at the beginning of this section.
2 - 202
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various
system options for multiline telephones.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
Trunk Group Access Key
Operating Mode
Use this option to set the operating
mode of the extension trunk group
keys. The keys are for incoming
access, outgoing access, or both.
04
Retrieve the Line After Transfer
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension
ability to answer a call after it has
been transferred, but before it is
answered.
05
Headset Busy Mode
Set the conditions under which a
headset extension is busy to
incoming callers.
06
Preselection Time
Input Data
Default
0
1
2
= Outgoing / Incoming
= Outgoing
= Incoming
0
0
1
= Not Holding (No Keep)
= Holding (Keep)
1
0
1
= No (Disable)
= Yes (Enable)
0
Related
Programming
20-09-07
5
0~64800 (sec)
When a multiline terminal user
preselects a line key, the system
remembers the preselection for this
time.
07
Time and Date Display Mode
Set how the Time and Date appear on
display telephones. There are eight
display modes.
08
LCD Display Holding Time
Programming Manual
1~8
Type 1 = (12 hour)
Type 2 = (12 hour)
Type 3 = (12 hour)
Type 4 = (12 hour)
Type 5 = (24 hour)
Type 6 = (24 hour)
Type 7 = (24 hour)
Type 8 = (24 hour)
0~64800 (sec)
3
10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
10 MAR TUE 15:15
15:15 MAR 10 TUE
3-10 TUE 15:15
15:15 TUE 10 MAR
5
2 - 203
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
09
Item
Disconnect Supervision
Use this option to enable or disable
disconnect supervision for the system
trunks.
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
1
0
10
Time Before Shifting to
Power-Saving Mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
11
Handsfree Microphone Control
0
1
= Off
= On
1
0
1
= Disable (Voice)
= Enable (Signal)
0
= Name and Number (Both)
= Name
= Number
0
Use this option to control the setting
for Multiline Terminal Handsfree
microphone after being disconnected
and reconnected. If set to 0, the
microphone is always off when the
terminal is reconnected. If set to 1,
the microphone remains in the same
state it was in when the terminal is
reconnected.
12
Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call
Type)
No shift
1 minute
2 minutes
4 minutes
8 minutes
16 minutes
32 minutes
64 minutes
Related
Programming
15-02-18
Use this option to enable or disable
Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled,
incoming Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.
13
--- Not Used ---
15
Caller ID Display Mode
0
1
2
18
Dialing Record Display Time
0~64800 seconds
30
19
Virtual Extension Mode
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
Sets the mode of a virtual extension
key that appears on a DSS console.
2 - 204
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 205
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up
various options for single line telephones.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode
0
For a busy single line (500/2500 type)
telephone, set the mode used to answer a
camped-on trunk call.
1
Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port
0
Use this option to define whether the system
should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals
(0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF
signals (1).
03
SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines
Type 0: The system keeps the digits
dialed by the single line telephone on a
trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are
received, the system sends all the digits
to the trunk. If the time space between
digits is longer than the time in Item 4, the
system considers all digits received.
Type 1: The system passes the received
digits from the single line telephone to the
trunk immediately. If the single line
telephone has a Last Number Dial key
without a pause, this key may not be able
to use the Last Number Dial key with the
Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must
be set for Wireless – DECT users to be able
to break dial tone on an analog trunk that is
used for paging.
2 - 206
Default
Related
Program
= Hookflash
(Hooking)
= Hookflash +
Service
Code 654
0
11-12-47
= Do Not
Ignore (No)
= Ignore (Yes)
0
15-03-01
= Receive all
dialed data,
before
sending (All)
= Direct
through out
(Direct)
0
20-03-04
Input Data
1
0
1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
04
Default
Related
Program
0~64800 seconds
3
20-03-03
0
0
Item
Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS
Input Data
When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the
system waits this interval before outdialing the
first digit.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-03 to 1.
05
SLT Operation Mode
1
2
06
Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT)
= Normal
Mode
= Extended
Mode 1
= Extended
Mode 2
0~64800 seconds
5
20-13-38
0~64800 seconds
0
20-03-03
20-03-04
Define the headset ringing start time. After this
time expires from the time when a single line
telephone is off-hook, the system sets the
single line telephone to headset ringing mode.
07
Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time
(Forced Dial)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Programming Manual
2 - 207
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various
system options for Virtual Extensions. There are 256 available virtual extension ports.
Input Data
Item
No.
03
Item
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay
Interval
Input Data
Default
0~64800 seconds
10
0 = Normal
1 = Enhanced Option
1
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set
for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11)
ring the extension after this interval.
04
Virtual Extension Key Seize Mode
Changes the BLF status of a SIE key.
When set to Enhanced, the BLF will not
show as being busy when the station is on
a trunk call. When set to Normal, the BLF
will show as being busy when on a trunk
call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (CAR/Secondary Incoming Extensions/Virtual Extensions)
2 - 208
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service
(COS) to an extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To
specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13.
You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Class of Service
for Extensions
01
1~8
1~15
Default
Extension number 101 as Class 15.
All other extension numbers are set as Class 1.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Programming Manual
2 - 209
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the
administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
01
Item
Manual Night Service Enabled
Turns off or on an extension for manual
Night Service Switching.
02
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
Turns off or on an extension to change the
Music on Hold tone.
03
Time Setting
Turns off or on an extension to set the Time
via Service Code 728.
04
Storing Speed Dialing Entries
Turns off or on an extension to store System
or Group Speed Dialing numbers.
05
Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Turns off or on an extension ability to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.
2 - 210
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
08
--- Not Used ---
09
--- Not Used ---
Input
Data
Related
Program
COS
1~14
COS 15
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
11-10-01
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
11-10-02
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
11-10-03
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
11-10-04
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
10
Item
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
Input
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on the ability for an extension to
program the Appearance function keys using
Service Code 752.
11
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect.
12
Trunk Port Disable
0 = Off
1 = On
13
VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation)
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension ability to record,
erase and listen to VRS messages.
14
VRS General Message Play
Turns an extension off or on to dial 4 or
Service Code 611 to listen to the General
Message.
15
VRS General Message Record/Delete
Turns off or on an extension for dialing
Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or
erase the General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Program
COS
1~14
COS 15
1
1
11-11-38
20-13-18
0
1
11-10-26
0
1
11-10-27
0
1
11-10-19
0
1
11-10-21
0
1
11-10-22
18
SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
11-10-23
19
SMDR Printout Department Group (STG)
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
11-10-24
20
SMDR Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
11-10-25
21
--- Not Used ---
22
--- Not Used ---
23
CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback
Number Programming
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11-10-32
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11-10-33
11-10-34
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.
24
Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set
or cancel Private Call Refuse.
25
Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set
or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
Programming Manual
2 - 211
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
Item
Input
Data
COS
1~14
COS 15
Related
Program
26
Dial-In Mode Switch
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11-10-35
27
Do-Not-Call Administrator
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
25-01-07
15-07-89
20-01-19
28
--- Not Used ---
30
Date Setting
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
11-10-41
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
2 - 212
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define
the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
01
Item
Intercom Calls
Turns off or on Intercom calling for the extension.
02
Trunk Outgoing Calls
Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for the
extension.
03
System Speed Dialing
Turns off or on an extension ability to make
outbound calls using system speed dial
numbers.
04
Group Speed Dialing
Turns off or on an extension ability to make
outbound calls using group speed dial numbers.
05
Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Turns off or on an extension for using Dial
Number Preview.
06
Toll Restriction Override
Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service
Code 663).
07
Repeat Redial
Turns off or on an extension to use Repeat
Redial.
08
Toll Restriction Dial Block
Turns off or on an extension to use Dial Block.
Programming Manual
Input
Data
COS
01-14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
Related
Program
11-11-36
21-01-07
21-07
2 - 213
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
09
Item
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for
extensions with this COS.
10
Signal/Voice Call
Turns off or on an extension allowing it to force
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.
11
Protect for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
Input
Data
COS
01-14
COS
15
0
0
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Program
(Internal Call)
12
Department Group Step Calling
Turns off or on an extension to use Department
Group Step Calling.
13
ISDN CLIP
Determines if the ISDN calling line identity
presentation and screening indicators are
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
14
Call Address Information
0 = Off
1 = On
15
Block Outgoing Caller ID
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on the system ability to
automatically block outgoing Caller ID
information when a user places a call.
If this option is on, the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits.
16
Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension to display the name
and number of the extension that dialed 911.
17
ARS Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns off or on an extension ability to override
the trunk access map programming for outgoing
calls.
19
Hotline for SPK
The ability of an extension to have Hotline
activated or deactivated when going off hook via
the speaker key.
20
Hot Key Pad
The ability of an extension to make a call by just
dialing the number without first going off hook.
2 - 214
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
10-03-05
15-01-04
14-01-20
14-01-21
20-08-09
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
21
Item
Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing SPK
Key
Input
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
The ability of an extension to automatically
access Trunk Route when going off hook via the
speaker key.
22
Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension
The ability of an extension to make Voice Over to
Busy Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
COS
01-14
COS
15
0
0
0
0
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Programming Manual
2 - 215
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define
the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
Item
01
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M Override
Turns off or on the extension ability to receive a
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
Input
Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
With this option set to 1, the destination
extension must be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the destination
extension does not have a trunk or CAP
key available for the second call and a
previous call is ringing the extension but
has not yet been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of this
program setting.
02
Caller ID Display
Turns off or on the Caller ID display at an
extension.
03
Sub Address Identification
Defines whether or not an extension displays
the Caller Sub-Address.
04
Notification for Incoming Call List Existence
Determines whether or not an extension display
shows Check List when an incoming call is
missed by a user.
2 - 216
Related
Program
0 = Off
1 = On
15-02-08
20-09-02
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
05
Item
Signal/Voice Call
Turn off or on an extension ability to enable
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls.
Input
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
06
Incoming Time Display
0 = Off
1 = On
07
Call Queuing
0 = Off
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension ability to have calls
queued if a call rings the extension when it is
busy.
08
Calling Party Information
Turn off or on an extension ability to display
calling party information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Program
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
0
0
1
1
20-13-06
1
1
50-02-05
11-11-15,
11-11-16
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Programming Manual
2 - 217
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the
answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
01
Input
Data
Item
Group Call Pickup (Within Group)
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls (Service
Code 756).
02
Group Call Pickup (Another Group)
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a
group (Service Code 769).
03
Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group
(Service Code 768).
04
Telephone Call Pickup
Turns off or on an extension to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Code #).
05
Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
06
Meet-Me Conference and Paging
Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
07
Automatic Off-Hook Answer
Turns off or on an extension to use Universal Auto Answer
(no service code required).
2 - 218
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
08
Item
Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns off or on an extension to answer an incoming call on a
Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE)/
Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.
09
Call Pickup Callback
Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call Pickup to pick
up Callback calls.
10
Answer Preset
Input
Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
1
1
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 219
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define
the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Call Forward All
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call
Forwarding All.
02
Call Forward When Busy
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call
Forward when Busy.
03
Call Forwarding When Unanswered
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call
Forward when Unanswered.
04
Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turns off or on an extension ability to activate Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
05
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call
Forwarding with Follow Me.
06
Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Unscreened
Transfer.
07
Transfer Without Holding
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Transfer
Without Holding.
2 - 220
COS
01~14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
08
Item
Transfer Information Display
Turns off or on an extension ability for incoming
Transfer preanswer display.
09
Group Hold Initiate
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate a Group
Hold.
10
Group Hold Answer
Turns off or on an extension ability to pick up a call on
Group Hold.
11
Automatic On-Hook Transfer
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Automatic
On Hook Transfer.
12
Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call
Forwarding)
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
Turns off or on an extension ability to set up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.
13
Operator Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns off or on an extension ability to have a call
which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.
14
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction
Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
15
VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting)
Turns off or on a Service Code to record, listen to, or
erase the Personal Greeting Message.
16
Call Redirect
Turns off or on a multiline terminal user ability to
transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without
answering the call.
17
Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each
Telephone Group Transfer)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to set
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.
18
No Recall
No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop transferred
calls from recalling from a virtual extension.
19
Hold/Extended Park
Determine if an extension Class of Service should
allow either a normal or extended Park.
Programming Manual
2 - 221
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
20
Item
Input Data
Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user ability to set
up a tandem/conference call automatically when they
hang up.
22
Restricted Unsupervised Conference
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability to initiate an
unsupervised conference.
23
CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel
Turn on or off an extension ability to set or cancel call
forwarding for a virtual extension.
24
Transfer Park Call
Turn off or on an extension ability to transfer a parked
call.
27
Call Park Automatically Search
0
0
0
0
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0 = Non
Exclusive
Hold (Off)
1 = Exclusive
Hold (On)
Trunk Park Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by
an extension.
25
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
No Callback
Turns off or on an extension to receive callbacks.
21
COS
01~14
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
2 - 222
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define
the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service class.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
02
Item
Advice of Charge
ISDN-AOC
03
Cost Display (TTU)
Input
Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Programming Manual
2 - 223
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define
the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
01
Item
Long Conversation Alarm
Turns off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation
(not for single line telephones).
02
Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long
Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.
03
Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long
Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.
04
Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call
Forwarding/DND Override.
05
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook
signals.
06
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling (Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to manually (0) or
automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.
07
Message Waiting
Turns off or on an extension ability to leave Message
Waiting.
2 - 224
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
Related
Programming
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
08
Item
Conference
Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a
conference or Meet-Me Conference.
09
Privacy Release
Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a
Voice Call Conference.
10
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In Mode to be Speech
mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).
11
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns off or on an extension user ability to Room
Monitor other extensions.
12
Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored
Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by
other extensions.
13
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking
on extension.
14
Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to call a
Department Group Pilot.
15
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on
other's calls.
16
Barge-In, Receive
Turns off or on an extension ability to have other
extensions barge-in on calls.
17
Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone)
Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an
alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when
another extension barges into their conversation. If off,
there is no alert tone or display indication.
18
Programmable Function Key Programming
(General Level)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to program
General function keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
752.)
Programming Manual
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
1
1
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Programming
20-13-45
0 = Off
1 = On
2 - 225
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
19
Item
Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use
Selectable Display Messaging.
20
Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
(Restricted Operation Transfer)
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on operator alert when an extension user
improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
21
Extension Name
Turns off or on an extension user ability to program its
name.
22
Busy Status Display (Called Party Status)
Turns off or on the ability to display the detailed state of
the called party.
23
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should display the reason
a call is being transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).
24
Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key
Turns off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be
enabled if this option is to be used.
25
--- Not Used ---
26
Group Listen
Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Group
Listen.
27
Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking
on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call
Waiting) must be set to off for this option to work.
28
Allow Class of Service to be Changed
Turns off or on the ability of an extension Class of
Service to be changed via Service Code 677.
29
Paging Display
Turns off or on an extension user ability to display
paging information.
30
Background Music
Allow or Deny an extension user to turn Background
Music on and off.
2 - 226
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Programming
20-13-06
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
0
0
31
Connected Line Identification (COLP)
0 = Off
1 = On
32
Deny Multiple Barge-Ins
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
Allows or Denies an extension from having multiple
users Barge into their conversation.
33
ACD Supervisor’s Position Enhancement
This option must be on for the operator to use service
codes in Program 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13.
34
Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns off or on an extension user ability to block
off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker.
35
Block Camp On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to block callers
from dialing to Camp On.
36
Call Duration Timer Display
Turns off or on an extension display of the Call Duration
Time. The system waits until the interdigit time
(Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer.
37
--- Not Used ---
38
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the
Headset ringing.
39
ACD Queue Status Display
Turns off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an
extension Class of Service. Any extension which has
this option enabled also hears the queue alarm.
40
Do Not Disturb
Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel
Do Not Disturb.
41
Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
42
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Extension
Data Swap.
43
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Programming
11-13-10
11-13-11
11-13-12
11-13-13
11-11-08
15-07-03
11-15-12
--- Not Used ---
Programming Manual
2 - 227
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
44
Item
Live Monitor Enabling
Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live
Monitor.
45
MIC Key Mode while Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call Monitoring Mode
determines if the monitored parties receives the barge
in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled.
47
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or
not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an
idle state.
48
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or
not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an
idle state.
49
BLF Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station will light when a
Normal CO call is ringing the phone.
50
AIC Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in via AIC codes will
show which queue the call is coming from.
51
Number and Name appear in the Directory
Determine if an extension name and number will be
listed (On) or unlisted (Off) in the directory.
Input Data
COS
01~14
COS
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Programming
20-13-10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
2 - 228
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable
DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to
DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15
DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.
Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by
this program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog
trunk calls are NOT supported by this program.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
01
01~15
Item
First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Dialed)
For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the
first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.
02
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection
(ARS).
03
Trunk Group Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 704).
04
Outgoing System Speed Dial
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use the System Speed Dialing.
05
Operator Calling
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
dial 0 for the telephone system operator.
06
Internal Paging
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use the telephone system Internal Paging.
Programming Manual
Input
Data
Default
COS 1~15
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
2 - 229
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
07
Input
Data
Item
External Paging
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use the telephone system External Paging.
08
Direct Trunk Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9).
09
Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point>
This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller ability to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 3). This option is not
available to DISA callers.
10
Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA
Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05).
11
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
use the Barge-In feature.
12
Retrieve Park Hold
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to
retrieve a Park Hold call.
Default
COS 1~15
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Tie Lines
2 - 230
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring
type.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Incoming Signal Type
Ringing
Cycle
Default
01
Normal Incoming Call on Trunk
2
02
PBX, CES Incoming Call
8
03
Incoming Internal Call
12
04
DID/DISA/VRS
8
05
DID/DDI
8
06
Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line
07
Door Box Ringing for SLT
8
08
Virtual Extension Ring
8
09
Callback
11
10
Alarm for SLT
5
11
VRS Waiting Message Incoming
Call
6
1~13
12
2 - 231
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-7 Ringing Cycles
Number
Ringing Cycle
1
On
2
On:2.0 / Off:4.0
3
On:1.0 / Off:2.0
4
On:0.5 / Off:0.5
5
On:0.25 / Off:0.25
6
On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5
7
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25
8
On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0
9
On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0
10
On:1.0 / Off:4.0
11
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25
12
On:1.0 / Off:3.0
13
On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 232
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display
Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 24 characters. Use the
following chart when programming messages.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
→ ←
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
%
Enter characters:
+ , - .
/
#
Programming Manual
When you want to. . .
&
:
’
;
(
<
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
=
>
?
α ε θ
B E σ S ∞
¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming
mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
2 - 233
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, not all
the same characters are available.
Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number
01~20
Item
No.
Input Data
01
24 characters
Default
Number
2 - 234
Message
1
IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##
2
MEETING ROOM – ########
3
COME BACK ##:##
4
PLEASE CALL ###########
5
BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##
6
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##
7
BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##
8
BUSINESS TRIP ##########
9
GONE FOR THE DAY
10
ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##
11
MESSAGE 11
12
MESSAGE 12
13
MESSAGE 13
14
MESSAGE 14
15
MESSAGE 15
16
MESSAGE 16
17
MESSAGE 17
18
MESSAGE 18
19
MESSAGE 19
20
MESSAGE 20
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.
Feature Cross Reference
Selectable Display Messages
Programming Manual
2 - 235
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an
extension user dials 0 or 9 (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator
selected in this program.
If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the
extension assigned in this option.
Input Data
Operator Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Operator’s Extension Number
Define the extension numbers which are
to be used by operators.
1~8
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
101
Related
Program
11-01
20-01-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Intercom
2 - 236
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service
tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and
default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input
Data
Default
Description
After getting Intercom dial tone,
a telephone user has this time
to dial the first digit of the
Intercom call.
01
Extension Dial Tone
Time
0~64800
seconds
30
02
Busy Tone Timer
0~64800
seconds
15
03
Congestion Tone
0~64800
seconds
10
A Busy Tone when system
resources run short. (such as
DTMF receiver resources).
04
Call Waiting Tone
Timer
0~64800
seconds
10
This option sets the time
between Call Waiting tones.
This timer also sets the time
between Off-Hook Signaling
alerts.
05
Multiline Confirmation
Tone
0~64800
seconds
10
06
Interval of Call
Waiting Tone
0~64800
seconds
10
07
Intrusion Tone Repeat
Time
0~64800
seconds
0
08
Conference Tone
Interval
0~64800
seconds
0
09
Warning Beep Tone
Signaling Interval
0~64800
seconds
60
Programming Manual
Related
Program
After a call is interrupted (such
as Barge-In, Voice Mail
Conversation Recording, or
Voice Over), the system
repeats the Intrusion Tone after
this time. Normally, you should
enter 0 to disable this time.
14-01-18
2 - 237
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns
2 - 238
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for
the Caller ID feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Caller ID Displaying Format
(if displaying digits are more than 12 digits)
Input Data
= First 10
digits
(Upper)
= Last 10
digits
(Lower)
0
0~64800 seconds
10
0
0
1
02
--- Not Used ---
04
Wait Facility IE Timer
Default
This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine how long
the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco.
05
Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait)
0~64800 seconds
07
Long Distance Code
Up to two digits
No
setting
08
Area Code
Up to six digits
No
setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Caller ID
Programming Manual
2 - 239
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the
messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Private Call
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
PRIVATE
02
Call from Out of Service Area
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
OUT OF AREA
03
Call Information with Error
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
NO CALLER INFO
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Caller ID
2 - 240
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system
options for the Long Conversation feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Long Conversation Alarm 1
Default
Related
Program
0~64800 (sec)
170
14-01-15
0~64800 (sec)
180
14-01-15
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-14
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-14
Input Data
The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after
this time.
02
Long Conversation Alarm 2
After the initial long toll call warning tone,
additional warning tones sound after this time.
03
Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call
This timer determines how long the system
waits before disconnecting an incoming call.
04
Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call
This timer determines how long the system
waits before disconnecting an outgoing call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Programming Manual
2 - 241
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service to define the
time the system waits before determining the Wireless – DECT phone is out of range.
For incoming calls, the timer begins when the call is received. If the time defined here
expires before the Wireless – DECT phone starts to ring, the system determines the
phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services (indicates out-of range,
transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension).
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
05
--- Not Used ---
06
Out of Area Talkie Number
Input Data
0~100
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Wireless - DECT
2 - 242
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the
CTI feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Delayed ring timer for CTI
0~64800 (sec)
30
02
ALERT replay time (CTI)
0~64800 (sec)
8
03
Trunk Virtual Bridge – TSP Driver
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0
0~64800 (sec)
30
Enable or disable the system to send trunk or virtual
extension information to the TSP driver.
04
The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line
Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Programming Manual
2 - 243
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs
Up
0
1
= Service Off
= Service On
1
02
Progress Indicate Information Element Detect
0
1
= Service Off
= Service On
1
03
Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing
0
1
= 3.1KHz Audio
= Speech
0
04
Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone)
0
1
= Service Off
= Service On
0
Input Data
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops
dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message,
the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first
digit instead of the network.
05
T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect
Message
0
1
= Service Off
= Service On
1
06
Call Proceeding Send Mode
0
1
= Service Off
= Service On
1
07
Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect
Message Received
0
= Local Busy Tone
Off
= Busy Tone from
NT (network side)
0
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
1
08
Use of Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC)
This Program must be set to (0 = Disable) for
International Dialing when using Calling Number
Presentation (CPN) from station.
2 - 244
Default
09
High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
10
S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
11
Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/
Time Information Element Received
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
12
Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send)
0
0
Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return
Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives
Alerting Message.
1
= Normal – No
Message (Off)
= Normal – No
Message (On)
0
1
= Off
= On
0
0
1
= Off
= On
0
13
Local Busy Tone (Release)
Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE
message from Network.
14
No Response Release Send
Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer
expires.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual
2 - 245
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier Changing CO to define the Multiplier for charging
cost to each extension service class.
Input Data
Service Class
Item
No.
01
1~15
Item
Value %
Input Data
100~500
Default
100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 246
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for
Trunk to Trunk Conversation.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Conversation Continue Code
Input the code that can be dialed
to continue the conversation after
the Trunk-to-Trunk Release
Warning Tone is heard.
02
Conversation Disconnect Code
Input the code that can be dialed
to disconnect the conversation
after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release
Warning Tone is heard.
03
Conversation Continue Time
Input how long the conversation
will extend when the Conversation
Continue Code is dialed.
Input Data
Default
Related
Programming
0~9, #,
(Set for one digit
only)
No Setting
14-01-25
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
0~9, #,
(Set for one digit
only)
No Setting
14-01-25
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
0~64800 seconds
0
14-01-25
20-28-01
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 247
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each
extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for
this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension
numbers.
The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number
Up to eight digits
Input Data
0~15
0 = Not assigned
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 248
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk.
There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program,
one for each Night Service Mode. The details of classes are assigned by
Program 20-31.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number
001~200
Input Data
0~15, #,
0 = Not assigned
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 249
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers
on a class of service basis.
Input Data
Timer Class Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time
0~15
Default
Related
Programming
0~64800 seconds
15 seconds
20-01-08
0~64800 seconds
64800 seconds
20-01-09
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
20-04-03
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
21-01-02
0~64800 seconds
5 seconds
21-01-03
0~64800 seconds
5 seconds
21-01-09
Input Data
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for
this amount of time
02
Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension Callback or
Trunk Queueing request after this amount of
time.
03
CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for
Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual
Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the
extension after this interval.
04
Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D
Timer)
When placing Intercom calls, extension users
must dial each digit in this time.
05
Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer)
The system waits for this time to expire before
placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts
after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).
06
Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start)
A Ringdown extension automatically calls the
programmed destination after this time.
2 - 250
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
07
Issue 1.0
Item
Ring No Answer Alarm Time
Default
Related
Programming
0~64800 seconds
60 seconds
22-01-03
0~64800 seconds
0 seconds
22-01-04
0~64800 seconds
20 seconds
22-01-06
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-01
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-01-02
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-03
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-01-04
0~64800 seconds
90 seconds
24-01-06
Input Data
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than
this interval, the system changes the ring
cadence. This indicates to the user that the call
has been ringing too long.
08
DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time
A DIL that rings its programmed destination
longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No
Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08).
09
DID Ring-No-Answer Time
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept,
this interval sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This
interval is how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before rerouting to the
intercept ring group.
10
Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold)
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time. This time works with
the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program
24-01-02 ).
11
Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive
Hold)
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this time. This time works with
Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this
time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time
again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01
and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user answers the
call.
12
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this time.
13
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for
this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.
14
Park Hold Time – Normal
A call left parked longer than this time interval
recalls the extension that initially parked it.
Programming Manual
2 - 251
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
15
Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward
No Answer)
Default
Related
Programming
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
24-02-03
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
24-02-04
0~64800 seconds
0 seconds
25-07-02
Input Data
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mailbox.
16
Transfer Recall Time
An unanswered transferred call recalls after this
time to the extension that initially transferred it.
17
DID/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or
IRG or VM)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for
this time before the system sets the call as a
Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring No Answer
routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04).
18
Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG
0~64800 seconds
60 seconds
25-07-03
19
Long Conversation Warning Tone Time
(Trunk to Trunk)
0~64800 seconds
3600 seconds
25-07-07
0~64800 seconds
10 seconds
25-07-08
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
25-07-09
0~64800 seconds
30 seconds
25-07-10
0~64800 seconds
1200 seconds
31-01-02
Determine the time a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can last before the Long
Conversation tone is heard
20
Long Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to
Trunk)
This time determines how long the system waits
before disconnecting a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long Conversation
tone is heard.
21
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
22
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
23
Page Announcement Duration
This timer sets the maximum length of Page
announcements. (Affects External Paging only)
2 - 252
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to
16 in 20-29-01 or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide
timer is used.
All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 253
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an
operator group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Extension’s Operator Setting
Input Data
0~15
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 254
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator
group.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk’s Operator Setting
Allows the user to select Operator Group per trunk.
001~200
Input Data
0~15
(0 = Not assigned)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 255
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in
the operator group.
Input Data
Operator Group
1~15
Operator Number
1~8
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Operator Extension Group Setup
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 256
Program 20 : System Option Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling
an operator telephone.
Input Data
Operator Group
Item
No.
01
1~15
Item
Operator Access Mode
Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first
operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried
first (1)
Input Data
0
1
= Step
= Circular
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 257
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 258
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system
options for Outgoing Call Service.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Seizure Trunk Line Mode
Select the trunk based off the Trunk
Route Priority (0) or based off the
trunk that has not been used in the
longest time (1).
02
Intercom Interdigit Time
Related
Program
Input Data
Default
= Priority
Route
= Circular
Route
0
0~64800 (sec)
10
0~64800 (sec)
5
14-02-08
0~64800 (sec)
5
14-02-05
0
1
14-05
14-06
21
When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit in
this time.
03
Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after time
expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).
04
Dial Tone Detection Time
If dial tone detection is enabled, the
system waits this time for the Telco to
return dial tone. When the time
expires, the system assumes dial tone
is not present. To disable this time
(and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.
Programming Manual
2 - 259
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
05
Item
Disconnect Time when Dial Tone
not Detected
Input Data
Default
0~64800 (sec)
3
Related
Program
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to calls
placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
dialed. It does not pertain to line key
or Direct Trunk Access calls.
06
Dial Pause at First Digit
0~64800 (sec)
1
07
Toll Restriction Override Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system removes
Toll Restriction from the extension for
this time.
08
Preset Dial Display Hold Time
0~64800 (sec)
10
09
Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline
Start)
0~64800 (sec)
5
0~24
0
0~60
0
20-08-06
21-07
20-08-09
21-11
A Ringdown extension automatically
calls its programmed destination after
this time.
10
Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path
If this option is programmed with an
entry other than 0, a call does not
have a talk path unless the user dials
at least the number of digits entered in
this option when placing an outgoing
call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911(USA only).
Since it is only a 3-digit number, the
call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher
from hearing the caller. This option
should be kept at its default setting of
0 to prevent any problems with dialing
911 (USA only).
11
2 - 260
Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction
Path Control
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
12
Item
Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk
Access
If enabled (1), an extension user can
dial 911 (USA only) without first
dialing a trunk access code or
pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an
extension user must dial a trunk
access code (e.g., 9) or press a line
key before dialing 911 (USA only).
13
1
Default
= Trunk
Access
Code
Required
= Trunk
Access
Code Not
Required
1
Related
Program
0, 1~64800 (sec)
(0 = Off)
0
0~64800 (sec)
3
Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
(Toll Restriction)
0
0
Enable or disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
1
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
Supervise Dial Detection Timer
0~64800 (sec)
20
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
Digits 0~9
4
15-01-05
21-01-15
21-01-16
Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk
Access
0
1
99-01-01
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to
continue to dial codes or extensions
after receiving Trunk Busy. This
needs to be set to Enabled (1) for the
Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to
work.
1
Alarm Ring Timer (E911)
Use this option to set the duration of
the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0,
the E911 Alarm does not ring.
14
0
Input Data
Forced Account Code Inter-digit
Timer
11-12-56
20-08-16
The system waits this time for a user
to enter a Forced Account code.
15
16
= Disable
(Off)
= Enable (On)
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the system
determines the call is unable to
complete and releases the DTMF
receiver.
17
Restriction Digit in Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine the
number of digits to be dialed before
the call should be disconnected.
18
19
Programming Manual
= Disable
(Off)
= Enable (On)
--- Not Used ---
2 - 261
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 262
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program
14-06 routes to extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
Related
Program
14-06
14-01-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 263
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table
for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No setting)
Default
1
Related
Program
14-06
14-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 264
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll
Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in
Program 21-05 and 21-06.
A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class will apply
for outgoing calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Day/Night Mode
1~9
9 = (Power Failure Mode)
Maximum 8 digits
Restriction
Class
Default
1~15
2
Related
Program
14-01-08
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 265
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes
(1~15).
Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
International Call
Restriction Table
International Call
Permit Code Table
Input Data
1~15
Description
0 = Unassigned
(No)
1 = Assigned
(Yes)
1, 6~15 = 0
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Restrict Table
for the Toll Restriction Class you
are programming. Enter
International Call Restrict Table
data in Program 21-06-01.
21-06-01
0 = Unassigned
(No)
1 = Assigned
(Yes)
1, 3~15 = 0
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Permit Table for
the Toll Restriction Class you are
programming. Enter International
Call Permit Table data in Program
21-06-02.
21-06-02
Select the table (defined in
21-06-03) to be used to determine
the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.
21-06-03
It chooses whether the table set
up by 21-06-04 is referred to, or
not referred to.
21-06-04
It chooses whether the table set
up by 21-06-05 is referred to, or
not referred to.
21-06-05
Set the tables 1~4 when referring
to the table set up by 21-06-06.
21-06-06
2~5 = 1
2=1
03
--- Not Used ---
04
Maximum Number of
Digits Table
Assignment
1~4 = Table
0 = Disable
(None)
Common Permit
Code Table
0 = Unassigned
(No)
1 = Assigned
(Yes)
1, 8~15 = 0
0 = Unassigned
(No)
1 = Assigned
(Yes)
1, 6~15 = 0
05
06
07
2 - 266
Common Restriction
Table
Permit Code Table
Related
Program
Default
1~4 = Table
0 = Disable
(None)
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
2~7 = 1
2~5 = 1
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
08
09
Issue 1.0
Item
Restriction Table
Restriction for
Common Speed Dials
Input Data
1~4 = Table
0
= Disable
(None)
0
1
10
Restriction for Group
Speed Dials
0
1
11
Intercom Call
Restriction
0
1
12
PBX Call Restriction
0
1
13
Restriction of Tie
Line Calls
0
1
Default
Description
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
Set the tables 1~4 when referring
to the table set up by 21-06-07.
3=1
4=2
5=3
= Does Not
Restrict
= Following
Restriction
Check
0
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Common
Speed Dialing numbers. If
enabled, System Speed Dialing
numbers have the same
restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
= Does Not
Restrict
= Following
Restriction
Check
0
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Group Speed
Dialing numbers. If enabled,
Group Speed Dialing numbers
have the same restrictions as
manually dialed numbers.
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
Determines if incoming and
outgoing intercom calls are
allowed.
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
1~6, 8~15 = 0
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
0
7=1
21-06-07
Use this option to set how the
system Toll Restricts calls over
PBX trunks. If you enable PBX
Toll Restriction, the system begins
Toll Restriction after the PBX
access code. The user cannot dial
a PBX extension. If you disable
PBX Toll Restriction, the system
only restricts calls that contain the
PBX access code. The system
does not restrict calls to PBX
extensions. Refer to the PBX
compatibility feature. Make sure
Program 21-05-04 (Maximum
Number of Digits Table
Assignment) allows for PBX Toll
Call Dialing (normally 12 digits).
It chooses whether the toll
restriction of the dial set up by
34-08 is enabled or disabled.
14
Trunk Transfer
Restriction on
Incomplete Dial
0
1
= Not allow
= Allow
0 (Not allow)
If this program is set to 1, you can
transfer the outgoing trunk which
you dialed incompletely.
15
Common Hold
Restriction on
Incomplete Dial
0
1
= Not allow
= Allow
0 (Not allow)
If this program is set to 1, you can
hold the outgoing trunk which you
dialed in restriction check.
Programming Manual
Related
Program
34-08
2 - 267
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Toll Restriction Class
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
01: International Call Restrict Table
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
02: International Call Permit Table
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
03: --- Not Used ---
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
04: Max. No. Digits Table Assign.
0
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
05: Common Permit Table
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
06: Common Restrict Table
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
07: Permit Code Table
0
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
08: Restrict Code Table
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
09: Restriction for Common Abbr.
Dials
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10: Restriction for Group Abbr. Dials
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11: Intercom Call Restriction
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12: Restriction of PBX Calls
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13: Restriction of Tie Line Calls
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14: Restriction for Incomplete Dialed
Trunk Transfer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15: Allow the Outgoing Trunk to
Common Hold
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 268
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction
data. Dial 1-9, 0, , # can be entered in each table.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Table
01
International Call
Restriction Table
1~10
Dial
(Up to four
digits)
Tables 1~10 = No
Setting
This option lets you program the
Restrict Table for international
calls. The system has 10
International Call Restrict Tables.
Each entry can have up to four
digits.
02
International Call
Permit Code
Table
1~20
Dial
(Up to six
digits)
Tables 1~20 = No
Setting
This option lets you program the
Permit Table for international calls.
The system has 20 International
Call Permit Tables. Each entry can
have up to six digits.
03
Maximum
Number Digits
Table
Assignment
1~4
4~30
Tables 1~ 4 = 30
This option selects the maximum
number of digits allowed in
outgoing calls for each table.
04
Common Permit
Code Table
1~10
Dial
(Up to four
digits)
Table 1 = 911
Table 2 = 1800
Table 3 = 1888
Table 4 = 1822
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 = 1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting
This option lets you program the
Common Permit Code Table. This
table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly allow users to dial.
05
Common
Restriction Table
1~10
Dial
(Up to 12
digits)
Table 1 = 900
Table 2 = 1900
Table 3 = 976
Tables 4 ~ 10 = No
Setting
This option lets you program the
Common Restrict Code Table. This
table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly prevent users from
dialing.
Programming Manual
Input Data
Default
Description
2 - 269
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
06
Item
Permit Code
Table
Table
1~4
(table)
001~200
Input Data
Default
Description
Dial
(Up to 12
digits)
Table 1~4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the
Permit Code Tables. If the system
has Toll Restriction enabled, users
can dial numbers only if permitted
by these tables and the Common
Permit Table (21-06-04). There are
four Permit Code Tables, with up to
200 entries in each table. The
system permits calls exactly as you
enter the code.
Dial
(Up to 12
digits)
Table 1~4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the
Restrict Code Tables. If the system
has Toll Restriction enabled, users
cannot dial numbers listed in these
tables. There are four Restrict
Code Tables, with up to 200 entries
in each table. The system restricts
calls exactly as you enter the code.
Use this option to enter the PBX
Access Code. When the system is
behind a PBX, this is the code
users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the
PBX access code. For PBX trunks
(Program 14-04) the system only
Toll Restricts calls that contain the
access code. Always program this
option when the system is behind a
PBX, even if you don’t want to use
Toll Restriction. PBX Access
Codes can have up to two digits,
using 0-9, #, and LINE KEY 1
(don’t care). When using Account
Codes, do not use an asterisk in a
PBX access code. Otherwise, after
the , the trunk stops sending
digits to the central office. Entries
1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX
Access Codes. Each code can
have up to two digits.
(Entry)
07
Deny Restriction
Table
1~4
(table)
1~60
(Entry)
08
PBX Access
Code
1~4
Dial
(Up to two
digits)
Table 1~4 = No Setting
09
Specific Dial
Outgoing Code
1~20
Dial
(Up to eight
digits)
No Setting
10
Outgoing Call
Code Setup
1~20
Dial
(Up to four
digits)
No Setting
2 - 270
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 271
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll
Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using
any combination of 0~9, # and . Each extension can have a separate code, or many
extensions can share the same override code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum 8 digits
Related
Program
Password
Default
Four Digits
(Fixed)
No Setting
21-01-07
20-08-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 272
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Repeat Redial Count
Input Data
Default
0~255
3
0~64800 (sec)
60
0~64800 (sec)
30
0~64800 (sec)
0
Sets how many times a Repeat Redial
automatically repeats if the call does not go
through.
02
Repeat Redial Interval Time
This time sets the interval between Repeat
Redial attempts.
03
Repeat Dial Calling Timer
After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial
maintains the call after this time. After this time,
the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat
Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again.
04
Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk
Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone with
an ISDN line, when called party is busy.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 273
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction
Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
1~15
Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block
Default
15
Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block
feature is used.
02
Supervisor Password
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable
or disable Dial Block for other extensions.
0~9, , #
(4-digit fixed)
No
Setting
Conditions
This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is
not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service,
everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 274
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll
Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block
Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digit
Toll Restriction Class
Default
0, 1~15
(0 = No Setting)
0 (No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 275
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the
Hotline destination number for each extension number.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum 8 digits
Hotline Destination Number
Default
0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash,
@ (Code to wait for answer
supervision)
(maximum 24 digits)
No Setting
Related
Program
20-08-09
21-01-09
Conditions
The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to
VM Auto Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal
calls and analog outbound calls are not supported.
Feature Cross Reference
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
2 - 276
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign
Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is
made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned
(Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
21-12.
If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the
system sends the data in Program 21-13.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Calling Party Number Data
Default
01
1~0, , # (maximum 16 digits)
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual
2 - 277
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign
each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling
number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an
extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program
21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program
21-12.
If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the
system sends the data in Program 21-13.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Calling Party
Number Data
01
0~9, , #
(Max. 16 digits)
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
ISDN Compatibility
2 - 278
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the
password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code is six
digits long, using any combination of 0~9, # and .
Input Data
ID Table Number
Item
No.
1~500
Item
Input Data
01
User ID
Dial (Six digits)
02
Walking Toll Restriction
Class Number
1~15
Default
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Toll Restriction
Programming Manual
2 - 279
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate
the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code when setting up
alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk
routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent
routing.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 280
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the
SIP calling party number for individual trunks.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Description
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup
for Trunk
001~200
Input Data
Up to 16 digits
(1~0, , #)
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 281
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
to assign the Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent
to the exchange when the caller places an outgoing call.
When the Calling Party Number is assigned by PRG 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the
system uses the data in PRG 21-18 and PRG 21-19.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Description
01
IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup
for Extension
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Up to 16 digits
(1~0, , #)
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 282
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to
set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Description
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party
Number Setup for Extension
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Up to 16 Digits
(1~0, , #)
Default
None
Related
Program
15-01-04
20-08-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 283
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to
define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined
by PRG 21-05 and 21-06.
This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Description
Restriction Class
Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected
trunk.
001~200
Input Data
1~15
Default
1
Related
Program
14-01-08
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 284
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings to
define the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication.
Input Data
Trunk
Item
No.
01
02
001~200
Description
Input Data
Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back.
0
1
CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting
0000~1999
CO MWI Call Back Enabling
= No VMWI Service
= Enable VMWI
Service
Default
0
1999
Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call
Back.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 285
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 286
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the
system options for incoming calls.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Incoming Call
Priority
Input Data
0
1
02
Description
= Intercom
Call
Priority
= Trunk Call
Priority
1
Use this option to determine if Intercom
calls or trunk calls have answer priority
when both are ringing simultaneously.
15-02-22
If enabled, an incoming call that rings
longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm
interval (22-01-03), changes to a
unique ring cadence to indicate that the
call has been ringing too long. If
disabled, this does not occur.
22-01-03
22-01-04
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone
longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.
22-01-02
Incoming Call
Ring No Answer
Alarm
0
= Disable
(Off)
= Enable
(On)
0
03
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time
0~64800 (sec)
60
04
DIL No Answer
Recall Time
0~64800 (sec)
0
05
--- Not Used ---
06
DID RingNo-Answer Time
0~64800 (sec)
20
07
DID Incoming
Ring Group No
Answer Time
0~64800 (sec)
20
Programming Manual
1
Related
Program
Default
22
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer
Intercept, this interval sets the
Ring-No-Answer time. This interval is
how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before rerouting
to the intercept ring group.
22-12
2 - 287
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
08
DID Pilot Call No
Answer Time
0~64800 (sec)
60
09
DID to Trunk to
Trunk no answer
timer
0~64800 (sec)
20
10
VRS Waiting
Message
Operation
0
0
This program sets up the operation
mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing
Message.
22-14
22-15
22-08
22-04
22-01-04
20-15-11
15-07
VRS Waiting
Message Interval
Time
0~64800 (sec)
20
Setup the sending duration time of the
Auto – Attendant & Queuing.
22-14-06
22-15-06
41-11-06
11
Input Data
1
= Enable
Always
= Change by
Manual
Operation
Default
Description
The message is repeatedly sent out
within the specified time.
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 288
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type
for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
Incoming Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
= Normal
= VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
= DISA
= DID
= DIL
= E&M Tie line
= Delayed VRS
= ANI/DNIS
= DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
001~200
Default
0
Description
Use this option to set the
feature type for the trunk
you are programming.
Related
Program
14-04
Conditions
When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the
Telco connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 blade must be unplugged
and then reconnected in order for the T1 blade to sync.
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04
for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID
trunks when assigned as VRS.
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for
each DID is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned
as VRS.
Programming Manual
2 - 289
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 290
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the
trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension.
Eight ring tones are available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Ring Tone Pattern
0~8
(Ring Tone Pattern
1~4)
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
001~200
Related
Program
Default
Description
0
Use this program to select the ring tone
range for the trunk. The trunk uses a
ring tone in the range selected when it
rings an extension. Eight ring tones are
available.
15-02
Table 2-8 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Programming Manual
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Pattern 1
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
Pattern 2
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Pattern 3
High
Middle
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
Pattern 4
High
Middle
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
2 - 291
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Selectable Ring Tones
2 - 292
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign
extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group
programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program
22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group (IRG) can have up to
32 extension numbers assigned.
There are 100 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
Item
No.
Extension
Number
01
Maximum 8
Digits
1~100
Description
Related
Program
Use this program to assign extensions (up to
32) to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions
according to Ring Group programming.
22-02
22-05
22-06
Default
Extensions 101~108 (first eight ports) ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Ring Groups
Programming Manual
2 - 293
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to
incoming Ring Groups. There are 100 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Incoming Group
Number
01
1~8
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
001~200
Default
Description
1
Use this program to assign
Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to
Incoming Ring Groups
(22-04).
Related
Program
22-04
22-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Ring Groups
2 - 294
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an
extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
Maximum eight digits
Incoming
Group
Number
0
1
= No Ring
= Ring
Default
1
Related
Program
22-04
22-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming Manual
2 - 295
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or
Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension
directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension
has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not have a line key, the
DIL rings CAP keys. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can
make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
001~200
Number of Transferring
Destination
Extension Number (maximum
eight digits)
Pilot Number
Default
No Setting
Conditions
Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
2 - 296
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN
Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to
assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the
DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also
reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group.
Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
001~200
Incoming Group Number
Default
0
(No Setting)
001~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Ring Group
Programming Manual
2 - 297
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In
incoming calls for each trunk group.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
001~100
Item
Expected Number of Digits
Input Data
Default
1~8
4
0
1
= Disconnect (Cut)
= Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-306.)
0
0
0
1
= Extension # Specify
(Intercom)
= DID Conversion Table
= Enbloc Receiving
= Overlap Receiving
0
Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with 3- and 4-digit DID service.
If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits
that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID,
it analyzes the first digits that are assigned
here.
02
Received Vacant Number Operation
Use this option to enable or disable
Vacant Number Intercept.
03
Sub-Addressing Mode
04
DID Receiving Mode for ISDN
0
1
05
Local Code Digits
0~15 (0 = No Local Code)
0
Dial (maximum 16 digits)
No Setting
Dial (1 digit: 0~9)
No Setting
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
06
Local Code
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
07
Pilot Code
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
2 - 298
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
08
Item
T302 Time-out Operation
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
Input Data
0
1
= Disconnect (Cut)
= Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-306.)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2 - 299
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID
Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate
among 20 Translation Tables.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
01~20
Item
No.
Item
01
1st Area Setup (Start Address)
0~2000
(0 = No Setting)
1st Area Setup (End Address)
Default Table
2nd Area Setup (Start Address)
Default Table
2nd Area Setup (End Address)
Default Table
Input Data
Default Table
1st
Conversion
Table Area
2 - 300
2nd
Start
Table
End
Table
Start
Table
End
Table
1
1
100
0
0
2
101
200
0
0
3
201
300
0
0
4
301
400
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
20
0
0
0
0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2 - 301
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for
each Translation Table entry (2000).
The digits received by the system (eight maximum)
The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum)
The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12
characters maximum)
The Transfer Target – 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the
final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
Operation Mode
Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once
for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C,
press 2 three times.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit . . .
1
2 - 302
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
→ ←
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
Enter characters:
+ , - . /
#
%
:
&
;
’
(
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
<
=
>
? B E
α ε θ
σ S ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space.
(In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number
Item
No.
01
1~2000
Item
Received Number
Input Data
Default
Maximum 8 digits
No Setting
Maximum 24 digits
No Setting
Maximum 12 characters
No Setting
This is the received DID digits.
02
Target Number
Enter the destination number to which the
DID number is sent.
03
DID Name
This is the name that is assigned to the
DID digits when it rings the extension.
04
Programming Manual
Transfer Operation Mode
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No Transfer
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
0
2 - 303
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming Group
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail
201~264 = Extension Group
400 = Valid Extension Number
401 = DISA
501~599 = DISA/VRS Message
1000~1999 = Speed Dial Number
(000~999)
0
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0
PRG 20-09-07 overrides this setting.
08
Maximum Number of DID Calls
0~200 (0 = No Limit)
0
09
Music on Hold Source
0 = IC/MOH Port
1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port
0
10
ACI Music Source Port
When a sound source type is 2 in
above : (0~96)
0
11
Ring Group Transfer
0 = Disable (Caller will hear
Ringback)
1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring)
1
05
Transfer Destination Number 1
06
Transfer Destination Number 2
400 = Allows the outside party to dial a
different extension number in the
translation table (for example, ring no
answer to a dialed number, the caller then
hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter
another Valid Extension Number).
401 = Provides the caller with DISA
dialing options (requires using the DISA
password).
0
This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.
07
Call Waiting
Enable (1) or disable (0) each
conversation tables ability to follow the
Ring Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring
Group.
If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID
Translation Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 2 are set, the priority
of transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program
22-12-01.
2 - 304
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for
each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks
when assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2 - 305
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN
Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to
define the first destination group for DID calls.
Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route
to the first destination group by the following:
Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no
station blade is installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
Busy intercept
Ring-no-answer intercept
If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in
Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.
If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this
order:
Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.
For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed,
but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination
after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but
the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
2 - 306
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
01~20
Incoming Group Number
0 (No Setting)
1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
Default
1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2 - 307
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the
DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own
group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk
Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
1~100
Conversion Table
Area Number
0~20
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 308
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to
define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of
tone for VRS Waiting Message.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
1st Delayed Message Start Time
1~100
Input Data
Default
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed
Message
0
VRS message that is used for the 1st
Delayed Message.
1st Delayed Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
0
VRS message that is used for the 2nd
Delayed Message.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed
Message
2nd Delayed Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0
0 = No Disconnect
1~64800 Seconds
60
Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for IRG.
02
03
1st Delayed Message Number
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.
04
05
2nd Delayed Message Number
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.
06
Tone Kind at Message Interval
What is heard between the Delay
Message.
07
Disconnect Time After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.
Programming Manual
2 - 309
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 310
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for
each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind
for VRS Delayed Message. There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
1st Delayed Message Start Time
01~64
Input Data
Default
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0
VRS message that is used for the 1st
Delayed Message.
1st Delayed Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
0
VRS message that is used for the 2nd
Delayed Message.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
2nd Delayed Message Sending Count
0~255 (time)
0
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0
0 = No Disconnect
1~64800 (sec)
60
Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for Department Group.
02
03
1st Delayed Message Number
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.
04
05
2nd Delayed Message Number
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.
06
Tone Kind at Message Interval
What is heard between the Delay
Message.
07
Disconnect Time After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.
Programming Manual
2 - 311
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Group
2 - 312
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-16: Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial
group number for Private Call Refuse.
Item
No.
01
Item
Speed Dial Group Number
Input Data
0~64
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Department Group
Programming Manual
2 - 313
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to
define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number
Item
No.
01~100
Item
Input Data
Default
No Setting
01
Received Dial
Up to 8 digits
02
Start of Time
0000~2359 (Time)
0000
03
End of Time
0000~2359 (Time)
0000
04
Dial-In Conversion Table
Number
0~2000
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 314
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and
incoming ring pattern for Private Calls.
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Transfer Mode
0 = Not defined
1 = Internal dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group
02
Destination Number
1 = Internal Dial (up to 24 digits) 0~9, , #,
P, R, @
2 = Incoming Ring Group (0~100)
03
Incoming Ring Pattern
0~9
0 = Normal pattern
1~4 = Tone pattern
5~9 = Scale pattern
Default
0
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 315
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by
Caller ID per timer pattern mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
01~200
Day/Night Mode
01~08
Item
No.
01
Item
Flexible Ringing
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 316
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup
Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group
priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call
Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.
23
There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups.
Input Data
Extension Number
Program
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Group
Number
Priority
Default
01
1~64
1~999
1 – xxx
Description
Use this program to assign extensions to
Call Pickup Groups other than the
extension group set up by a Program
16-02.
Related
Program
11-12-26
11-12-27
11-12-28
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Group Call Pickup
Programming Manual
2 - 317
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in
Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging
system is in an extension assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer
code (#0) to pick up the call.
You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk
calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming
(defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing calls, however, always have
priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line Preference
feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual for more
information.
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
2 - 318
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route
Table
Number
Default
01
1~8
0~100
0
Description
Use this program to let an extension
user automatically answer trunk calls
that ring other extensions. When the
user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing
programming (defined in Program
14-06).
Related
Program
14-06
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Line Preference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2 - 319
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the
off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a
telephone.
There are 256 available Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
Item
No.
Order
Extension
Group
Number
Default
Description
01
1~4
00~64
00
When an extension has a virtual
extension assigned to a Programmable
Function Key, this program determines
the priority for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is
lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, when the user
lifts the handset, the user answers a
ringing call from any group.
(0 or
00=Don’t
Care)
Related
Program
16-02
20-10-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIE)/ Virtual Extensions
(VE)
2 - 320
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options
for the Hold feature.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Hold Recall Time
Input Data
Default
0~64800 (sec)
90
0~64800 (sec)
30
0~64800 (sec)
90
0~64800 (sec)
30
0~64800 (sec)
1800
Related
Program
24
A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this time. This time
works with the Hold Recall Callback Time
(Item 2).
02
Hold Recall Callback Time
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings
an extension for this time. This time works
with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time.
After this time, the system invokes the
Hold recall time again. Cycling between
time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues
until a user answers the call.
03
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this
time.
04
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked up,
the call goes back on System Hold.
05
Forced Release of Held Call
14-01-16
Depending on the setting of Program
14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on
Hold longer than this time.
Programming Manual
2 - 321
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
06
Item
Park Hold Time – Normal
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0~64800 (sec)
90
20-11-19
0~64800 (sec)
300
20-11-19
A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.
07
Park Hold Time – Extended (Recall)
A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hold
Park
2 - 322
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for
the Transfer feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Busy Transfer
Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to
Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled,
calls transferred to busy extensions recall
immediately.
02
MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
Use this option to enable or disable MOH on
Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller
hears MOH while their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller
hears ringback while their call rings the
destination extension.
03
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Input Data
0
1
0
1
Default
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
1
= Hold Tone
= Ring Back
Tone
0
0~64800 (sec)
10
0~64800 (sec)
30
0~64800 (sec)
30
Related
Program
20-03-02
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mailbox.
04
Transfer Recall Time
An unanswered transferred call recalls to the
extension that initially transferred it after this
time.
05
Message Wait Ring Interval Time
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) without
message waiting lamps, this is the time between
intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the
system rings once.
Programming Manual
2 - 323
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
07
Item
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning
Tone
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
0~64800 (sec)
1800
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-10
Time starts when a trunk begins talking with
another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk
transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking).
When this time expires, a warning tone is heard.
If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation
disconnects after time expires. This time is set
again when the external digit timer expires. One
of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).
08
Delayed Transfer Time for all Department
Groups
0~64800 (sec)
10
11-11-28
11-11-29
15-07-59
09
Two B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer
0~64800 (sec)
10
10-03-16
(PRI)
10
Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
11
No Answer Step Transfer
0~64800 (sec)
10
14-01-26
12
No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
0~64800 (sec)
0
14-01-26
13
Hook Flash Sending Timer When the System
Answers Automatically
0~64800 (sec)
2
Time before sending the hook flash for Call
Forward Centrex.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Transfer
2 - 324
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The
system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked
in orbit by an extension in its own group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Park Group
Number
Default
01
1~64
1
Maximum 8 digits
Description
Assign an extension to a Park Group. The
system allows a total of 64 Park Groups.
Related
Program
15-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Park
Programming Manual
2 - 325
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign
the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/
Night
Mode
Speed Dial
Area
Number
Default
Description
01
1~8
0~1999
1999
The destination telephone number of the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this
program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.
Related
Program
11-10-08
13-04
24-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 326
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the
Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension
Group.
There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
01~64
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Speed Dial
Area
Number
Default
Description
01
1~8
0~1999
1999
The Speed Dialing area is used to
program the destination number of the
transferred telephone number when a
Department Group call is transferred
using the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
feature.
Related
Program
11-11-27
13-04
24-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Transfer
Programming Manual
2 - 327
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding
Level:
IN
Description
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 24-06 : Fixed Call
Forwarding to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0~4) and the destination
extension/virtual extension. For extension ports, the Fixed Call Forwarding
destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or a Voice Mail extension. For
virtual extensions, the Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on-premise
extension or Voice Mail extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Fixed Call Forwarding Type
Default
Description
0 = Fixed Call Forwarding disabled
1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with both
extensions ringing
2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when
unanswered
3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate
4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or
unanswered
0
Set the type of substitute call receipt and
specify the extension number transferred
on originated telephone.
Conditions
Do not use Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 (Both Ringing) with Voice Mail ports.
Feature Cross Reference
Call Forwarding
2 - 328
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise to assign the Fixed Call
Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number for each extension/virtual extension. The
Off-Premise destination can be up to 24-digits long. A trunk access code (e.g., 9)
must be included in the number.
Fixed Call Forwarding Types:
Input Data
Extension Number
Off-Premise Destination Number
1~9, 0, #, , P, R, @ (up to 24 digits)
Up to eight digits
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 329
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex to assign the Call Forwarding type
and Call Forwarding for Centrex telephone number for each extension/virtual
extension. The Off-Premise destination can be up to 24-digits long.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Call Forwarding Type
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Default
0~4
0
1~9, 0, #, , P, R,
@ (up to 24 digits)
No Setting
1~9, 0, #, , P, R,
@ (up to 24 digits)
No Setting
Set the Call Forwarding type:
0 = Call Forwarding disabled
1 = Call Forwarding No Answer
2 = Call Forwarding Immediate Call
3 = Call Forwarding Busy or No Answer
4 = Call Forwarding when Busy
02
Call Forwarding Destination for Immediate and
No Answer Call
Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for
Immediate and No Answer Calls.
03
Call Forwarding Busy Destination
Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for
Busy Call.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 330
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for each extension/virtual extension. The destination
can be up to 24 digits long, using 0~9, , #, and @. Be sure to include the trunk
access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise.
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol.
Pause can be set by LK 1.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Maximum 8 digits
Input Data
01
Call Forwarding Type:
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding when busy
02
CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Call, No Answer:
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
Default
0
No
Setting
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol
Programming Manual
03
Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No
Answer:
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
No
Setting
04
CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination:
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
No
Setting
05
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination:
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
No
Setting
2 - 331
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Input Data
Default
06
Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer:
0~9, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
None
07
Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Busy:
0~9, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 332
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic
setting of each VRS/DISA line.
Program
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001~200
Item
VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode
Default
Related
Program
= Extension Number
Service Code
Specify (Intercom)
= Use Dial
Conversion Table
0
22-11
25-08
Input Data
0
1
02
DISA User ID
0
1
= Off
= On
1
03
VRS/DISA Transfer
Alarm
0
1
= Normal (Off)
= Alarm (On)
0
25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 333
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number
to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as
a VRS/DISA.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
Message (Talkie)
Source
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No Message
VRS
ACI
Department
Group
001~200
Additional Data
Default
1 = 01~100 (VRS Message Number)
2 = 01~04 (ACI Group Number)
3 = 01~64 (Extension Group Number)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 334
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to
set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials
incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an
alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID
Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
Incoming Group Number
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)
001~200
Default
Related
Program
0
22-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 335
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to
set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when
the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The
call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or
voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each
Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Default
Related
Program
01
1~8
0
22-04
Incoming Group Number
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or
InMail)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 336
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS
message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each
VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers, enter the VRS message (1~100) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call
reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04.
For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
VRS Message Number
Default
01
1~8
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 337
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single
digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions,
the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS
message set to answer outside calls (refer to Program 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:
The digit the VRS caller dials (0~9, , #). Keep in mind that if you assign
destinations to digits, outside callers cannot dial system extensions.
The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice
Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant
message.
Example:
Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399
In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to
399. This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users
during/after VRS Message 01.
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 338
Attendant Message Number
01~100
Received Dial
1~9, 0, , #
Item
Input Data
Default
0
01
Next Attendant Message
Number
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
101 = Voice Mail answers
104 = Refer to 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
105 = Dial the other extension
02
Destination Number
Up to eight digits
No Setting
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same
first digit is defined here.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2 - 339
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system
timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of
each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time
for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If
the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops
the call.
02
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time
before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer.
After this time expires, the call follows the programmed
Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and
25-04).
03
Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG
From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring
Group of PRG25-03/25-04. This setting determines how
long the call is ringing in the IRG.
04
Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of the automatic
answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.
05
Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Input
Data
Default
Related
Program
0~64800
(sec)
10
25-04
0~64800
(sec)
0
25-04
0~64800
(sec)
60
0~64800
(sec)
10
0~64800
(sec)
10
0~64800
(sec)
10
Set the announcement time of the automatic answering
extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.
06
Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the ACI after which an
incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.
2 - 340
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
07
Item
Long Conversation Warning Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk before
the Long Conversation tone is heard.
08
Long Conversation Disconnect Time
This time determines how long the system waits before
disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such
as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
09
DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.
10
DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an External Page placed
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.
11
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
Sets up the time the system waits after receiving an
incoming VRS/DISA call before the system
automatically answers the call.
13
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program
25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this interval
before disconnecting.
14
Delayed VRS Answer Time
Assign the delay time from switching from a normal
incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the
call switches to DID mode immediately.
Input
Data
Default
Related
Program
0~64800
(sec)
3600
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
0~64800
(sec)
10
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
0~64800
(sec)
30
0~64800
(sec)
30
0~64800
(sec)
0
0~64800
(sec)
5
0~64800
(sec)
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 341
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each
user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password.
Input Data
DISA User Number
Item
No.
01
1~15
Password
Default
Related PRG
Dial
(Fixed – six digits)
0~9, , #
No Setting
49-10-11
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 342
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of
Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program
25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of
Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14.
When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service
mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Function
Class
Default
01
1~8
1~15
1
Conditions
DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 343
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group
route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk
Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in
Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1~15). The system
assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller
dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 344
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction
Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system
uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll
Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and
user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Toll Restriction
Class
Default
01
1~8
1~15
2
Conditions
Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2 - 345
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk
route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route
selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by
the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each
Night Service Mode.
Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06
to set trunk routes.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1~15
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
Conditions
You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 346
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers
must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS
messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Message Access Password
Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the
system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the
VRS messages.
Input Data
1~ 9, 0, , #
(Fixed six digits)
Default
No
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2 - 347
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 348
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the
system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Related
Programming
Input Data
Default
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
26-02
26-03
26-04
Enable or disable ARS.
0
1
Network Outgoing InterDigit ARS Time
0~64800 (sec)
30
20-03-04
0
= Route to Trunk
Group 1
= Play Warning
Tone to Dialer
0
21-02
ARS Service
26
With Networking, this time replaces 20-03-04
when determining if all network protocol digits
have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for 5 (500ms)
at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using
F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should
be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site
A.
03
ARS Misdialed Number Handling
If a user dials a number not programmed in
ARS, this option determines if the system
should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error
tone.
1
06
Class of Service Match Access
0
1
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
26-02
07
F-Route Access COS Reference
0
1
= F-Route
= ARS
0
26-02
44-05
Programming Manual
2 - 349
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 350
Program 26 : ARS Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables
for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) – The number routes to a trunk
group.
Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) – The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
1~400
Default
01
Dial
Dial Digits (16 digits maximum)
1~9, 0, , #, or for wild character (Press line key 1)
02
ARS Service
Type
0 = No Service (None)
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access
0
03
Additional Data /
Service Number
If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): Select Trunk Group Number
(0~100, 0= No Route)
0
Related
Programming
No
Setting
44-04
44-05
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02):
F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0~500
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-471.
F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0~500
(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule on page 2-470.
04
ARS Class of
Service
0~16
0
05
Dial Treatment
for ARS
0~15
0
06
--- Not Used ---
Programming Manual
2 - 351
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
07
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
Input Data
Network
Specified
Parameter Table
0~16
Default
Related
Programming
0
26-12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 352
Program 26 : ARS Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for
automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers
(Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:
3 – Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least 11 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
2 – Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
1 – Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call.
Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
INPA – Insert the NPA specified by NPA.
An – For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1~4). The numeric digit instructs the system
to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message
and also identifies which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information
element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks.
DNN – Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For
example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn
seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P
was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234.
Wnn – Wait nn seconds.
P – Pause in analog trunk.
R – Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
E – End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
X – When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system
to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911
feature.
Programming Manual
2 - 353
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number
1~15
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Treatment Code
24 characters maximum
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 354
Program 26 : ARS Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an
extension. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining
how to route extension calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Class
Default
01
1~8
0~16
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Manual
2 - 355
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for
Alternate carrier access, which is referred from Program 26-03.
Input Data
Transit Network ID Table
Item
No.
01
Item
Transit Network ID (Carrier ID)
1~4
Input Data
Default
0000~9999 (Fixed four digits)
No
setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 356
Program 26 : ARS Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the
Network Specific Parameter Table.
Input Data
Network Specific Parameter Table
Item
No.
01
Item
Type of Number Selection
This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
02
Numbering Plan Identification Selection
This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
1~16
Input Data
Default
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.
0
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard Plan
6 = Private Plan
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 357
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 358
Program 26 : ARS Service
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the
system DSS Consoles. The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS
Consoles. The available options are:
Regular (Business) Mode (0)
Program
30
Hotel Mode (1)
ACD Monitor Mode (2)
Business/ACD Mode (3)
Input Data
DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
01~32
DSS Operation Mode
0
1
2
3
= Business Mode
= Hotel Mode
= ACD Monitor
Mode
= Business/ACD
Mode
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2 - 359
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which
extensions have DSS Consoles connected.
Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension
can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per
system).
When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console
Number. There are 32 Console Numbers (1~32). Console Numbers can be assigned
to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally
made first.
Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
01~32
Item
Default
No Setting
Extension Number
The extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the
DSS console (up to eight digits).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 360
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key
assignments for 60-button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function
with up to four digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code).
To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an
extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be
cleared + 00 or 00 (If using WebPro or PC Programming, delete the key
assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without
clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp
display, although the DSS function works correctly.
If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is
connected, either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to
unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping.
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01~32
Index 2
Item
No.
Key Number
Function Number
01
001~114
0~99 (General Functional Level)
97 = Door Box Access key
(additional data: 1~8 Door Box No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance Functional
Level)
Programming Manual
Additional Data
Refer to Function Number
List on the following pages.
2 - 361
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
00
--- Not Used ---
01
DSS/One-Touch
02
Microphone Key (ON/OFF)
Red On: Mic On
Off: Mic Off
03
DND Key
Red On: DND
04
BGM (ON/OFF)
Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05
Headset
Red On: Under Headset Operation
06
Transfer Key
None
07
Conference Key
Red On: Under Conference Operation
08
Incoming Call Log
Rapid Blink (Red): New Call Log
Red On: Call Log
Off: No Call Log
09
Day/Night Mode Switch
10
Call Forward – Immediate
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
11
Call Forward – Busy
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
12
Call Forward – No Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
13
Call Forward – Busy/No
Answer
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
14
Call Forward – Both Ring
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
15
Follow Me
Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
18
Text Message Setup
Message Numbers (01~20)
Red On: Feature active by Function Key
19
External Group Paging
External Paging Number
(1~8)
Red On: Active
2 - 362
Extension Number or any
Numbers (up to 24 digits)
Mode Number (1~8)
Red On: Extension Busy
Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Red On: On mode
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Red On: Active
20
External All Call Paging
21
Internal Group Paging
22
Internal All Call Paging
None
23
Meet-Me Answer to Internal
Paging
None
24
Call Pickup
None
25
Call Pickup for Another
Group
None
26
Call Pickup for Specified
Group
Call Pickup Group Number
None
27
Speed Dial – System/
Private
Speed Dial Number
(Speed/Private)
None
28
Speed Dial – Group
Speed Dial Number (Group)
None
29
Repeat Redial
Rapid Blink (Red): Under a Repeat
Dial
30
Saved Number Redial
None
31
Memo Dial
None
32
Meet – Me Conference
None
33
Override (Off-Hook
Signaling)
None
34
Barge-In
None
35
Camp On
Red On: Under Camp-On or
Reservation
36
Department Step Call
None
37
DND/FWD Override Call
None
38
Message Waiting
None
Programming Manual
Internal Paging Number
(01~64)
Red On: Active
2 - 363
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
39
Room Monitoring
Rapid Blink (Red): Under Monitored
Slow Blink (Red): Under Monitoring
With Room Monitor there are two parties
in the monitor, one being monitored and
one who is monitoring. The same key is
used on both phones, but the COS says
if the key is set to be either a monitored
or monitoring party.
40
Handset Transmission
Cutoff
Red On: Transmission cut-off
41
Secretary Buzzer
Extension Number
Red On: Transmission Side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42
Boss – Secretary Call
Pickup
Extension Number
Red On: Boss – Secretary Mode
43
Series Call
None
44
Common Hold
None
45
Exclusive Hold
None
46
Department Group Log Out
Red On: Logged Out
47
--- Not Used ---
48
--- Not Used ---
49
Call Redirect
50
Account Code
51
General Purpose Relay
Relay No (0, 1~8)
Red On: Relay On
52
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Setup
Incoming Group Number
Red On: Under Setting
53
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Starting
Red On: Active
54
External Call Forward by
Door Box
Red On: Active
55
Extension Name Edit
None
56
General Purpose LED
Operation
2 - 364
Extension Number or Voice
Mail Number
None
None
001~100: (Red)
001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)
101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)
101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink
57
General Purpose LED
Indication
58
Department Incoming Call –
Immediate
Extension Group Number
(01~64)
59
Department Incoming Call –
Delay
Extension Group Number
( 01~64)
60
Department Incoming Call –
DND
Extension Group Number
( 01~64)
61
--- Not Used ---
63
Outgoing Call Without
Caller ID (ISDN)
64
--- Not Used ---
65
--- Not Used ---
66
CTI
67
--- Not Used ---
68
--- Not Used ---
69
--- Not Used ---
70
--- Not Used ---
71
--- Not Used ---
72
Keypad Facility Key
73
Keypad Hold Key
74
Keypad Retrieve Key
75
Keypad Conference Key
76
Toll Restriction in Credit
77
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Number
Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78
Conversation Recording
0 = Conversation recording
1 = Delete, Re-recording
2 = Delete
Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
79
Automated Attendant
(In-Skin)
Extension Number or Pilot
Number
Red On: Set Up for All Calls
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls
Programming Manual
Red On: Active
Red On: CTI active
2 - 365
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Function Number List (Continued)
[1] General functional level (00~99)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Red On: Active
80
Tandem Ringing
0 = Cancel
1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring
81
Automatic Transfer to
Transfer Key
Trunk Line Number
001~200
82
Dterm IP Call Log
83
Conversation Recording
Function
92
Wake Up Call Indication
Green On: Wake Up Call Indication
Mode On
Off: Wake Up Call Indication Mode Off
93
Room Status Indication
Green On: Active Room Status
Off: Room Status Indication Mode Off
94
Call Attendant
95
Page Switching
97
Door Box Access Key
99
Alternate Answer Key
0 = Pause
1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
Red On: DSS Page 1
Green On: DSS Page 2
Door Box number (1~8)
Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 - 99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
00
--- Not Used ---
01
Trunk Key
Trunk Number (001~200)
02
Trunk Group/Loop Key
Trunk Group Number
(001~100)
03
--- Not Used ---
2 - 366
LED Indication
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Function Number List (Continued)
[2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 - 99) (Service Code 752)
04
Park Key
Park Number (01~64)
05
--- Not Used ---
06
Trunk Access Via Networking
07
Station Park Hold None
08
--- Not Used ---
10
ACD Log-In/Log-Out
11
--- Not Used ---
12
ACD Emergency Call
Emergency Call
Red On: Under monitor, Override,
Standby
13
ACD Off Duty Mode
Red On: Under off-duty
Slow Blink (Red): Under
Reservation
14
ACD Start / End
Red On: ACD Operation End
15
ACD Monitor Mode
Red On: Under Monitor
16
ACD Standby Mode
Red On: Standby
17
ACD Wrap-Up Mode
Red On: Under work time
Slow Blink (Red): Under
Reservation
18
ACD Overflow Control
19
ACD Queue Status Display
Network System Number
(01~50)
Red On: Under Log-On
Off: Under Log-Off
ACD Group Number
Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable
Default
The DSS keys 01~60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101~160.
The DSS keys 61~114 of all DSS consoles = None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming Manual
2 - 367
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS
console station in case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS
console).
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01~32
Index 2
Item
No.
01
Item Name
DSS Console
Alternate Answer
Input Data
Default
Alternate DSS No. 01~32
0 = No Setting
Conditions
Related extension is assigned in PRG30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is
assigned at PRG30-03.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 368
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Lamp
Pattern
Data
Default
02
Busy Extension
0~7
7 (On)
03
DND Extension
0~7
3 (RW)
04
ACD Agent Busy
0~7
7 (On)
05
Out of Schedule (ACD DSS)
0~7
0 (Off)
06
ACD Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
07
ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
08
ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
0~7
6 (IW)
09
Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
7 (On)
10
Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
1 (FL)
11
Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
2 (WK)
12
Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
13
Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
14
Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
15
Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
6 (IW)
16
Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
17
Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
3 (RW)
18
Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
0~7
0 (Off)
19
Hotel Status Code
(Hotel DSS)
0~7
4 (IR)
20
Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
0~7
5 (IL)
21
VM Message Indication
0~7
3 (RW)
2 - 369
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-9 LED Patterns for DSS Console
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 370
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup to set the MAC address for a
particular IP DSS Console. This must be done before the console can be associated
to the attendant phone. The system supports up to 32 IP DSS Consoles.
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01~32
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Function Name
MAC Address
Input Data
00-00-00-00-00-00~FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Default
00-00-00-00-00-00
Conditions
This is a Read-Only command.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 371
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 372
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to
define the system options for Internal/External Paging.
The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits,
press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc.
For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the
lower case letter.
Program
31
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
1
Programming Manual
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
→ ←
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
%
&
’
(
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
α ε θ
2 - 373
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Key for Entering Names (Continued)
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
+ , - . /
£
#
:
;
<
=
>
?
B E σ S ∞ ¢
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Conf
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
All Call Paging Zone Name
Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone.
The name shows on the display of the telephone
making the announcement.
02
Page Announcement Duration
This timer sets the maximum length of Page
announcements.
(Affects External Paging only)
04
Privacy Release Time
Once the user initiates a Meet-Me Conference or
Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for
the Paged party to join the call.
Default
Related
Program
Up to 12
Characters
Group
All
11-12-19
31-02-02
0~64800
(sec)
1200
0~64800
(sec)
90
Input Data
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, External
Paging, Internal
2 - 374
Program 31 : Paging Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to
Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also
determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The
system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Internal Paging Group Number
Assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system
allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups. An
extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.
02
Internal All Call Paging Receiving
Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for
each extension. If allowed, extension can
place and receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If prevented, extensions
can only make (not receive) All Call
Internal Paging announcements. If
combined, Paging zones should be
restricted as well, change the internal page
zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.
Maximum 8 digits
Input Data
0~64
(0 = No Setting)
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0 for IP Station
1 for TDM Station
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, Internal
Programming Manual
2 - 375
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal
Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.
The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press
the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example,
to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to
12 digits.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
1
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
%
&
’
(
Enter characters:
+ , - .
/
:
;
<
¢ £
2 - 376
→ ←
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
=
>
?
α ε θ
B E σ S ∞
Program 31 : Paging Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to
12 digits.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
#
When you want to. . .
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Conf
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Internal Paging Group Name
Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page
Zones). The system shows the name you program on the
telephone display.
01~64
Input Data
Default
Up to 12 Characters
Refer to
default
table.
Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Programming Manual
Extension
Paging Group
Name
01
Group 1
02
Group 2
:
:
64
Group 64
2 - 377
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, Internal
2 - 378
Program 31 : Paging Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging
zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when
broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the zones on
the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. On the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, the
CD-CP00-US zone is number 9.
To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone
Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
Paging Group
Number
01
0~8 (0 = No Setting)
1~9
Default
Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 1 (Group 1)
Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9 (CD-CP00-US) = 1 (Group 1)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, External
Programming Manual
2 - 379
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal
Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a
separate entry for each External Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The CD-CP00-US zone is number 9. For UNA
ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
External Speaker Number
1~9
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
Input Data
0
1
= No Ringing (No)
= Ringing (Yes)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Night Service
Paging, External
2 - 380
Program 31 : Paging Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the
external speaker using an amplifier.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Broadcast Splash Tone Before
Paging (Paging Start Tone)
Use this option to enable or
disable splash tone before Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone before the External Paging
announcement.
02
Broadcast Splash Tone After
Paging (Paging End Time)
Use this option to enable or
disable splash tone after Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone at the end of an External
Paging announcement.
03
Speech Path
Determine if the external speaker
will be used for talkback (As this
option is not available with the
CD-CP00-US external page zone,
speaker 9 should be left at 1).
Programming Manual
1~9
Input Data
Default
0
1
2
= No Tone (None)
= Splash Tone
= Chime Tone
2
0
1
2
= No Tone (None)
= Splash Tone
= Chime Tone
2
0
1
= Both Way (Duplex)
= One Way (PGD(2)-U10 ADP J
SPK) (Simplex)
1
04
CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
05
CODEC Receive Gain Setup
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
2 - 381
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, External
2 - 382
Program 31 : Paging Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging
Group (0~8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0~64) for Combined Paging. When an
extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the
External and Internal Zone.
Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1~9) to an External Page
Group (1~8).
Input Data
External Paging Group Number
Item
No.
01
0~8 (0 = All External Paging)
Internal Paging Group Number
0~64 (0 = All Internal Paging)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Paging, External
Paging, Internal
Programming Manual
2 - 383
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option
for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over
the zone when it is idle.
When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The
CD-CP00-US zone is number 9.
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
BGM
1~9
Item
Use this option to allow or prevent
the External Paging zone you select
from broadcasting Background
Music when it is idle.
Input Data
0
1
= Disable
(No)
= Enable
(Yes)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Background Music
Paging, External
2 - 384
Program 31 : Paging Setup
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for
the Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via
WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
32
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Door Box Answer Time
A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes
during this time.
02
Door Lock Cancel Time
When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook
flashes or a multiline user presses the Recall key while
talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this time.
03
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect
Timer
Program
Input Data
Default
0~64800
(sec)
30
0~64800
(sec)
10
0~64800
(sec)
60
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the
caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and
the call is then disconnected.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Door Box
Programming Manual
2 - 385
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which
rings when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
1~8
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
Door Box Ring
Group Number
01
01~32
Extension
Number
Maximum
eight digits
Default
No
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Door Box
2 - 386
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain
level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are
defined in 80-01 : Service Tone Setup on page 2-583.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Item
No.
01
02
1~8
Item
Chime Pattern
CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
Input Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
None
Door Box Ring
Door Box Ring
Door Box Ring
Door Box Ring
Door Box Ring
Door Box Ring
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
Door Box 1 = 1
Door Box 2 = 2
Door Box 3 = 3
Door Box 4 = 4
Door Box 5 = 5
Door Box 6 = 6
Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1
1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB)
32
1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB)
32
(PGD(2)-U10 ADP to Door
Box)
03
CODEC Receive Gain Setup
(Door Box to PGD(2)-U10
ADP)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Door Box
Programming Manual
2 - 387
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
1~8
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Door Box Name
Up to 12 characters
Default
Door Box Name 1 = DOOR- 1
Door Box Name 2 = DOOR- 2
Door Box Name 3 = DOOR- 3
Door Box Name 4 = DOOR- 4
Door Box Name 5 = DOOR- 5
Door Box Name 6 = DOOR- 6
Door Box Name 7 = DOOR- 7
Door Box Name 8 = DOOR- 8
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Door Box
2 - 388
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each
software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port
can have only one function (input, output or none).
Input Data
ACI Port Number
Item
No.
01
0
1
2
33
01~96
ACI Type
= None
= MOH/BGM (Input)
= External Audio Port (Input/Output)
Program
Default
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming Manual
2 - 389
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to
Department Groups. An ACI port can be in only one group.
Also use this program to set the ACI port priority. When a call comes into the ACI
Department Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of its priority. A higher priority
port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6). There are 96 ACI
ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available.
Input Data
ACI Port Number
01~96
Item
No.
Group
Number
Priority
01
01~16
1~96
Default
ACI Port
Group
Priority
01
1
1
02
1
2
:
:
:
96
1
96
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 390
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings
for each E&M Tie line.
Program
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Input Data
001~200
Default
Description
1
Set the start signaling mode for
DID and Tie trunks. DID and
Tie trunks can use either
immediate start or wink start
signaling.
DID/E&M Start
Signaling
0
= 2nd Dial Tone
1
2
3
= Wink
= Immediate
= Delay
Receive Dial Type
0
1
2
= DP
= DTMF
= MF
1
for E&M Tie Line
E&M Dial-In Mode
0
= Specify Extension
Number
(Intercom)
= Use Conversion
Table (NTT)
0
Determine if the incoming Tie
Line call should be directed as
an intercom call or if it should
follow the DID Translation
Table in Program 22-11.
1
34
22-02
10-09
04
E&M Line Dial Tone
0
1
= Disable (No)
= Enable (Yes)
1
Enter 1 if the Tie Line should
send dial tone to the calling
system after the call is set up.
Enter 0 if the Tie Line should
not send dial tone.
05
System Toll
Restriction
0
1
= No (Off)
= Yes (On)
0
Determine if an incoming Tie
Line call should be subject to
Toll Restriction.
Programming Manual
Related
Program
22-11
21-05
2 - 391
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
2 - 392
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to
a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are
defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Class
Default
Related
Program
01
1~8
1~15
1
20-14
Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
Programming Manual
2 - 393
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk
group route 1~8 or 1~100) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set
Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route
Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line – for
each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Route Table
Number
01
1~8
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
2 - 394
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll
Restriction Class for each Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are
defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll
Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001~200
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Toll
Restriction
Class
Default
01
1~8
1~15
2
Related
Program
21-05
14-01-08
Conditions
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
Programming Manual
2 - 395
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix
for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line).
For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Outgoing Trunk
Group Number
1~100
0
1
001~100
Input Data
Default
= Enable (Y-Tandem)
= Disable (N-Tandem)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
2 - 396
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the
system should add or delete for Tie Lines.
Delete Digit
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the
remote side. This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.
If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could
delete all digits including the extension number.
Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the
digits for the location can be added to the received digits.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
Item
001~100
Input Data
01
Delete Digit
0~255 (255 = delete all digits)
02
Additional Dial Digits
Up to four digits (0~9, , #)
Default
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
Programming Manual
2 - 397
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate Start)
0~64800
3
02
First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start)
0~64800
0
03
First Digit Pause (LD Trunk)
0~64800
3
04
LD Trunk Guard Time
0~64800
0
05
Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M
0~64800
30
Conditions
If PRG 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the
station that performed the transfer when not answered.
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
2 - 398
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll
restriction data for E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll
Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.
Input Data
Class of Service
01~15
Item
No.
Table
No.
Dial Data
Default
Related
Program
01
01~20
Up to 10 Digits (0~9, , #)
No Setting
21-05-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Tie Lines
Programming Manual
2 - 399
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI//DNIS service
option setup for E&M Class of Service.
Input Data
Class of Service
Default
Item
No.
01
Name
Input Data
COS 2~15
Receive Format
Use this option to specify the format of the
ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. Make
sure your entry is compatible with the service
the telco provides. The character indicates a
delimiter.
If PRG34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), this
PRG works only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*.
02
01~15
Delimiter Dial Code
0
0 = Address
1 = ANI
2 = DNIS
3 = ANI Address
4 = ANI DNIS
5 = DNIS ANI
( = Delimiter Code)
1~9, 0, #,
Related
Program
34-01-02
34-09-02
34-09-01
This option defines the character Telco uses
as a delimiter (see entries 1~5 in Item 1
above). Valid entries are 0~9, #, and Q.
03
Route Setup of Receive Dial
This option specifies the source of the data
the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS
calls. If option 2 is selected, refer to Program
34-09-04.
2 - 400
0
= Fixed Route (Item
08) (No Routing)
1
= Routes on
Received DNIS or
Address Data
2
= Routes on
Received ANI
Data
0
22-09-01
22-11-01
34-09-04
34-09-08
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
04
Issue 1.0
Name
Input Data
COS 2~15
Related
Program
= SPD Table
(Program 13-03)
= DID Table
(Program 22-11)
0
13-04-01
13-04-03
22-09-01
22-11
34-09-05
34-09-06
= Display Off
= Display On
0
13-04
20-09-02
22-11-03
23-09-04
Start = 0, 100~1900
End = 0, 99~1999
Start = 0
End = 0
13-04
0
25-03
Route Table Setup of Target Dial
0
The option sets how the system uses the
route data (gathered in Item 3) to route
incoming ANI/DNIS calls.
1
If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be
routed using the DID table (1), up to 8 digits
can be matched. The number of expected
digits set in Program 22-09-01 must match the
ANI digits defined in Program 22-11-01. For
example, if an ANI/DNIS number received
was 2035551234 3001 and Program
22-09-01=4, the entry in 22-11-01 must be
1234 with the defined target extension.
If the call is to be routed using the ABB table
(0), up to 24 digits can be matched. Define the
range of the ABB table to be used in Program
34-09-06. The data is compared to the entries
in Program 13-04-01 and then routed
according to Program 13-04-03.
05
ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name
Use this option to set whether or not ANI data
should appear on telephone displays as part
of Caller ID display.
06
Routing SPD Table Setup
Use this option to define which part of the ABB
Table set up in Program 13-04 the system
uses for ANI/DNIS Caller ID look-ups and ANI/
DNIS routing.
0
1
This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1
(Caller ID on). When you specify a starting
and end address, the system uses the part of
the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting address and
length, the system uses that part of the table
for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number
data matches the Number entry in the table,
the system routes according to the associated
Name data. That data can be an extension,
Department Group pilot number, the voice
mail master number or a trunk ring group.
07
Routing on ANI/DNIS Error
This option lets you determine how the system
handles an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is
detected in the incoming data string.
Programming Manual
0 = Play Busy Tone to
Caller
1 = Route Caller to Ring
Group Specified in
Program 25-03
(Transfer)
2 - 401
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
08
09
Name
Input Data
COS 2~15
Routing When Destination Busy or No
Answer
0
= Play Busy or
Ringback Tone to
Caller (Busy/
NoAns)
= Route Caller to
Ring Group
Specified in
Program 25-04
(Transfer)
This option lets you determine how the system
handles an ANI/DNIS call if destination is busy
or does not answer.
1
Calling Number Address Length
1~8
Related
Program
0
25-04
7
34-09-01
When Item 1=0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is
the address), use this option to specify the
address length. The choices are from 1~ 8
digits.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tie Lines
2 - 402
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 34-10 : Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment to delete the
Information Digits received from the Network on Feature Group D Trunks.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group No.
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Digits for T1 ANI
001~100
Input Data
Default
Description
2
Assign the number of
information digits to
delete from the
element received
from the Network.
0~9
This option defines the number
of digits to delete from the
information element received
from Telco.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Ability)
Example:
Example of ANI information KP009727517645STKP7100ST.
00
Information digits
9727517645
ANI information
7100
DNIS Digits
Programming Manual
2 - 403
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 404
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording) options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number
Item
No.
01
Output Port Type
This option specifies the type of
connection used for SMDR. The baud rate
for the COM port should be set in Program
10-21-02 or 15-02-19.
02
Output Destination Number
Input Data
Header Language
Specify the language in which the SMDR
header should be printed.
04
Omit Digits
Default
0 = None
3 = LAN
4 = CTA/CTU
0
Up to 8 digits
No
Setting
This option specifies the SMDR printer
output extension (CTA/CTU extension
number).
03
35
1~8
Item
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
0
0~24 (0 = Not applied)
0
0~24 (0 = Not applied)
0
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
Program
The number of digits entered in this option
do not print on the SMDR report. For
example, if the entry is 10, the first 10
digits a user dials do not appear on the
SMDR report.
05
Minimum Digits
Outgoing calls must be at least this
number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR
report.
Programming Manual
2 - 405
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
06
Item
Input Data
Minimum Call Duration
Default
0~65535 (sec) (0 = All)
0
0~65535 (sec) (0 = All)
0
0 = NA Type (North
America)
1 = G/J Type (Overseas/
Japan)
0
The duration of the call must be at least
this time to be included on the SMDR
report.
07
Minimum Ring Time (For Incoming
Calls)
A call must ring for at least this time to be
included on the SMDR report.
08
Format Selection
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Station Message Detail Recording
2 - 406
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording) output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Toll Restricted Call
SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by
Toll Restriction.
02
PBX Calls
When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can
include all calls or just calls dialed using the
PBX trunk access code.
03
1~8
Trunk Number or Name
Select whether the system should display the
trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR
reports.
Input Data
Default
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Name
= Number
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
If this option is set to 1, Program
35-02-14 must be set to 0.
04
Summary (Daily)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report
provide a daily summary (at midnight every
night).
05
Summary (Weekly)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report
provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at
midnight).
06
Summary (Monthly)
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report
provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the
last day of the month).
Programming Manual
2 - 407
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
07
Item
Input Data
Toll Charge Cost
Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report
include toll charges.
08
Incoming Call
Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report
include incoming calls. If you disable this option
(0), incoming calls do not print.
09
Extension Number or Name
Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report
include extension numbers. Set this option (0)
to have the SMDR report include extension
names.
10
All Lines Busy (ALB) Output
Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication
should be displayed.
Default
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
1
0
1
= Name
= Number
1
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
0
11
Walking Toll Restriction Table Number
0
1
= Not Output
= Output
1
12
DID Table Name Output
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
0
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
0
0
1
= Not Displayed
= Displayed
0
0
1
= CLI (CLIP)
= DID Calling
Number
0
0
= Trunk Port
Name
= Received
Dialed Number
0
= ACC
= CNAME
0
Determine if the DID table name should be
displayed.
13
CLI Output When DID to Trunk
Determine if the CLI output should be displayed
for DID.
14
Date
Determine whether the date should be
displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk
name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.
15
CLI/DID Number Switching
Determine whether or not the CLI/DID Number
Switching should be displayed.
16
Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number
Determine how the SMDR should print
incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set
to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If
set to (0) trunk names are printed instead.
17
1
0
1
Print Account Code or Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Determine if SMDR should print Account Code
or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
2 - 408
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
18
Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call
Determine how SMDR should print Caller
Name of Incoming Call.
Input Data
0
1
= Normal
= Line Feed
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Manual
2 - 409
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the
SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where
the incoming SMDR information should be sent.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
1~100
Item
No.
SMDR Port No.
Default
01
1~8
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Station Message Detail Recording
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 410
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign
the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the
SMDR port where the outgoing SMDR information should be sent.
There are 64 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Department Group Number
01~64
Item
No.
SMDR Port No.
Default
01
1~8
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Manual
2 - 411
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an
extension Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program
20-06.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
01
01~15
Item
Account Code Mode
Use this option to select the Account
Code Mode (0~3).
Input Data
0
1
2
3
02
03
Forced Account Code Toll Call
Setup
0
Use this option enable Account
Codes for all calls or just toll calls (for
mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above).
1
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
0
Use this option to allow users to enter
Account Codes for incoming calls. If
disabled, any codes entered dial out
on the connected trunk.
04
Hiding Account Codes
Use this option to either hide or show
the Account codes on a telephone
display.
2 - 412
1
0
1
Default
= Account Codes Disabled (None)
= Account Codes optional
= Account Codes Required but not
verified (No verify)
= Account Codes Required and
Verified (Verify)
0
= Account Codes for toll and local
calls (All)
= Account Codes just for toll calls
(STD)
0
= Account Codes for incoming calls
disabled (No)
= Account Codes for incoming calls
enabled (Yes)
0
= Account Codes displayed
= Account Codes not displayed
0
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Account Codes
Programming Manual
2 - 413
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the
Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 2000 codes with 3~6 digits, using the
characters 0~9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234
means the user can enter 0234-9234.
Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin Number
Item
No.
01
1~2000
Verified Account Code
1~9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card)
(Up to 16 digits)
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 414
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to define the basic operation of
Voice Mail.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
05
--- Not Used ---
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
10
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
Default
Description
40
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual
2 - 415
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-02 : Mailbox Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 40-02 : Mailbox Setup to define the mailbox of the Voice Mail.
There are a maximum of 500 mailboxes. Use this program to set the box number and
password linked to the extension number (or pilot number) for each mailbox.
Input Data
Message Box Number
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
01~500
Default
Description
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 416
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-03 : Message Recording Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-03 : Message Recording Setup to define the auto-answering operation
of the Voice Mail.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual
2 - 417
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-04 : Live Recording Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-04 : Live Recording Setup to define the conversation recording
operation of the Voice Mail.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
Default
Description
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 418
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-05 : Call Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-05 : Call Information Setup to define the incoming notice of the Voice
Mail.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
04
--- Not Used ---
05
--- Not Used ---
06
--- Not Used ---
07
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual
2 - 419
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup to define the outside
lines to use the Automated Attendant recording operation of the Voice Mail.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
1~200
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
Item
01
--- Not Used ---
02
--- Not Used ---
03
--- Not Used ---
Input Data
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 420
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the
language to be used for the VRS prompts.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Voice Prompt Language Assignment
for VRS
Input Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
US English
Not Used
Not Used
French Canadian
Not Used
Mexican Spanish
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual
2 - 421
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes to select the
language to be used for the mailboxes.
Input Data
Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
Item
001~500
Input Data
Default
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 422
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup to define the broadcast
group of a Voice Mail mailbox.
Input Data
Multiple Address Group Number
Item
No.
01
Destination
Box Number
1~10
Box Number
Default
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming Manual
2 - 423
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level:
IN
Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for
the Voice Announcement feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to play the
fixed VRS messages (such as You have a message).
02
General Message Number
This item assigns the VRS message number to be
used as the General Message.
03
VRS No Answer Destination
This item assigns the transferred Ring Group when
the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with
Personal Greeting Message.
04
VRS No Answer Time
0
1
Input Data
Default
= Not Used
= Used
0
0~100
(0 = No General
Message Service)
0
0~100
(Incoming Ring
Group Number)
0
(No Setting)
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~101
(0 = No message)
(101 = Fixed
message )
0
If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all
VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the
extension waits this time for a VRS port to become
free.
05
Park and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend)
If a Park and Page is not picked up during this interval,
the Paging announcement repeats.
06
Set VRS Message for Private Call Refuse
(VRS Msg Private Call)
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be
used as Private Call Refuse.
When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Service finished. Disconnect the line, please.”
2 - 424
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
07
Item
Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse
(VRS Msg CID)
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be
used as Caller ID Refuse.
Input Data
Default
0~101(
0 = No message)
(101 = Fixed
message )
0
When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Service finished. Disconnect the line, please.”
08
Call Attendant Busy Message
0~100
(0 = No message)
0
09
Call Attendant No Answer Message
0~100
(0 = No message)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2 - 425
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message
number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension
user answers the incoming call, the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside
caller.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
1~200
VRS Message Number
0~100 (0 = No Service)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Response System (VRS)
2 - 426
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for ACD
Level:
IN
Description
In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the system options for
the ACD feature.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
No
Setting
01
System Supervisory
Extension
Up to eight digits (0~9, , #)
02
Login ID Code Digit
0~20
(0 = No Login ID)
0
03
ACD MIS Connection
Ports
0
3
= None
= LAN (CD-CP00-US)
0
04
ACD-MIS Command
Notification when a
BT Message is
returned
0
1
= Notifies
= No notification
0
41
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 427
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
Level:
SA
Description
In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, for each ACD extension
number, assign an ACD Group (1~64). An ACD Group number is assigned to each
Work Period number (1~8).
The assigned extension will work as an ACD agent extension in the following cases:
The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent
is logged in.
An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number.
An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD
pilot number.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item
No.
ACD Work Period Mode Number
ACD Group No.
Default
01
1~8
0~64
(0 = No setting)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 428
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group
Level:
SA
Description
In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group, for each
incoming trunk group set up in Program 22-05, designate which ACD Group (1~64)
the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to
assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-06 to
set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to
assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
1~100
ACD Work Period Mode Number
1~8
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
ACD Group Number
0~64 (0 = No setting)
0
02
Night Announcement Service
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
03
Priority Data
0, 1~7
(0 = No Priority)
(1 = Highest Priority)
(7 = Lowest Priority)
0
Determine whether an incoming call to a
trunk ring group should follow a priority
assignment.
0 = No Priority
1~7: 1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority
Programming Manual
2 - 429
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Ring Groups
2 - 430
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor
Level:
SA
Description
For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor to assign
the group supervisor extension and operating mode. Operating modes are:
0 = Supervisor extension does not receive ACD Group calls.
1 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group overflow calls only.
2 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other agents.
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a
supervisor for only one ACD Group.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01~64
Item
Input Data
01
Group Supervisor
Extension
Extension Number (Up to eight digits)
02
Operation Type
0
1
2
Default
No
Setting
0
= Do not receive any ACD incoming calls (No)
= Receive ACD incoming calls in case of
overflow (Busy)
= Receive ACD incoming calls all the time (Yes)
Conditions
If you assign an extension as a ACD Group Supervisor in this program, you
cannot program the same extension as a System Supervisor in
Program 41-01-01.
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 431
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for
ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start
and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules in
this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same
program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)
ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions receive the
following calls when they are logged in.
ACD Call on a Trunk
When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Program 41-03 and
41-06).
ACD Pilot Number Call
Any time – if ACD extensions are available.
Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern
1~4
Item
No.
Work Period
Mode Number
Start Time
End Time
Default
01
1~8
0000~2359
0000~2359
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 432
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks.
For each Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the
eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week
in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work
Schedules.)
Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number
1~4
Item
No.
Work Period
Mode Number
Start Time
End Time
Default
01
1~8
0000~2359
0000~2359
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 433
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules
(1~4) to days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both
the ACD Agent Work Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules
(Program 41-06).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Day Number
Time Pattern
Default
1
= Sunday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
2
= Monday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
3
= Tuesday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
4
= Wednesday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
5
= Thursday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
6
= Friday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
7
= Saturday
0~4 (0 = No ACD)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 434
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options
Level:
SA
Description
For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the
overflow mode (0~9), destination and announcement message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls. Each ACD
Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry options.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
01~64
Item
Overflow
Operation Mode
Input Data
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
4
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
=
No Overflow (None)
Overflow with No Announcement
No Overflow with First Announcement Only
No Overflow with First & Second
Announcements
Overflow with First Announcement Only
Overflow with First & Second Announcement
--- Not Used ----- Not Used --No Overflow with Second Announcement Only
Overflow with Second Announcement Only
Default
0
02
ACD Overflow
Destination
0 = No Setting
1~64 = ACD Group
65 = Overflow Table (Program 41-09)
66 = Voice Mail Integration
67 = System Speed (Program 41-08-05)
68 = Incoming Ring Group (Program 41-08-06)
0
03
Delay
Announcement
Source Type
0
1
2
0
04
ACD Overflow
Transfer Time
0~64800 (sec)
05
System Speed Dial
Bin
0~1999 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 67)
Programming Manual
= ACI
= VRS
= InMail
30
1999
2 - 435
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
06
Item
Incoming Ring
Group when
Overflow
Input Data
Default
1~100 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 68)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 436
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to
which a call is transferred when overflow occurs.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
Priority Order
Number
01
1~7
01~64
Transfer ACD Group Number With Overflow
0~65 (0 = No Setting)
65 = In-Skin Voice Mail Integration
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 437
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement to define the ACI port number to be
used for the delay announcement.
This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are
assigned as ACI in Program 41-08-03.
Input Data
ACD Group No
Item
No.
01~64
Item
Input Data
Default
01
1st Delay Announcement ACI Port Number
0~96
0 = No Setting
0
02
2nd Delay Announcement ACI Port Number
0~96
0 = No Setting
0
03
1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer
0~64800 (sec)
4
0~64800 (sec)
60
0~64800 (sec)
0
Set the time before the 1st Delay Announcement is played.
04
2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer
Set the time the 1st Delay Announcement plays before the 2nd
Delay Announcement starts to play.
05
2nd Delay Announcement Sending Duration
Set the timer for how long the 2nd Delay Announcement plays.
After this timer expires, the call disconnects. To keep the call in
queue, set this timer to 0.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 438
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to
be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages.
Refer to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options.
This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are
assigned as VRS in Program 41-08-03.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
01~64
Item
Input Data
Default
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0
Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay
Message.
1st Delay Message Sending Count
0~255
0
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0
Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay
Message.
2nd Waiting Message Sending Count
0~255
0
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0
Input what is heard between the Delay messages.
ACD Forced Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay
Message
0~64800 (sec)
(0 = No Disconnect)
60
Delay Message Start Timer
Input the time before the 1st Delay Message Starts.
02
03
1st Delay Message Number
Input the number of times the 1st Delay Message is sent.
If set to 0, the message is not played.
04
05
2nd Delay Message Number
Input the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is
sent. If set to 0, the message is not played.
06
07
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message is played,
before the call is disconnected.
Programming Manual
2 - 439
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
08
Item
Queue Depth Announcement
Input when the Queue Depth Announcement will be
played.
Input Data
Default
0 = Disable
1 = After 1st (1st)
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 440
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce
voice resource and sending time for each ACD group. Night announcement
availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night announcement
function is not available for ACD pilot number calls.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
Item
No.
01~64
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Night Announcement Source Type
0
1
= ACI
= VRS
0
02
Night Announcement ACI Port Number
0
Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0.
0~96
0 = No Setting
ACD Night Announce Sending Time
0~64800 (sec)
30
03
Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0.
Conditions
The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 441
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define
the VRS message number to be used as the night announcement. This program is
activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program
41-12-01.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Message Number
Input the VRS Message to be
used for the Night
Announcement.
02
01~64
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Input what is heard between the
Night Announcements.
Input Data
Default
0~100
0 = No Message
0
0
1
2
0
= Ring Back Tone
= MOH Tone
= BGM Source
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 442
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-14 : ACD Options Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups.
When you set an option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all
agents in the group. The chart below shows each of the ACD options, the entries
available, and the default entry.
Input Data
ACD Group No
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
0
= After wrap up the mode key is
pressed. (Manual)
= After call is finished
automatically. (Auto)
0
0
1
= Own group priority
= Priority order by Program
41-03-03
0
0
1
= Off
= On
0
0
1
= Enable (Yes)
= Disable (No)
0
1
Automatic Wrap Up Mode
0
Enable/disable Automatic Wrap Up
mode.
1
ACD Priority for Overflow Calls
Automatic Answer at Headset
Call Queuing after 2nd
Announcement
Default
= Call to system supervisory
extension when group
supervisory extension is busy.
= No calls to system supervisory
extension when group
supervisory extension is busy.
0
The supervisor must be logged in and
have an Emergency Key programmed
for this feature. By pressing the key
once, the supervisor monitors the call –
pressing twice barges in on the call.
Enable/disable Automatic Answer for
agents using headsets.
06
Input Data
Emergency Call Operation Mode
Determine whether the ACD group
should use its own priority assignment
or if it should follow the priority assigned
in Program 41-03-03.
04
01~64
Use this option to determine whether
the caller should hear the 2nd Delay
Announcement and then taken out of
queue (1), or place back into queue (0).
Programming Manual
2 - 443
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
07
Item
Automatic Off Duty for SLT
Enable/disable Automatic Off Duty
(rest) mode for agents with SLT.
08
ACD Off Duty Mode
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to
receive internal calls when in Off Duty
Mode.
09
Automatic Wrap Up End Time
Input Data
Default
0
1
= No change to Off Duty mode
= Change to Off Duty mode
automatically (Skip)
0
0
1
= Cannot receive internal call
= Can receive internal call
0
0~64800 (sec)
0
0~64800 (sec)
10
0
Input the time the agent will be in Wrap
mode when Wrap key is pressed, or
automatically put into Wrap mode.
10
ACD No Answer Skip Time
Set how long a call to the ACD Group
rings an idle extension before routing to
the next agent.
12
Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for
SLT)
0~64800 (sec)
13
1st Data – ACD Queue 1-Digit
Assignment
1st Data –
Up to one Digit (0, 1~9, #, )
2nd Data – Destination Number Type
2nd Data –
0 = None
1 = Extension or Voice Mail
2 = Incoming Ring Group
3 = Speed Dial Areas
4 = ACD Group
3rd Data – Destination Number
3rd Data –
Up to eight digits (0, 1~9, #, )
DTMF Detection Assignment during
Delay Announcement
0 = Does not detect during message
1 = Detect during message
1
0~64800 (sec)
0
14
Blank
0
Blank
Is the DTMF Detection for Dial Out
during (1) or after (0) the message is
played.
15
DTMF Detect Time after Delay
Announcement Message
How long is the DTMF Detection after
the Delay Announcement Message.
2 - 444
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 445
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for
Audible Indication for Log Out/Off Duty mode for each ACD group.
These program settings provide an alarm to the agents, but no Queue Status Display
is indicated. Do not use these programs if the alarm options are defined in Program
41-20-01 through 41-20-05.
Feature
Available in Program 41-15
Available in Program 41-20
Queue Status Display
---
Yes
Queue Status Display
Time
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Alarm
Alarm Send Time
Interval Time of Queue
Status Display
Class of Service
Timing of Alarm and
Display Queue Status
Yes
Program 41-15-02 determines the
length/interval of the alarm.
Yes
---
Yes
Alarm triggered after the number
of calls in Program 41-15-01 is
exceeded.
Alarm triggered after the number of
calls in Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded. Then follows Program
41-20-03 time for displaying status.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
01~64
Item
No.
Item
01
Number of Calls in ACD Queue to Activate
Alarm Information
0~200
(0 = No Alarm)
0
02
Interval Time of Alarm Information
0~64800 (sec)
0
Input Data
Default
Input the alarm sound time.
2 - 446
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 447
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD
threshold call overflow and the mode for each ACD group.
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
Item
Number of Calls in Queue
Define the maximum number of
calls allowed in the ACD queue
before overflow occurs.
02
01~64
Operation Mode for ACD Queue
Define how the system should
handle calls when the number of
calls in queue exceeds the
threshold.
Input Data
Default
0~200
(0 = No Limitation)
0
0
0
1
2
= The last waiting call is
transferred
= The longest waiting call is
transferred
= Send Busy Tone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 448
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup to define the ACD login mode for each
extension. If the AIC Login Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC Logout
service codes for the AIC members in Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Item
No.
01
Login Mode
0
1
= Normal Login Mode
= AIC Login Mode
Default
0
Conditions
If set to 1, note that a supervisor cannot log in/out an AIC member as they are not
normal ACD agents.
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 449
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup to define the ACD Agent Identity
Code Table.
Input Data
AIC Table No.
Item
No.
2 - 450
001~512
Item
Input Data
Default
No Setting
01
ACD Agent Identity Code
Up to four digits
02
Default ACD Group Number
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
03
ACD Group Number in Mode 1
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
04
ACD Group Number in Mode 2
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
05
ACD Group Number in Mode 3
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
06
ACD Group Number in Mode 4
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
07
ACD Group Number in Mode 5
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
08
ACD Group Number in Mode 6
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
09
ACD Group Number in Mode 7
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
10
ACD Group Number in Mode 8
0~64
0 = No Setting
0
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 451
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail
Master Mailboxes (PRG 47-03) as ACD Delay “Announcement” Mailboxes.
Input Data
ACD Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delay Message Start Timer
1 ~ 64
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 (sec)
Default
0
Determines how long the system waits before playing the
Delay Message.
02
Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message
Assigns the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailbox as
the message source for the 1st Announcement Message.
03
1st Delay Message Sending Count
Determines the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
04
Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message
Assigns the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as
the message source for the 2nd Announcement Message.
05
2nd Delay Message Sending Count
Determines the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
Dial
(up to eight digits)
No Setting
0 = No message is
played.
1 ~ 255
0
Dial
(up to eight digits)
No Setting
0 = No message is
played.
0
1 ~ 255
06
Wait Tone Type at Message Interval
Determines what the caller hears between the messages.
07
ACD Forced Disconnect Time after 2nd
Announcement
0 = Ring Back
Tone
1 = Music On Hold
Tone
2 = Background
Music Source
0
0 ~ 64800 (sec)
0
Assigns how long the system should wait after the end of
the ACD Delay Message before disconnecting.
2 - 452
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
08
Item
Delay Message Interval Time
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 (sec)
Default
20
Sets the timer for the interval between the Delay
Messages.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 453
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD
Queue Status Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, and
causes an alarm to sound, when the parameters in this program are met.
Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents. The options in Program
41-20 should not be used if 41-15 is set.
Available in
Program 41-15
Available in
Program 41-20
Queue Status Display
---
Yes
Queue Status Display
Time
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Feature
Alarm
Alarm Send Time
Interval Time of Queue
Status Display
Class of Service
Timing of Alarm and
Display Queue Status
2 - 454
Program 41-15-02 determines the
length/interval of the alarm.
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Alarm triggered after the number of
calls in Program 41-15-01 is
exceeded.
Alarm triggered after the number
of calls in Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded. Then follows Program
41-20-03 time for displaying
status.
Program 41 : ACD Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
ACD Group No.
Item
No.
01
01~64
Item
Number of Calls in Queue
Input Data
0
Set the number of calls that can accumulate in the
ACD queue before the Queue Status Display (and
optional queue alarm) occurs.
02
Queue Status Display Time
= No Display,
1~200
Default
0
0~64800 (sec)
5 (sec)
0~64800 (sec)
60 (sec)
Set how long the Queue Status display remains on
the telephone display.
03
Queue Status Display Interval
Set the interval that refreshes the Queue Status
Alarm time in queue display and causes the optional
queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call,
logged out, or in wrap-up.
04
05
Enable or disable the queue alarm.
0
1
ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time
0~64800 (sec)
ACD Call Waiting Alarm
= Disable (Off)
= Enable (On)
0
0
Set how long the Call Waiting Alarm should sound.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Programming Manual
2 - 455
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 456
Program 41 : ACD Setup
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system
options for Hotel/Motel Service.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Answering Message Mode for Wake
Up Call (Hotel Mode)
0
1
2
02
Wake Up Call Message Assignment
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
0
VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You
will need to make an entry for this
program if you have selected 1 or 2 in
Item 1 above.
Input Data
= MOH (Hold Time)
= VRS Message
= VRS Message + Time
Default
0
03
Wake Up Call No Answer
0
1
= No Transfer
= Transfer to the
Operator
0
04
Setup Message Mode for Wake Up
Call (Hotel Mode)
0
1
2
= Fixed Message
= VRS Message
= Time Information and
VRS
0
05
Wake Up Call Message Assignment
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
42
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2 - 457
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of
the Hotel/Motel extensions.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Hotel Mode
If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/
Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone
to operate in the business mode, enter 0.
02
Toll Restriction Class When Check In
Input Data
Default
0 = Normal
1 = Hotel
0
1~15
1
Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class
when it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll
Restriction Classes (1~15). The entry you
make in this option affects the telephone in all
Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05
and 21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing
options.) When the extension is checked out, it
uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program
21-04.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
2 - 458
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel
Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For
additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06 ~ 20-14.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
01~15
Default
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input
Data
Class
01
Class
02~15
01
Check-In Operation
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
02
Check-Out Operation
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
03
Room Status Output
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
04
DND Setting for Other Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
05
Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
06
Room Status Change for Other Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
07
Restriction Class Changing for Other
Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
08
Room to Room Call Restriction
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
09
DND Setting for Own Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
2 - 459
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default
Item
No.
Item
Input
Data
Class
01
Class
02~15
10
Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11
Change Room Status for Own Extension
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
12
SLT Room Monitor
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line
telephone ability to use Room Monitor.
13
PMS Restriction Level
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Class of Service
Hotel/Motel
2 - 460
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel
Mode one-digit service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department
Calling Group (1~64), you enter the destination for each single digit code (1~9, 0, ,
#). The destination can be any code with up to four digits, such as an extension
number or access code.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
01~64
Item
No.
Received
Dial
Destination
Number
Default
01
1~9,0, ,#
Up to eight digits
No Setting
Conditions
The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time
expires before executing.
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2 - 461
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the CTA port to output the
Hotel Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/
Motel feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Output Port Type
0
1
3
02
Output Destination Number
Up to eight digits
(Extension number which CTA/CTU is
equipped)
03
Wake Up Call No Answer
Data
0
1
= Not Output
= Output
0
04
Check-Out Sheet
0
1
= Not Output
= Output
0
0
= No Setting
= CTA
= LAN
No
Setting
Conditions
Room Status Reports output via a CTA or CTU adapter require a DTH terminal
and a compatible external device.
Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port , or when using DTH terminals,
a CTA or CTU adapter and a compatible external device.
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
2 - 462
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-06 : PMS Service Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when
using PMS-U10 and PMS feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
5129
01
PMS Port Number
0~65535
02
3:00 AM Auto Room Scan
0 = Off
1 = On
0
At 3:00 AM sets ‘maid required’
status for all checked-in rooms.
03
CheckIn Message Type
0 = Off
1 = On
0
04
CheckOut Auto Status Change
0 = Off
1 = On
0
05
AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send
Timing
1~128 (sec)
10
06
AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send
Count
0~20 (times)
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2 - 463
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the
default Toll Restriction class on check in for a room (PRG 42-02-02).
Input Data
Restriction Level
Item
No.
01
Item
PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
0~3
Input Data
1~15
Default
Level 0 = 10
Level 1 = 11
Level 2 = 12
Level 3 = 13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Hotel/Motel
2 - 464
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system
options for the ARS/F-Route feature.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
ARS/F-Route Time Schedule
If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is
determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to
the day or time of the call.
Input Data
Default
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
0
44
If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to Program
44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that
program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in Program
44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Uniform Numbering Network
Programming Manual
2 - 465
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Dial
Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the
system for ARS routing.
02
1~120
Service Type
Service Type 1 (Extension Number)
The number goes to an extension after
deleting the front digit(s).
Additional Data
Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the
number for extension number usage. At least
one digit must be deleted.
Input Data
Up to eight digits
(Use line key 1 for a Don’t
Care digit, @)
0
1
2
3
= No setting (None)
= Extension Call (Own)
= ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)
= Dial Extension Analyze
Table (Option)
Default
No
Setting
0
Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route
table.
Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not
used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number
for Program 44-05.
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used,
assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for
Program 44-04.
Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze
Table)
The total length of the number exceeds more
than 8 digits.
Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table
number to be used in Program 44-03.
2 - 466
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Additional Data
1
For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter
the additional data required.
2
1: Delete Digit = 0~255
(255 = Delete All Digits)
3
2: [Program 44-01 : 0]
ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]
Default
= Delete Digit = 0~255
(255 : Delete All Digits)
= 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
= Dial Extension Analyze
Table Number = 0~4
(0 = No Setting)
0
= Off
= On
0
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.
3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number =
0~4 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.
04
Dial Tone Simulation
If enabled, this option sends dial tone to the calling
party after the routing is determined. This may be
required if the central office at the destination does
not send dial tone.
0
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 467
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level:
IN
Description
When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis
Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when
the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits. If the received digits do not match
the digits set in tables 1~250, table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension
Table Area (1~4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in tables
1~250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.
Input Data
Extension Table Area Number
1~4
Dial Analysis Table Number
1~252
Dial Analysis Table Number : 1~250
Item
No.
2 - 468
Item
Input Data
01
Dial
Up to 24 digits
Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)
02
ARS/F-Route Select
Table Number
0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
Default
No Setting
0
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Dial Analysis Table Number : 251
Item
No.
Item
03
ARS/F-Route Select
Table Number
Input Data
0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
Default
0
Dial Analysis Table Number : 252
Item
No.
04
Item
Next Table Area Number
Input Data
0~4
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 469
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/
F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route
time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number
1~500
Item
No.
ARS/F-Route
Time Mode
ARS/F-Route
Table Number
Default
01
1~8
0~500
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2 - 470
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four
kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is
used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number
1~500
Priority Number
1~4
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Group Number
Select the trunk group number to be used for the
outgoing ARS call.
02
Delete Digits
Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the
dialed number.
03
Additional Dial Number Table
Input Data
Default
0~100, 255
0 = No Setting
255 = Extension Call
0
0~255
(255 = Delete All)
0
0~1000
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0~500
0 = No Setting
0
0~500
0 = No Setting
0
0~16
0
Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06)
for additional digits to be dialed.
04
Beep Tone
Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower
priority trunk group is used to dial out.
05
Gain Table Number for Internal Calls
Select the gain table number to be used for the
internal call (defined in Program 44-07).
06
Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections
Select the gain table number to be used for the
tandem call (defined in Program 44-07).
07
ARS Class of Service
Select the ARS Class of Service to be used for the
table. An extension ARS COS is determined in
Program 26-04-01.
Programming Manual
2 - 471
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
08
Item
Dial Treatment
Input Data
Default
0~15
0
0~24
0
0~16367
0
0~16
0
Select the Dial Treatment to be used for the table. If
a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02
and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment
defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead.
09
Maximum Digit
Input the maximum number of digits to send when
using the F-Route.
10
CCIS over IP Destination Point Code
Input the Destination Point Code to send when using
this F-Route.
11
Network Specified Parameter Table
Enter a table number from Program 26-12.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2 - 472
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to
the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in
Program 44-05-03.
Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number
Item
No.
01
1~1000
Additional Dial
Up to 24 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause)
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 473
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If
an extension dials ARS/F-Route number:
The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive
settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:
The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive
settings for incoming line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for
the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Program 14-01-02 and
14-01-03 are not activated.
Input Data
Gain Table Number
Item
No.
2 - 474
Item
1~500
Input Data
Default
01
Incoming Transmit
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
02
Incoming Receive
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
03
Outgoing Transmit
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
04
Outgoing Receive
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
32
(0dB)
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 475
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the
ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in
Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.
Input Data
Schedule Pattern Number
01~10
Item
No.
Time
Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
01~20
0000~2359
0000~2359
1~8
Default
All Schedule Patterns : 0:00 – 0:00, Mode 1
Example:
Pattern 1
0:00
8:00
18:00
22:00
Mode 3
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Time Number 01 : 00:00 – 08:00
Time Number 02 : 08:00 – 18:00
Time Number 03 : 18:00 – 22:00
Time Number 04 : 22:00 – 00:00
0:00
Mode 3
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Pattern 2
0:00
0:00
Mode 2
Time Number 01 : 0:00 – 0:00 Mode 2
2 - 476
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 477
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for
using ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Day Number
Schedule
Pattern Number
Default
1
= Sunday
1~10
Pattern 1
2
= Monday
1~10
Pattern 1
3
= Tuesday
1~10
Pattern 1
4
= Wednesday
1~10
Pattern 1
5
= Thursday
1~10
Pattern 1
6
= Friday
1~10
Pattern 1
7
= Saturday
1~10
Pattern 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2 - 478
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for
ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national
holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
Input Data
Item
No.
Date
01
0101~1231
Schedule Pattern Number
0~10 (0 = No Setting)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Programming Manual
2 - 479
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 480
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice
mail integration options.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Voice Mail Department Group Number
Assign which Extension (Department) Group
number is to be assigned as the voice mail
group.
02
Voice Mail Master Name
Input Data
0~64
0 = No Voice Mail
Up to 12 Characters
Enter the Voice Mail Master Name.
04
Park and Page
Enable/disable the system ability to process the
Voice Mail Park and Page ( ) commands. You
should normally enable this option.
05
Message Wait
Enable/disable the system ability to process the
Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You
should normally enable this option. If enabled,
be sure that the programmed Message
Notification strings don’t contain the code for
trunk access.
06
Record Alert Tone Interval Time
Default
0
45
VOICE
MAIL
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0~64800 (sec)
30
Dial (up to eight
digits)
No Setting
This time sets the interval between Voice Mail
Conversation Record alerts
07
Centralized Voice Mail Pilot Number
This number is the same as the extension
number or pilot number.
Programming Manual
2 - 481
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
08
Item
Centralized Voice Mail Department Group
Number
Input Data
0~64
Default
0
Assigns which Extension (Department) Group
Number is to be assigned as the Centralized
Voice Mail group.
09
Centralized Voice Mail Master Name
Up to 12 characters
“C.V.M.”
Assigns the Centralized Voice Mail Master
Name.
10
New NSL Protocol support
0 = Off
1 = On
0
11
Prefix for Call Screening
Dial (One digit)
1
12
Prefix for Park and Page
Dial (One digit)
13
Prefix for Message Wait
Dial (One digit)
#
14
CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number
Dial (up to eight
digits)
No Setting
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice
Mail over CCIS Link. This is assigned only in
the remote switches.
15
Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection
Assigns whether fixed codes are used or the
codes used in PRG 45-04 are used for analog
voice mail protocol.
16
Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment
0: Fixed
1: Program
Up to four digits
0
None
Assign up to four digits in front of the station
number sent to the SLT port when a call is
forwarded.
17
Reply Mailbox Number
Whether or not to include the mailbox number
in the analog voice mail protocol.
18
Trunk Number Mapping
0: No
1: Yes
1
2~3
2
Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 482
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Send DTMF tone or 6KD
message
0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port
1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port
1
03
Send 51A Message
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 483
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Remote Logon (Internal)
Up to four digits
None
02
Direct Logon
Up to four digits
None
03
Transfer Message
Up to four digits
None
04
Forward-All
Up to four digits
None
05
Forward-Busy
Up to four digits
None
06
Forward RNA
Up to four digits
None
07
Remote Logon
Up to four digits
None
08
Conversation Recording
Up to four digits
None
09
Clear Down String
Up to four digits
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 484
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
to send trunk number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail
when PRG 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program".
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Remote Log-On Internal
0:Off
1:On
0
02
Direct Log-On
0:Off
1:On
0
03
Transfer Message/QVM
0:Off
1:On
0
04
Forward-All
0:Off
1:On
0
05
Forward-Busy
0:Off
1:On
0
06
Forward RNA
0:Off
1:On
0
07
Remote Log-On
0:Off
1:On
0
08
Conversation Recording
0:Off
1:On
0
09
Clear Down String
0:Off
1:On
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 485
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 486
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options to set up the VM8000
InMail system-wide options.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
VM8000 InMail Master Name
(MasterName)
The CD-CP00-US must be reset
for a change to this program to
take effect.
Use this option to modify the
name for all UNIVERGE SV8100
VM8000 InMail ports. The
system briefly displays this name
when a display multiline terminal
user calls a Voice Mail port
(either by pressing Message,
their voice mail key, or by dialing
the master number). You should
always end the name with the ##
characters. The system
substitutes the port number for
the last #. Using the default
name InMail ##, for example,
the telephone display shows
VM8000 InMail #1 when calling
port 1.
Programming Manual
Input Data
Up to 12 characters
Default
InMail ##
47
(The system
substitutes the port
number for the #
when calling the
port).
2 - 487
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
03
Item
Subscriber Message Length
Input Data
Default
1~4095 (sec)
120
1~4095 (sec)
120
(Subs Msg Length)
Use this option to set the
maximum length of recorded
messages for:
Subscriber Mailbox users
dialing RS to record and
send a message.
Extension users leaving a
message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.
Outside Automated
Attendant callers accessing
a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing
RS to record and send a
message.
Subscriber Mailbox
Greetings.
Announcement Messages.
Call Routing Mailbox
Instruction Menus.
The length of a
Conversation Record is 10
times the Subscriber
Message Length. Since the
Conversation Record time
cannot exceed 4095
seconds, any setting in
Subscriber Message
Length larger than 409
has no effect on the length
of recorded conversations.
04
Non-Subscriber Message
Length
(Mbox Msg Length)
Use this option to set the
maximum length of recorded
messages for:
Automated Attendant callers
leaving a message or Quick
Message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.
Outside callers transferred
by an extension user to a
Subscriber Mailbox.
2 - 488
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
05
Item
Message Backup/Go Ahead
Time
Input Data
Default
5
1~60 (sec)
(Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Use this option to set the backup/
go ahead interval. This time sets
how far VM8000 InMail backs up
when a user dials B while
listening to a message. This
interval also sets how far
VM8000 InMail jumps ahead
when a user dials G while
listening to a message.
07
Digital Pager Callback Number
(Pager CBack)
Use this option to set the Digital
Pager Callback Number portion
of the Message Notification
callout number for a digital pager.
This is the portion of the callout
number that is appended to the
pager service telephone number.
Normally, this option should be
X M#, where:
X is the number of the
extension that generated the
notification.
is a visual delimiter (to
make the pager display
easier to read).
M is the number of new
messages in the extension
mailbox.
# is the digit normally used
by the pager service for
positive disconnect.
Programming Manual
Digits
(12 maximum, using 0~9,
# and )
X M#
M (Number of
messages –
entered by pressing
LK1)
X (Extension
number – entered
by pressing LK2)
VM8000 InMail
automatically
replaces the X
command with the
number of the
extension that
initially received the
message.
2 - 489
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
08
Item
Delay in Dialing Digital Pager
Callback Number
Input Data
0~99 (sec)
Default
9
(Pager Dial Delay)
Use this option to set the delay
(0~99 seconds) that occurs just
before VM8000 InMail dials the
Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a
digital pager. Set this delay so
the pager service has enough
time to connect to the digital
pager before sending the
callback number. Your pager
service may be able to help you
determine the best value for this
option (0~99 seconds). By
default, this option is 9 seconds.
When placing a digital pager
notification, the system:
Seizes the trunk specified.
Dials the user-entered
notification number (in Message
+ OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in
Dialing Digital Pager Callback
Number interval.
Dials the number entered in
47-01-07: Digital Pager
Callback Number.
The system assumes that the
notification number completes
dialing approximately 4 seconds
after trunk seizure. This means
that, by default, the Digital Pager
Callback Number is dialed into
the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.
2 - 490
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
09
Item
Wait Between Digital Pager
Callout Attempts
Input Data
Default
1~255 (min)
15
1~255 (min)
20
1~255 (min)
15
(Notify Pager Intvl)
Use this option to set the
minimum time (1~255 minutes)
between unacknowledged or
unanswered digital pager
Message Notification callouts. (A
subscriber acknowledges a
digital pager notification by
logging onto their mailbox.) After
this interval expires, VM8000
InMail tries the callout again (for
up to the number of times set in
47-01-14: Number of Callout
Attempts).
If the system dials the callout
number and the pager service is
busy, it retries the number in one
minute.
10
Wait Between Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
(Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Use this option to set the
minimum time (1~255 minutes)
between non-pager Message
Notification callouts in which the
destination answers, says Hello,
dials 1 to acknowledge and then
enters the wrong security code.
11
Wait Between Busy Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
(Notify Busy Intvl)
Use this option to set how long
VM8000 InMail waits (1~255
minutes) after it dials a busy nonpager callout destination, before
retrying the callout number.
Programming Manual
2 - 491
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
12
Wait Between RNA Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
Input Data
Default
1~255 (min)
30
1~99 (rings)
5
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Use this option to set how long
VM8000 InMail waits (1~255
minutes), after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout
destination, before retrying the
callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered
non-pager callouts:
If the callout rings the
destination longer than the
47-01-13: Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts
option.
If the destination answers,
says Hello (or the system
detects answer supervision)
and then hangs up without
dialing 1 to log onto their
mailbox. This typically
happens if someone
unfamiliar with notification
answers the callout, or if the
callout is picked up by an
answering machine.
If the destination answers
and then hangs up without
saying Hello. This typically
happens if someone
unfamiliar with the
notification answers the
callout (like the above
example), or if the call is
picked up by an answering
machine with insufficient
outgoing message volume.
13
Wait for Answer Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the
destination longer than this
interval (1~99 rings), VM8000
InMail marks the call as
unanswered (Ring No Answer)
and hangs up.
2 - 492
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
14
Item
Number of Callout Attempts
Input Data
Default
1~99 (attempts)
5
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
0 = 1st Last
1 = Last 1st
0
0~497
The first port of InMail
must start with one of the
following ports:
1, 5, 9, 12, 16, ......237,
241, 245, 249 and uses
the first port assigned +
next three consecutive
ports.
0
1~63
(-15dBm~ +15dBm)
32
(Notify Call Attmpt)
Use this option to set how many
times (1~99 attempts) VM8000
InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout.
This total includes
unacknowledged callouts,
callouts to a busy destination,
and callouts to an unanswered
destination. This option applies to
pager and non-pager callouts.
15
Send Pager Callout Until
Acknowledged
(Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1),
VM8000 InMail continues to retry
a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the
notification is acknowledged. If
this option is disabled (0),
VM8000 InMail retries a digital
pager Message Notification the
number of times specified in
47-01-14 Number of Callout
Attempts. This option does not
apply to Message Notification
callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is
considered acknowledged when
the recipient logs onto the
mailbox.
16
Name Format
Specify if names are displayed in
First Last format or Last First.
17
InMail Port
Specify the port number of the
first InMail Port.
18
Programming Manual
Play PAD Control
2 - 493
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
19
Item
Record PAD Control (for
Networking)
Input Data
1~63
(-15dBm~ +15dBm)
Default
32
Conditions
When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new
setting to take effect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 494
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension
mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Normally, VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1~26 should correspond to
extensions 101~126.
Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or
Master. You can also set up Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number
1~512
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Mailbox Type
0 = None
Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An
extension mailbox is not accessible when it is
disabled (even though its stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a
user pressing Message initiates a remote logon and
is asked to enter their mailbox number. A voice
prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not
exist.”
1 = Personal
Default
1
2 = Group
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.
02
Mailbox Number
Digits (8 maximum,
Mailbox 1 = 101
Use this option to select the extension number
associated with the mailbox you are programming.
Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number
101, mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102, etc.
using 0~9)
Mailboxes 2~64 =
102~164
Mailboxes 65~512
= No entry
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.
Programming Manual
2 - 495
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
03
04
Item
06
2 - 496
Default
Number of Messages
0~99 messages
99 for mailbox 1
Use this option to set the maximum number of
messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox.
If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is
reached, they hear: “That mailbox is full.” VM8000
InMail then hangs up.
To conserve storage
space, enter 0 for all
unused mailboxes.
20 for all other
mailboxes
Message Playback Order
0 (FIFO = first-in/
first-out, or oldest
messages first).
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox
message playback order. When a subscriber listens
to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the
oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or
the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
05
Input Data
0
1 (LIFO = last-in/
first-out, or newest
messages first)
1
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
0 (Erase)
Use this option to determine what happens when a
Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new
message and then exits the mailbox without either
saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending
on the setting of this option, VM8000 InMail either
automatically saves or erases the message. If the
mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire
new message, VM8000 InMail retains the message
as a new message.
After the subscriber
listens to the entire
new message and
hangs up, VM8000
InMail erases the
message.
Message Retention
1~99 Days
Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber
Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a
message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than
this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.
0 (Indefinite)
1 (Save)
After the subscriber
listens to the entire
new message and
hangs up, VM8000
InMail saves the
message.
0
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
07
Item
Input Data
Recording Conversation Beep
0 = No (Disabled)
(Rec Conv Beep)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
1
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on
a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”, followed by
a single beep when the extension user initiates
Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt
and beep do not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while VM8000 InMail records
the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system software
provides an additional Conversation Record beep.
This beep repeats according to the setting of
Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time
(0~64800 seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE
SV8100 telephone system Conversation Record
beep, enter 0 for this option.
08
Message Waiting Lamp
0 = No (Disabled)
(Update MW Lamp)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
1
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the
Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you
should leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.
09
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
0 = No (Disabled)
(Auto-ATT DND)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant
Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant
caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A
subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting.
Programming Manual
2 - 497
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
10
Item
Input Data
Forced Unscreened Transfer
0 = No (Disabled)
(Forced UTRF)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
0
Use this option to enable or disable Automated
Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur
normally.
11
Auto Time Stamp
0 = No (Disabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after
the subscriber listens to a message VM8000 InMail
announces the time and date the message was left.
Auto Time Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from
their mailbox.
12
13
14
System Administrator
0 = No (Disabled)
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox
as a System Administrator. This allows the
subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto
their mailbox.
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Dialing Option
0 = No (Disabled)
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for
Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call
Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who
accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a
message can dial any of the options in the Next Call
Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the
caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox 0 action).
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Call Routing
Mailbox Number
(1~3 digits, 01~032)
(Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides
callers with additional dialing options while listening
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting.
The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting
of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next
Call Routing Mailbox options.
15
Directory List Number
Mailbox 1 (101)=1
Other mailboxes=0
0
No entry (Entered
by pressing CLEAR)
1 (Call Routing
Mailbox 01)
By default, Call
Routing Mailbox
numbers are
01~08.
0
0 = None
1~8 = List Number
= All
16
2 - 498
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-10
47-02-16 Default
Table
1
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
17
Item
Enable Paging
Input Data
Default
0
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
18
Paging Option
0
0 = RNA
1 = Immediately
19
Telephone User Interface Type
0
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
20
21
0
Enable E-mail Notification
0 = No
(Not supported in V1000)
1 = Yes
E-mail Address
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
(Not supported in V1000)
22
Include Message as Attachment
0 = No
(Not supported in V1000)
1 = Yes
1
Table 2-10 47-02-16 Default Table
Item
Name
47-02-16
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
Programming Manual
2 - 499
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-10 47-02-16 Default Table
Item
Name
Input Data
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 500
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes
(01~32). A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a
Subscriber or Call Routing.
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
1~32
Item
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Mailbox Number
(Mailbox Number)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the
Department Group master (pilot) number. Use this
option to select the Department Group master (pilot)
number associated with the Group Mailbox you are
programming.
03
Mailbox Type
(Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Group Mailbox type. There
are three types of VM8000 InMail mailboxes: None (0),
Subscriber (1) and Routing (2).
Programming Manual
Digits (eight
maximum, using
0~9)
No Setting
(entered by
pressing Hold)
0 = None
1 = Subscriber
2 = Routing
Default
No Setting
1
2 - 501
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 502
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as
a Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03: Master Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Number of Messages
0~99 messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of
messages that can be left in the Subscriber
Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after
this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is
full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up.
To conserve storage
space, enter 0 for all
unused mailboxes.
Message Playback Order
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox
message playback order. When a subscriber
listens to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play
the oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO),
or the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or
LIFO).
03
04
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 (FIFO = first-in/firstout, or oldest
messages first).
Default
20
0
1 (LIFO = last-in/firstout, or newest
messages first).
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
0 (Erase)
Use this option to determine what happens when a
Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a
new message and then exits the mailbox without
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message.
Depending on the setting of this option, VM8000
InMail either automatically saves or erases the
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before
listening to the entire new message, VM8000
InMail retains the message as a new message.
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs
up, VM8000 InMail
erases the message.
Message Retention
1~90 days
Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber
Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a
message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than
this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.
0 (Indefinite)
1
1 (Save)
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs
up, VM8000 InMail
saves the message.
0
2 - 503
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
05
Item
Input Data
Recording Conversation Beep
0 = No (Disabled)
(Rec Conv Beep)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
1
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties
on a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”,
followed by a single beep when the extension user
initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable
the Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while VM8000 InMail records
the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system
software provides an additional Conversation
Record beep. This beep repeats according to the
setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0~64800
seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE SV8100
telephone system Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.
06
Message Waiting Lamp
0 = No (Disabled)
(Update MW Lamp)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
1
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Waiting light at the extension associated with the
Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you
should leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.
07
2 - 504
Auto Attendant Direct to VoiceMail
0 = No (Disabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant
Direct to VM. When a subscriber enables Auto
Attendant Direct to VM, an Automated Attendant
caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A
subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to
VM while recording their mailbox greeting.
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
08
Item
Input Data
Forced Unscreened Transfer
0 = No (Disabled)
(Forced UTRF)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
0
Use this option to enable or disable Automated
Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.
09
10
Auto Time Stamp
0 = No (Disabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after
the subscriber listens to a message VM8000 InMail
announces the time and date the message was left.
Auto Time Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp
from their mailbox.
1 = Yes (Enabled)
System Administrator
0 = No (Disabled)
(System Admin)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
0
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox
as a System Administrator. This allows the
subscriber to use the options after logging onto
their mailbox.
11
12
Dialing Option
0 = No (Disabled)
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options
for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call
Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who
accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a
message can dial any option in the Next Call
Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the
caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox 0 action).
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (0~32)
(Next CR Mbox)
13
Programming Manual
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides
callers with additional dialing options while listening
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default
greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on
the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.
No entry (entered by
pressing CLEAR)
Directory List Number
0 = None
Specify the Directory List number to which the
Group Mailbox belongs.
1~8 = List Number
0
1
(Call Routing
Mailbox 01)
By default, Call
Routing Mailbox
numbers are
01=16.
0
= All
2 - 505
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
14
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-11 4706-14 Default Table.
1
15
Enable Paging
0 = No
0
1 = Yes
16
Paging Option
0
0 = RNA
1 - Immediate
17
Telephone User Interface
0 = Numeric interface
0
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
2 - 506
18
--- Not Used ---
19
--- Not Used ---
20
--- Not Used ---
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-11 47-06-14 Default Table
Item
Name
47-06-14
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 507
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing
Mailboxes. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing
Mailboxes.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
02
Item
1~32
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Type
0 = None
(Mailbox Type)
1 = Call Routing
Use this option to set the Routing
Mailbox type.
2 = Announcement
3 = Directory
Default
Mailboxes 01~08 = 1
(Call Routing)
Mailboxes 09~32 = 2
(Announcement)
4 = Distribution
03
Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-12 47-07-03
Default Table
1
04
Telephone User Interface
0 = Numeric interface
0
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
2 - 508
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-12 47-07-03 Default Table
Item
Name
47-07-03
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 509
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as
Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Default
1~16
(Dial Action
Table 1~16)
1 (Dial Action Table
1)
Screened Transfer Timeout
0~255 (sec)
15
(Scrn Trf Timeout)
Entering 0
causes
immediate
recall.
Dial Action Table
Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the
Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines
the dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox.
02
1~32
Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer
(TRF) from the Automated Attendant rings an
unanswered extension before recalling.
This option has a similar function as Customize:
Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] Options:
Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in VM8000
InMail.
03
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
0~99 (sec)
(Dialing Timeout)
Entering 0
causes the
Automated
Attendant to
immediately
route callers to
the Timeout
destination
programmed in
the active Dial
Action Table.
This option determines how long VM8000 InMail waits
for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing
the call to the Timeout destination.
Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action
programmed.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout
action programmed, the caller routes to that
destination.
5
When the associated Dial Action Table does not have
a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu
repeats three times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
2 - 510
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
04
Item
Fax Detection
Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for
the Call Routing Mailbox. In enabled, the VM8000
InMail Automated Attendant (when using this Call
Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The
fax call then routes to the company fax machine
according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax Extension. If
disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect
incoming fax calls.
05
Fax Extension
Input Data
0 = No
(Disabled)
Default
0
1 = Yes
(Enabled)
Up to eight
digits
No entry
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 511
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned
as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Next Call Routing Mailbox
(Next CR Mbox)
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer
Automated Attendant calls, use this option to
provide additional routing options to the Automated
Attendant callers. This option interacts with Repeat
Count and Hang Up After below.
1~32
Input Data
Default
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (1~32)
0
0 = Undefined
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.
02
0
Repeat Count
0 (No Repeats)
Enter the number of times you want the
Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to
callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller
initially listens to the message, it repeats the
number of times specified in this option. This option
interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang
Up After when providing routing options.
1~10
(Announcement
repeats 1~10 times)
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.
2 - 512
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Hang Up After
0 = None
(HangUp)
1 = Goodbye
Use this option along with Next Call Routing
Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide
additional routing options to Automated Attendant
callers.
2 = Silent
Default
0
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 513
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options to assign VM8000 InMail options for each
trunk. Currently, only 47-10-01: Answer Table Assignment is available.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Answer Table Assignment
1~200
Input Data
Default
Answer Table (1~8)
1
(Answer Table)
Use this option to assign an VM8000 InMail
Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL)
the Automated Attendant should answer. The
Automated Attendant follows the routing
specified by the selected Answer Table.
2 - 514
02
Record PAD Control
1~63 (-15dBm~ +15dBm)
32
03
Voice Prompt Language
Refer to Table 2-13 47-10-03
Default Table
1
04
Telephone User Interface
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
0
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-13 47-10-03 Default Table
Item
Name
47-10-03
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 515
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer
Tables. VM8000 InMail provides eight Answer Tables (1~8). To set up the schedules
for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Schedule.
Input Data
Answer Table Number
1~8
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Answer Schedule Override
0 = No (Disabled)
(Schedule Override)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
0
Use this option to enable or disable Answer
Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table. If
enabled (and you make an entry for Override
Mailbox below), the active Answer Table routes
calls to the Override Mailbox.
2 - 516
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
Input Data
Override Mailbox Category
0 (Undefined)
(Override MB Ctg)
1 (Subscriber
Mailbox – STA)
Use this option to specify the category of the
mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should
route when you enable Answer Schedule Override.
VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber
Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox.
Default
0
2 (Group Mailbox)
3 (Routing Mailbox)
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the
type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:
If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox,
the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the
call, or provides additional dialing options.
If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).
Override Mailbox Number
(Override MB Num)
Use this option to specify the mailbox where
Automated Attendant calls should route when you
enable Answer Schedule Override. The mailbox
number you select in this option should match the
mailbox category specified in 47-11-02: Override
Mailbox Category above.
Programming Manual
Digits
(three maximum,
using 0~9)
No Entry
2 - 517
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Default
Default Mailbox Category
0 (Undefined)
Answer Table 1 = 3
(Default MB Ctg)
1 (Subscriber
Mailbox - STA)
Answer Table 2~8
=0
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox
used as the Default Mailbox. VM8000 InMail
mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master
Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox. VM8000 InMail uses
the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is
not in effect.
2 (Group Mailbox)
3 (Routing Mailbox)
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the
type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:
If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox,
the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the
call, or provides additional dialing options.
If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox,
the outside caller hears the instruction menu
and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number
(Default MB Num)
Use this option to set the Answer Table Default
Mailbox number. VM8000 InMail uses the Default
Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
By default, this occurs at all times other than
Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
04
Next Answer Table
When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are
not sufficient, use this option to link two Answer
Tables together. VM8000 InMail treats the two
linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table.
2 - 518
Digits (Three
maximum, using
0~9)
Answer Table
(1~8)
Answer Table 1 = 1
Answer Table
2~8 = No Entry
0
0 = Undefined
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 519
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the VM8000 InMail Automated
Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer
Schedules in each Answer Table.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Schedule Type
0 = Undefined
(Entryxx Schedule Type)
Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the
selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type
determines how the Answer Schedule answers
calls.
The schedule can be one of the following types:
1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a
specific day of the week. For this type of
schedule, you select:
The day of the week the schedule
should run:
The schedule start time.
The schedule end time.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer calls.
2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range
of days. For this type of schedule, you
select:
The day of the week the schedule
should start.
The day of the week the schedule
should stop.
The time on the start day the schedule
should start.
The time on the stop day the schedule
should stop.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
1 = Day of the Week
2 = Range of Days
3 = Date
Default
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All other
schedules = 0
(continued on next page)
2 - 520
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
01
Item
(continued from previous page)
3. Date
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a
specific day of the year. For this type of
schedule, you select:
The specific date the schedule should
run.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should start.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should stop.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
02
Input Data
0 = Undefined
1 = Day of the Week
2 = Range of Days
3 = Date
Answering Mailbox Category
0 = Undefined
(Entryxx MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of
mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls
should route when the schedule is in effect.
VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are
Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, or Routing
Mailbox.
1 = Subscriber Mailbox STA
Default
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All Other
Schedules = 0
3
2 = Group Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to
the exact type of Subscriber, Master, or Routing
Mailbox specified.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox
greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call,
or provides additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
Answering Mailbox Number
(Entryxx MB Num)
Use this option to set the number of the
Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant
uses when the selected schedule is in effect.
This mailbox is defined in 47-12-02: Answering
Mailbox Category.
Programming Manual
Digits (three maximum,
using 0~9)
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 1
All Other
Answer
Schedules = No
Entry
2 - 521
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Day of the Week
1 = Sunday
(Entryxx Day)
For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer
Schedules, use this option to select the day of
the week the Answer Schedule should be
active.
2 = Monday
Default
1
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
04
Start Day
1 = Sunday
1
(Entryxx Start Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules,
use this option to select the day of the week the
Answer Schedule should start.
2 = Monday
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
All Other
Schedules = 1
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
05
End Day
1 = Sunday
(Entryxx End Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules,
use this option to select the day of the week the
Answer Schedule should end.
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 6
All Other
Answer
Schedules = 1
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
06
Date
(Entryxx Date)
For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, use this
option to select the date the Answer Schedule
should be active.
07
Schedule Start Time
(Entryxx Start Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer
Schedule should start. It applies to Day of the
Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and
Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule
run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)
08
Schedule End Time
(Entryxx End Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer
Schedule should end. It applies to Day of the
Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and
Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule
run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)
2 - 522
MMDD
For example:
- 0101 = January 1
- 1231 = December 31
- 0000 = No date set
0000
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example:
- 0130 = 1:30AM
- 1700 = 5:00PM
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 =
0830 (8:30AM)
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example:
- 0130 = 1:30AM
- 1700 = 5:00PM
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 =
1700
- 0000 = Undefined
All other
schedules are
0000.
All Other
Schedules =
0000
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Example
Type 1 (Day of the Week) Answer Schedule Options
Type 1 (Day of Week) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:
Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10:30AM to
5:00PM.
Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9:00AM to 10:00AM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:
Range of Days
Day of Week
Date
Programming Manual
2 - 523
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Type 1 (Day of Week) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednesday from10:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 1
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 3
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 4
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1030 (10:30AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 3
Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from9:00AM to 10:00AM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB num = 4
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 3
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0900 (9:00AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1000 (10:00PM)
2 - 524
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Type 2 (Range of Days) Answer Schedule Options
Type 2 (Range of Days) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:
Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to
1:00PM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:
Range of Days
Day of Week
Date
Programming Manual
2 - 525
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Type 2 (Range of Days) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs Sunday through Wednesday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 4 (Wednesday)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 4 (Wednesday)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 5 (Thursday)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1100 (11:00AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1300 (1:00PM)
2 - 526
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Type 3 (Date) Answer Schedule Options
Type 3 (Date) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:
Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to
5:00PM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:
Range of Days
Day of Week
Date
Type 3 (Date) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 9
47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 1225 (December 25, Christmas day)
47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Programming Manual
2 - 527
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 528
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the VM8000 InMail Dial
Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated
Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing
Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is
active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which
provides dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a
default VM8000 InMail system. There are 16 Dial Action Tables.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
47-11-05 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
Programming Manual
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator
2 - 529
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dial Action Table Actions
TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened
Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an
extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer
can go through.
If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination
answers, the call goes through.
If the destination does not answer during a preset interval, is busy, or is in Do
Not Disturb, the Automated Attendant does not extend the call. It then provides
the caller with additional options.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key
you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to
reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter
TRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened
Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened
transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an
Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail transfers the call
to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by
the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key
you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to
extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
2 - 530
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter
UTRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
REC1 Action – Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. With this action, the caller hears the extension
greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Options
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the
corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter REC1 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
REC2 Action – Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. With this action, the caller does not hear the
extension greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the
voice prompt Recording followed by a beep.
Number Option
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the
corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter REC2 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
Programming Manual
2 - 531
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto Voice
Mail. Depending on programming (see Number Option below), the caller is
logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber
Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON option with Call
Routing and Announcement Mailboxes.
Number Option
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in
the corresponding Number option.
For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for
key 4 enter LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into, enter N in the corresponding Number option. The
key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers enter the
number of the Subscriber Mailbox where they want to log into, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When
callers dial 3, they hear, Please enter your mailbox number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into (without playing an announcement), enter XXX in
the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first
digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to allow callers to log onto mailboxes 301~399, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding
Number option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox
number to log on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the
corresponding Number.
Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action,
VM8000 InMail says Goodbye and immediately hangs up.
Number Option
No entry is required in the corresponding Number Option.
2 - 532
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to
Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a
digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that
provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.
Number Option
To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding
Number option.
For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 01, for key 1 enter
GOTO for the Action and 01 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox
number.
For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 000~015, for key 0 enter
GOTO for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the
corresponding Number option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox number to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the
Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.
UND Action – Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an
Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, That is an
invalid entry. The caller can then dial another option.
Programming Manual
2 - 533
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Dial Action Table Number
Key
No.
1
2
3
Dial Action Table Action
TRF Action - Screened
Transfer (1)
(TRF)
UTRF Action Unscreened Transfer (2)
4
(UTRF)
5
REC1 Action - Quick
Message With Greeting
(3)
(REC1)
6
7
8
9
0
#
TIMEOUT
01~16
REC2 Action - Quick
Message Without
Greeting (4)
(REC2)
LOGON Action - Log
Onto Voice Mail (5)
(LOGON)
Hang Up Action (6)
(HNGUP)
GOTO Action - Go to
Mailbox (7)
(GOTO)
UND Action - Undefined
Routing (0)
(UND)
Additional Data
Digits
Entry : 0-9, #, and
(8 digits max.)
Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated
Attendant call to a specific location (such as an
extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route
to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305
for the corresponding Number.
Caller Dialed Digits
Entry : X
(Entered by pressing LK2)
Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call
based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents
one caller-dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF
Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the
301‘399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX
for the corresponding Number.
Ignore Digits
Entry : I
(Entered by pressing LK3)
Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the
Automated Attendant caller that VM8000 InMail ignores
for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned
to the * key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action
is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a
caller can dial * + any mailbox number to leave a Quick
Message in that mailbox. VM8000 InMail ignores the
first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes according to
the next 3 digits dialed.
No Routing
Entry : N
(Entered by pressing LK1)
Use the N option when you want no Automated
Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be
used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt
the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the #
key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the
Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the
caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the mailbox
number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.”
Pause
Entry : P
(Entered by pressing LK4)
Use the P option when you want the Automated
Attendant to pause while dialing.
2 - 534
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Defaults
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key
Dial Action Table 1
1
UTRF to XXX
UND
(Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed
extension)
(Undefined)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
TIMEOUT
Dial Action Tables 2~16
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UTRF to XXXX
UND
(Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed
extension)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
UND
UND
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
HNGUP
UND
(Hangup)
(Undefined)
UTRF to 101
UND
(Unscreened Transfer to 101)
(Undefined)
REC1 to IXXX
UND
(Quick Message with greeting to
user-dialed extension)
(Undefined)
LOGON to IXXX
UND
(Logon to user-dialed mailbox)
(Undefined)
UTRF to 101
UND
(Unscreened Transfer to 101)
(Undefined)
TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 535
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox
Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type)
was set to Type 4 (Directory).
Input Data
Master Mailbox Number
Item
No.
1~32
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Minimum Number of Letters
Required
1~3
1
02
Directory List Number to Use
1~8
1
03
Name Match
0 = First
1 = Last
0
04
Transfer Option
0 = TRF
1 = UTRF
0
05
Screened Transfer Timeout
0~255
15
06
Time Limit for Dialing
Commands
0~99
5
07
Fax Detection
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
08
Next Call Routing Mailbox
0~32
0
09
Fax Extension
Up to eight digits
No entry
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 536
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-16 : InMail Language License
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-16 : InMail Language License to define the language order InMail uses.
Depending on the language license number, InMail uses the languages defined
starting from Language 1. For example, if the system has a two language license
InMail uses the language defined as Language 1 and 2 in the provided default table.
Input Data
Language
Item No.
1~20
Item
Input Data
Default
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
01
Language License
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
Refer to Table 214 47-16-01
Default Table
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible
Programming Manual
2 - 537
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-14 47-16-01 Default Table
Language No.
47-16-01 Default
Language 1
01 (US English)
Language 2
04 (French Canadian)
Language 3
06 (Mexican Spanish)
Language 4
00 (No entry)
Language 5
00 (No entry)
Language 6
00 (No entry)
Language 7
00 (No entry)
Language 8
00 (No entry)
Language 9
00 (No entry)
Language 10
00 (No entry)
Language 11
00 (No entry)
Language 12
00 (No entry)
Language 13
00 (No entry)
Language 14
00 (No entry)
Language 15
00 (No entry)
Language 16
00 (No entry)
Language 17
00 (No entry)
Language 18
00 (No entry)
Language 19
00 (No entry)
Language 20
00 (No entry)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 538
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program
47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution).
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
1~32
Entry Number
1~20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Distribution Mailbox Category
Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox
Number setting.
01
Input Data
0 = Undefined
1 = Station Mailbox
2 = Group Mailbox
Default
0
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting
Mailbox Number to 1~512
(PRG 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting
Group Mailbox (1~32)
(PRG 47-03).
Distribution Mailbox Number
Up to three digits
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 539
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification.
(Not supported in V1000)
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
SMTP Enabled
0 = No
1 = Yes
02
Server Name
Up to 48 characters
03
SMTP Port
0~65535
25
04
Encryption
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
05
Authentication
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
06
User Name
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
07
Password
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
08
E-mail Address
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
09
Reply to Address
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 540
Program 47 : InMail
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.
(Not supported in V1000)
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Server Name
Up to 48 characters
02
POP3 Port
0~65535
110
03
Encryption
0 = No
1 = Yes
0
04
User Name
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
05
Password
Up to 48 characters
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 541
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 542
Program 47 : InMail
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling Service
50-01 : CCIS System Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-01 : CCIS System Setting to set the availability of CCIS in
the UNIVERGE SV8100. No other CCIS settings function if this program is
disabled.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
CCIS Availability
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Program
50
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 543
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-02 : Connecting System Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-02 : Connecting System Settings to define the settings for
each CCIS Route ID.
Input Data
CCIS Route ID
Item
No.
Item
Route ID 1~8: CCIS via DTI
Route ID 9: CCIS via IAD/CD-PVAA (IP-CCIS)
Description
Input Data
Default
01
Port Number of Common
Signaling Channel (T1)
Specify the Trunk port to send D-channel information.
This program is available for using DTI package.
0~200
0
02
Common Signaling
Channel Data Speed
Assignment (T1)
Assign the baud rate of Common Signaling Channel
on DTI package.
0 = 64Kbps
1 = 56Kbps
2 = 48Kbps(1)
3 = 48Kbps(2)
1
03
Originating Point Code
Assign the Point Code of own side.
0~16367
0
04
Destination Point Code
(T1)
Assign the Point Code of destination side on the DTI
link.
0~16367
0
05
Calling Name Indication
(T1)
Calling name indication does not send to destination
party if switch is turned to Disable.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
06
--- Not Used ---
2 - 544
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
If 56K K-CCIS is used, 24 Multi-Frame (ESF) must be assigned in Program
10-03-02.
DPC must be what the OPC is on the opposite side of the link.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 545
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings to assign information of
remote systems in a CCIS Network.
Input Data
CCIS System ID
Item
No.
Item
1~255
Description
Input Data
Default
01
Destination Point
Code
Define the Point Code at the
Destination Party.
0~16367
0
02
CCIS Route ID
(T1 only)
Select the CCIS Route ID defined in
Program 14-13 when the user tries to
access the system in a CCIS network.
0~8
(CCIS Route IDs
5~8 are for
future use and
should not be
used.)
0
03
IP Address
(IP only)
Assign the IP Address to a CCIS
System ID.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
(xxx = 0~255)
0.0.0.0
04
Point Code
Availability
Define if the system associated with
Destination Code can be Reached (1)
or Not Reach (0). If set to 0 (Disable),
when using the IP-CCIS that system
will not be able to be called until it is set
to 1 (Enable).
0:Disable
1:Enable
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 546
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment to define the Office Code
when the CCIS Network is constructed with an Open Numbering Plan.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
CCIS Office Code
Input Data
xxxx (up to four digits) 0~9
Default
No Setting
Conditions
This program is used only in an Open Numbering Plan network. This should
include the Trunk Access Code and Office Code number.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 547
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter to define the
maximum hop counter of call forwarding.
Input Data
Item
Maximum Hop Counter
Input Data
Default
1~7
5
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 548
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability to define the availability of CCIS
features.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
01
Link Reconnect
0 = Not available
1 = Available
1
If this data is set to 0,
Link Reconnect does
not run.
02
Centralized Day/Night
Switching (for message
receiver side)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
If this data is turned to
0, Day/Night mode is
not changed even if
system receives
Switching message
from center.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 549
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office to define the Point
Code and CCIS Route ID for the Billing Center Office.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
0~16367
0
Define the Point Code
of Billing Center
Office.
Define the CCIS
Route ID to send
Billing Center Office.
01
Destination Point Code
02
CCIS Route ID
0~8
0
03
Billing Message Format
0: Normal Format
1: Expand Format
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 550
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment to define
the destination of BLF for the sending system. Eight sending systems can be
registered in this program.
Input Data
BLF Sending Group
Item
No.
1~8
Item
01
Destination Point Code
02
CCIS Route ID
Input Data
Default
Description
0~16367
0
Define the Point Code
of Billing Center
Office.
0~8
0
Define the CCIS
Route ID to send
Billing Center Office.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 551
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number
Assignment to define the extension number for sending BLF messages. One
extension number can have a sending switch for each sending group, which is
defined in Program 50-08.
Input Data
Entry
Item
No.
2 - 552
1~120
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
No
Setting
Extension number. BLF
message is indicated when
the status of the specified
extension number is
changed.
01
Extension Number
xxxxxxxx
(up to 8 digits)
02
Send to Sending Group 1
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 1 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
03
Send to Sending Group 2
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 2 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
04
Send to Sending Group 3
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 3 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
05
Send to Sending Group 4
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 4 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
06
Send to Sending Group 5
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 5 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
07
Send to Sending Group 6
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 6 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
08
Send to Sending Group 7
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 7 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
09
Send to Sending Group 8
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
Enable (0) or Disable (1)
the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 8 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 553
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment to define
the time to send BLF messages.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Type of Interval Time
Define the time to send BLF
messages.
Input Data
0 = 4 seconds
1 = 8 seconds
2 = 12 seconds
3 = 16 seconds
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 554
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group
Assignment to define Point Code and CCIS Route ID for sending Day/Night
Switching message.
Input Data
Day/Night Mode Sending Group
1~16
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Destination Point Code
02
CCIS Route ID
Input Data
Default
Description
0~16367
0
Define the Point Code
for Day/Night
Switching.
0~8
0
Define the CCIS
Route ID to send Day/
Night Switching
messages. (T1 only)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 555
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode
Assignment to define corresponding night mode to switch to when Day/Night mode
switching message arrives.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Day Mode
1~8
1
02
Night Mode
1~8
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 556
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment to define
the response timeout value.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
IAI Response Timer
Input Data
0~99
Default
30
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 557
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return to eliminate
the 9 on Caller ID redial except for 7- and 8-digit extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
CCIS Intercom Digits for
Caller ID Call Return
Input Data
0~24 (0 = Ignore setting)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 558
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting to set the basic
parameters for CCIS over IP.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Connection Method
0 = Peer to Peer disable
1 = Peer to Peer enable
02
TCP Server Port Number
0~65535
57000
03
TCP Client Base Port
Number
0~65535
59000
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 559
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 560
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting to define the
parameters of the NetLink feature.
Program
Each system must be set with its own information.
When the NetLink System ID is changed (Item 01), the system must be
reset.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
NetLink System ID
This is the ID of each NetLink system.
Setting should insure that no overlap
occurs between nodes.
02
Primary Candidate Order
Input Data
51
Default
0~50
(0 = No operation)
0
1~50
30
0
1
0
When the Primary system is turned
off or disconnect from network, this
value is used to select a new Primary
system. Smaller number is higher
priority.
If this value is the same number, the
System ID (PRG51-01-01) is
referred, and the system which has
the smaller number is selected as
Primary system.
03
Secondary System Flag
0: NetLink is dynamically established
based on Node List in PRG51-03-01.
= Disable
= Enable
Primary System will be selected in
the order which the system wakes up.
1: The system will connect with Top
Priority Primary System.
If Top Priority Primary System was
not found, the system will search
Primary System like this setting is 0.
Programming Manual
2 - 561
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 562
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting to set system data for
each NetLink system.
Program 51-02-03 is not used in US, but is used in other countries.
Input Data
System ID
Item
No.
01
Item
System Name
1~50
Input Data
Default
Up to 20 characters.
blank
This is the name given to each system.
02
Time Zone (Hour)
0~24
12
0~120
60
Determines the time offset from the
Primary system.
(0 = -12, 1 = -11, 2 = -10.... 12 = 0
13 = +1, 14 = +2, 24 = +12)
This setting affects Time Display on MLT
(see 51-13-02).
03
Time Zone (Minute)
Determines the time offset from the
Primary system.
(0 = -60, 1 = -59, 2 = -58.... 120 = +60)
This setting affects Time Display on MLT
(see 51-13-02).
This PRG is not used in the US, but is
used in other countries.
04
Authenticate System MAC Address
To use this function, set PRG 51-13-03 to
1 (enable), NetLink systems will reject the
connection from unauthenticated system
access.
Programming Manual
00-00-00-00-00-00~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
00-00-00-00-00-00
2 - 563
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 564
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting to set the IP
address of the NetLink system.
Input Data
List ID
Item
No.
01
1~50
Item
Internet Protocol Address List
The system seeks the Primary system based on
this list.
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail
Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish
new link. This setting is necessary when PRG
51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than 0.
Once the system connects to the Primary
System, this setting is updated by the Primary
system when PRG 51-13-01 is On. So, enter IP
address of the systems which may become
Primary at least.
Conditions
The system seeks Primary system based on this list.
When there is no Primary System yet, or Fail Over occurs, Node List is referred to
establish new link.
This setting is necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than
0. Once the system connects to the Primary System, this setting is updated by the
Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is on. So, enter IP address of the systems
which may become Primary at least.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 565
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 566
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of
NetLink to set the IP address of the new Primary System.
Input Data
List ID
Item
No.
01
1~50
Item
Internet Protocol Address of Top Priority
Primary
Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary
System.
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
To use this feature, set PRG 51-06-01 to 1(On).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 567
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings to set the various timers within the
NetLink system.
Item
No.
01
Item
Keep Alive Sending Interval
Input Data
Default
1~3600
5
0, 5~10800
(0 = infinity)
0
1~3600
5
5~10800
20
1~3600
10
1~10800
30
20~3600
40
This is the Keep Alive timer sending interval
from the Secondary system to confirm
communication with the Primary system.
02
Keep Alive Response Waiting Time
This is the time interval the Secondary system
waits for a response from the Primary system
before cutting off communication.
03
Primary Search Packet Sending Interval
While searching the Primary system, the system
sends a packet at this interval.
04
Primary Search Time Maximum Value
Total time of Primary system seek time.
05
Top Priority Primary Detection Packet
Sending Interval
When current Primary system is not Top Priority
Primary System, the system sends packet to
check if Top Priority System exists.
06
Primary Compulsion Specification Trial
Maximum Time
When the forced change Primary command is
executed, the system will search the new
Primary system for this amount of time.
07
Socket Refresh Time
For some reason, the IP connection may
become unstable. Then keep-alive function does
not work. To avoid this, if there is no data traffic
for this time, the socket is refreshed.
2 - 568
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 569
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Settings to set the
automatic integration of the Primary system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Primary Integration Right or Wrong
When LAN cable was divided, multiple Primary
systems may appear. If the LAN connection is
recovered, multiple Net-Links exist in the
network. When this option is enabling, NetLink
will be composed around Top priority Primary
System.
02
Package Reset Timing Option
When Primary System Automatic Integration is
done, all packages of secondary systems will
reset. This option can select the timing of
package reset.
Input Data
Default
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Reset when all packages
are in idle condition.
1 = Anytime
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 570
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting to set
compulsion specification of the Primary system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Forced Change Primary System Enabling
Set this item whether the Forced Change
Primary is available or not.
02
Package Reset Timing Option
When Forced Change Primary System is done,
all packages will reset. This option can select the
timing of package reset.
Input Data
Default
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
0 = On
1 = Off
0
0 = Reset when all packages are in idle
condition, otherwise reject Primary System
Integration.
1 = Anytime
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 571
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting to set the IP address and system ID
of the compulsory specification of the Primary system.
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
IP Address of New Primary System
Enter target IP address for New Primary system.
When the Forced Change Primary system is
done, this setting will be erased.
02
System ID of New Primary System
When set to 0, top priority Primary system is
assumed to be the new Primary system.
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
0~50
No
setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 572
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings to set the various
communication ports used on the system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Primary Waiting Port
Input Data
Default
0~65535
58000
0~65535
58001
0~65535
0
0~65535
0
0~65535
0
0~65535
58002
Sets the communication port that the Primary
system uses to communicate with the
Secondary system.
02
Communication Waiting Port
Port used to communicate between nodes. It is
always opened by all nodes.
03
Secondary Communication Port
Secondary system communicates with Primary
system at this port number. If 0 is specified,
temporary port is selected by dynamic.
04
Primary Search Port
When Fail-Over occurred, each system
communicates with other system at this port
number.
If 0 is set, temporary port is selected by dynamic.
If 0 is not specified, the number and continuous
maximum 50 number is used.
(Ex. 5000 is specified 5001, 5002…5049 will be
used).
05
Primary Detection Port
Enter port number to seek the Top Priority
Primary system.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected by
dynamic.
06
Database Replication Communication
Listening Port
This port is used to replicate database.
Programming Manual
2 - 573
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
07
Database Replication Primary Detection Port
Input Data
0~65535
Default
0
This port is used to replicate database.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected by
dynamic.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 574
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-10: Virtual Slot Setting to view the number of Virtual slots that are
remaining in a NetLink network. There can be up to 240 virtual slots available in
NetLink.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Default
Number of Available Virtual Slots
240 slots can be controlled in NetLink. This
command can check how many slots are
available.
Conditions
This Program is “Read Only.”
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 575
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-11 : NetLink System Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-11: NetLink System Information to reference information about
other systems in the NetLink network.
Input Data
System ID
Item
No.
1~50
Item
Input Data
Default
01
System Name
For reference only.
blank
02
Connected State
For reference only.
0
03
IP Address
For reference only.
000.000.000.000
04
MAC Address
For reference only.
00:00:00:00:00:00
05
Primary Priority Level
For reference only.
0
06
Main Software Version
For reference only.
XX.XX
Conditions
This Program is “Read Only.”
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 576
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-12 : Primary System Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-12: Primary System Information to reference information about the
Primary System in the NetLink network.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
System ID
For reference only.
0
02
System Name
For reference only.
blank
03
IP Address
For reference only.
000.000.000.000
04
MAC Address
For reference only.
00:00:00:00:00:00
05
Primary Priority Level
For reference only.
0
06
Main Software Version
For reference only.
XX.XX
Conditions
This Program is “Read Only.”
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 577
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-13 : NetLink Options
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-13: NetLink Options to enable automatic IP address List Operation
updates, time zone information, and MAC address authorization.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Automatic IP Address List Operation Update
When set to 1 (On), the list in PRG51-03-01 is
automatically updated.
02
Time Zone Option
When set to 0, the following features are
affected: Clock Display, Incoming/Outgoing
History List.
Input Data
Default
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
1
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0
When set to 1, the following features are
affected: VRS Time Announce, Date and Time
Setting Service Code, Alarm Clock setting, and
Hotel mode wake-up call.
03
MAC Address Authorization Enable
Refers to PRG 51-02-04 for setting MAC
address.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 578
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-14 : NetLink System Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-14: NetLink System Control to delete system and slot information.
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
System ID
1~50
Menu Number
1 = System information deletion
Item
Delete System Information
Input Data
Default
1~50
1
This command is used to delete system
information and the slot information. The system
must be disconnected.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 579
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-15 : Demonstration Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-15: Demonstration Setting to automatically set the minimum
setting values in NetLink. A system reset occurs after this command is executed.
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Input Data
Menu Number
1 = Primary automatic setting
2 = Secondary 1 - automatic operation setting
3 = Secondary 2 - automatic operation setting
4 = Secondary 3 - automatic operation setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 580
Program 51 : NetLink Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 51-16: NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting to set the
system data replication between the Primary and Secondary systems.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
System Data Replication Mode
Sets the synchronous mode of the system data.
When set to 1 (Setting Time Mode), the systems
are synchronized at the time set in Item 02
below.
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Setting Time Mode
2 = Interval Mode
Default
0
When set to 2 (Interval Mode), the systems are
synchronized at regular time intervals set in Item
03 below.
02
System Data Replication Time Setting
0000~2359
0200
Sets the time of day that both systems
synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 1.)
03
System Data Replication Interval Setting
15~1440 (minutes)
30 (min)
Sets the time interval that both systems
synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 2).
04
05
Month: 0~12
–
Replication Time Stamp
Day: 0~31
–
Show next replication time. (Read-Only)
Hour: 00~23
–
Minute: 00~59
–
System Data Replication Wait Time
1~86400 (seconds)
180 sec
0~86400 (seconds)
1 sec
This sets the wait time until replication starts
when NetLink is created.
06
System Data Replication Interval
This program sets an interval time to start
replication to the next node after replication to
one node is completed.
Programming Manual
2 - 581
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 582
Program 51 : NetLink Service
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones.
Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.
Program
Input Data
Service Tone Number
Item
No.
01
01~64
Item
Repeat Count
Input Data
0~255 (0 = until On-Hook)
Unit Number
1~8
Item
No.
Item
02
Basic Tone Number
1~33
(0 = No Tone)
(33=Default Time Slot)
03
Duration Count
1~255 (100~25500ms)
04
Gain Level (dB)
1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5)
Programming Manual
80
Input Data
2 - 583
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-15 Basic Tones
Basic
Tone No.
Frequency (Hz)
Level
(dB)
Basic
Tone No.
Frequency (Hz)
Level (dB)
01
400
- 13
17
520 / 650
-13 / -19
02
520
-13
18
650 / 780
-13 / -19
03
580
-13
19
780 / 1040
-13 / -19
04
660
-13
20
1040
-13
05
700
-13
21
450
-13
06
800
-13
22
950
-13
07
880
-13
23
1080
-13
08
1050
-13
24
400/450
-13/-13
09
350 / 440
-16 / -16
25
-- Reserve --
-
10
440 / 480
-16 / -16
26
-- Reserve --
-
11
480 / 620
-21 / -21
27
-- Reserve --
-
12
440
-16
28
-- Reserve --
-
13
-- Reserve --
-
29
-- Reserve --
-
14
520 / 650
-19 / -13
30
-- Reserve --
-
15
650 / 780
-19 / -13
31
-- Reserve --
-
16
780 / 1040
-19 / -13
32
-- Reserve --
-
Default
Service
Tone
No.
2 - 584
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
1
No Tone
0
Basic 1
0
10
32 (0dB)
2
Internal Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
10
32 (0dB)
3
Stutter Dial Tone
0
Basic 6
0
9
0
9
0
9
2
1
1
1
1
77
32 (0dB)
4
Internal Recall Dial Tone
2
Basic 2
9
0
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
5
Trunk Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
10
32 (0dB)
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
6
Internal Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
0
11
5
5
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
7
DND Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
0
1
2
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
8
B-Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
0
11
5
5
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
9
Internal Reorder Tone
0
Basic 2
11
0
3
2
20 (-6dB)
20 (-6dB)
10
Internal Interrupt Tone
0
Basic 2
0
1
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
11
Internal Confirmation Tone
3
Basic 2
0
6
5
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
12
Internal Hold Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
13
External Hold Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
14
Intercom Ringback Tone
0
Basic 2
9
0
10
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
15
Override Tone
1
Basic 1
12
5
32 (0dB)
16
Lock-out Tone
0
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
17
Clock Alarm Tone
0
Basic 4
6
0
6
0
1
1
1
7
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
18
BGM
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
19
Door Box Chime 1
3
Basic 6
4
4
2
2
2
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
20
Door Box Chime 2
3
Basic 6
7
7
5
5
5
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
21
Door Box Chime 3
3
Basic 6
8
8
6
6
6
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
Programming Manual
2 - 585
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
22
Door Box Chime 4
3
Basic 6
4
4
2
2
2
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
23
Door Box Chime 5
3
Basic 6
7
7
5
5
5
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
24
Door Box Chime 6
3
Basic 6
8
8
6
6
6
0
1
1
2
2
3
2
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
38 (+3dB)
26 (-3dB)
14 (-9dB)
32 (0dB)
25
Service Set Tone
3
Basic 2
0
9
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
26
Service Clear Tone
3
Basic 2
0
9
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
27
Talkback Tone
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
28
Speaker Monitor Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
This tone is what the originator
hears when placing a handsfree
speaker ICM call.
2 - 586
29
Door Relay Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
30
Door Box Call Tone
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
31
Paging Tone
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32
Splash Tone 1
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
33
Splash Tone 2
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
34
Splash Tone 3
3
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
35
1-Second Signal Tone
1
Basic 1
6
10
32 (0dB)
36
External Audible Ring Tone
0
Basic 2
7
0
2
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Service
Tone
No.
Issue 1.0
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
37
External Reorder Tone
0
Basic 2
7
0
5
5
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
38
External Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
7
0
7
7
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
39
Special Audible Ring Busy
Tone
0
Basic 6
0
11
0
11
10
0
5
5
5
5
10
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
40
Internal Call Waiting Tone
1
Basic 1
12
2
32 (0dB)
41
Intrusion Tone
1
Basic 1
12
5
32 (0dB)
42
Conference Tone
0
Basic 0
0
0
32 (0dB)
43
Intrusion Tone 2
0
Basic 1
2
8
32 (0dB)
44
External Dial Tone
0
Basic 1
9
1
26 (-3dB)
45
External Ring Back Tone
0
Basic 2
10
0
10
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
46
External Busy Tone
0
Basic 2
11
0
5
5
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
47
Number Unobtainable Tone
0
Basic 1
11
0
32 (0dB)
48
Voice Mail Message Indication
Tone
0
Basic 2
9
0
1
1
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
49
--- Not Used ---
50
External Special Audible Ring
Tone
0
3
10
12
0
10
2
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
51
External Intercept Tone
0
2
12
4
3
2
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
52
External Call Waiting Tone
1
1
12
3
32 (0dB)
53
External Executive Override
Tone
1
1
12
10
32 (0dB)
54
--- Not Used ---
55
Generate tone for TAPI2.1
0
Basic 1
3
0
32 (0dB)
56
Warning Beep Tone Signaling
1
Basic 1
2
8
32 (0dB)
57
Headset Ear Piece Ringing
Tone
0
Basic 5
0
2
0
2
0
2
1
1
1
20
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
Programming Manual
2 - 587
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic
Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level
(dB)
58
Opening Chime Tone
1
Basic 8
2
2
14
14
15
15
16
16
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
59
Ending Chime Tone
1
Basic 8
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
32 (0dB)
26 (-3dB)
60
Splash Tone 1 (Mute)
1
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
61
Splash Tone 2 (Mute)
2
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
62
Splash Tone 3 (Mute)
3
Basic 2
0
6
1
1
8 (-12dB)
8 (-12dB)
63
EXT SPK Ring-back Tone
0
Basic 2
10
0
10
30
32 (0dB)
32 (0dB)
11
2
35 (+1.5dB)
0
3
32 (0dB)
11
2
35 (+1.5dB)
0
12
32 (0dB)
64
Special Hold Tone
0
4
Conditions
The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
Selectable Ring Tones
2 - 588
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause
(Off time) for DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make
separate entries for duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both
high and low frequency tone.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Duration
1~255
5 (100ms)
02
Pause
1~255
5 (100ms)
03
Tone Level (Low) (dB)
1~97
65 (-13dB)
-45
:
+3
04
Tone Level (High)
1~97
69 (-11dB)
-45
:
+3
Duration
Pause
Programming Manual
2 - 589
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 590
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and
timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver.
DTMF Tone Receiver Type:
1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
4, 5 = Reserved
Input Data
DTMF Tone Receiver Type No.
Item
No
Programming Manual
Item
1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved ---
Input Data
01
Detect Level
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
02
Start Delay Time
0~255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms)
03
Min. Detect Level
0~15
DTMF Tone 1 : -15dBm(0)
DTMF Tone 2 : -20dBm(0)
DTMF Tone 3 : -25dBm(0)
DTMF Tone 4 : -30dBm(0)
DTMF Tone 5 : -35dBm(0)
to -30dBm(15)
to -35dBm(15)
to -40dBm(15)
to -45dBm(15)
to -50dBm(15)
2 - 591
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No
Item
Input Data
04
Max. Detect Level
0~15
DTMF Tone 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
05
Forward Twist Level
0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)
06
Backward Twist Level
0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)
07
ON Detect Time
1~255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)
08
OFF Detect Time
1-255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)
Default
Item
No
Item
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
01
Detect Level
0
0
0
0
0
02
Start delay time
0
0
0
0
0
03
Min. detect level
10 (-20dBm)
15 (-25dBm)
15 (-25dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
04
Max. detect level
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
05
Forward twist level
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
06
Backward twist level
0 (1dBm)
0 (1dBm)
0 (1dBm)
0 (1dBm)
0 (1dBm)
07
ON detect time
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
08
OFF detect time
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 592
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various
levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector.
Tone Detector Type:
1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4, 5 = Reserved
Input Data
Tone Detector Type Number
Item No
Item
Input Data
01
Detection Level
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
02
Min. Detection Level
0~15
0 = -10dBm(0)
1 = -15dBm(0)
2 = -20dBm(0)
3 = -25dBm(0)
4 = -30dBm(0)
5 = -35dBm(0)
6= -40dBm(0)
03
Programming Manual
1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved ---
S/N Ratio
to -25dBm(15)
to -30dBm(15)
to -35dBm(15)
to -40dBm(15)
to -45dBm(15)
to -50dBm(15)
to -55dBm(15)
0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB)
2 - 593
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item No
Item
Input Data
04
No Tone Time
0~255 (30+30~7680ms)
(0 =not detect)
1~255 = 60~7680ms.
The formula is 30+30N.
When set to N=1, it means 30+30*1=60
When set to N=255, it means
30+30*255=7680
05
Pulse Count
1~255
06
ON Minimum Time
1~255 (30+30~7680ms)
07
ON Maximum Time
0~255 (30+30~7680ms)
08
OFF Minimum Time
1~255 (30+30~7680ms)
09
OFF Maximum Time
0~255 (30+30~7680ms)
12
Frequency No. 1
1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
13
Frequency No. 2
1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
Default
Item
Name
Type 1 (DT)
Type 2 (BT)
Type 3 (RBT)
Type 4
Type 5
0 (-25dBm)
0 (-25dBm)
0 (-25dBm)
0
0
15 (-25dBm)
15 (-25dBm)
15 (-25dBm)
0
0
4 (-20dB)
4 (-20dB)
4 (-20dB)
0
0
1
Detect Level
2
Min. detect
level
3
S/N ratio
4
No tone time
132 (3990ms)
132 (3990ms)
132 (3990ms)
0
0
5
Pulse Count
1
1
1
0
0
6
ON min. time
9 (300ms)
12(390ms)
25 (780ms)
0
0
7
ON max. time
0
20(630ms)
40
(1230ms)
0
0
8
OFF min. time
1 (60ms)
12(390ms)
83 (2520ms)
0
0
9
OFF max. time
1 (60ms)
20(630ms)
115 (3480ms)
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 594
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format
when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Date Format
Input Data
0 = American Format
(Month / Day / Year)
1 = Japanese Format
(Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format
(Day / Month / Year)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 595
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the
frequency of the detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.
Input Data
Frequency Table No.
Input Data
Default
1
35 (350 Hz)
2
44 (440 Hz)
3
48 (480 Hz)
4
5
0, 10~255
(100~2550 Hz)
(0 = Not used)
62 (620 Hz)
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 596
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SV8100
multiline terminals.
Input Data
Short Ring Number
Item
No.
Item
01~32
Description
Default
01
Frequency 1
Refer to Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table
00 = No Setting, 01~15
02
Frequency 2
Refer to Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table
00 = No Setting, 01~15
03
Ring Cycle
Refer to Table 2-17 Ring Cycle Table
00 = No Setting, 01~14
When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.
Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table
Programming Manual
Data
Frequency (Hz)
01
392
02
440
03
494
04
523
05
587
06
659
07
698
08
784
09
880
10
988
11
1046
2 - 597
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-16 Frequency 1/2 Table (Continued)
Data
Frequency (Hz)
12
1175
13
1318
14
1397
15
1568
Table 2-17 Ring Cycle Table
Data
2 - 598
Ring Cycle (ms)
01
125(On)/Off
02
125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
03
125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
04
125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off
05
250(On)/Off
06
250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
07
250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
08
250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off
09
325(On)/Off
10
325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off
11
325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off
12
500(On)/Off
13
500(On)/500(Off)/500(On)/Off
14
1000(On)/Off
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-18 Default Table
Short Ring
No.
Short Tone Name
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Ring Cycle
1
Confirmation Tone
8
8
1
2
Error Tone
8
8
14
3
Alarm Tone for long
conversation call
4
4
14
4
Not defined
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
32
Not defined
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 599
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup to various data for the MF signal
detection.
Input Data
MF Tone Receiver Type Number
2 - 600
1 = MF Receiver for Extension
2 = MF Receiver for Trunk
3 = Reserved
4 = Reserved
5 = Reserved
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
01
Detect Level
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
02
Start delay time
0~255 (0.25step, 0ms~64ms)
03
Min. detect level
0~15
MF Tone 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
MF Tone 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
MF Tone 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
MF Tone4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
MF Tone 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
04
Max. detect level
0~15
MF Tone 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
MF Tone 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
MF Tone 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
MF Tone 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
MF Tone 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
MF Tone 6 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
05
Twist level
0~9 (1dB~10dB)
06
S/N ratio
0~4 (-5step, 0dB~ -20dB)
07
ON detect time
1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms)
08
OFF detect time
1~255 (15step, 30ms~3840ms)
2 - 601
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-19 Default Table
Item
Name
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
01
Detect Level
0
0
0
0
0
02
Start delay time
0
0
0
0
0
03
Min. detect level
10 (-20dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
10 (-20dBm)
04
Max. detect level
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
2 (-2dBm)
05
twist level
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
5 (6dBm)
06
S/N ratio
2 (-10dBm)
2 (-10dBm)
2 (-10dBm)
2 (-10dBm)
2 (-10dBm)
07
ON detect time
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
08
OFF detect time
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
1 (30ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 602
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data
parameters for the COT Unit.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
0
01
PCM Encoding Method
Specification
0 = u-law
1 = A-law
02
Loop Current Detection Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
75
(600ms)
03
Clear Signal (Open Loop)
Detection Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
38
(304ms)
04
Ringing Signal Detection Minimum
Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
13
(104ms)
05
Single Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
0~255
(0,8~2040ms)
82
(656ms)
06
Double Ringing Detection
Minimum Off Time
0~255
(0,8~2040ms)
13
(104ms)
07
Double Ringing Detection
Maximum Off Time
0~255
(0,8~2040ms)
50
(400ms)
08
Ringing Signal not Detection
Minimum
1~255
(8~2040ms)
88
(704ms)
09
Time Ringing Signal Stop
Detection Time
1~255
(64~16320ms)
94
(6016ms)
10
Continuous Ringing Minimum
Time
0~255
(0,8~2040ms)
38
(304ms)
11
Continuous Ringing Maximum
Time
0-255
(0,8~2040ms)
88
(704ms)
12
Caller ID Detection Time
0~255
(0~16320ms)
0
(0ms)
81
2 - 603
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 604
Item
Input Data
Default
13
Grounding Time
1~255
(16~4080ms)
9
(144ms)
14
Hook Flash 1 Time
1~255
(16~4080ms)
50
(800ms)
15
Hook Flash 2 Time
1~255
(16~4080ms)
156
(2496ms)
16
Pause Time
1~255
(64~16320ms)
16
(1024ms)
17
PFT Idle Detection Time
1~255
(64~16320ms)
47
(3008ms)
18
Grounding Start Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
19
Grounding Start Give Up Time
1~255
(64~16320ms)
47
(3008ms)
20
Loop Reverse Detect Minimum
Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
13
(104ms)
21
Loop Reverse Detect Maximum
Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
107
(856ms)
22
Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum
Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
50
(400ms)
23
Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum
Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
80
(640ms)
24
On Hook Normal Detect Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
2
(24ms)
25
On Hook Reverse Detect Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
2
(16ms)
26
On Hook Disconnect Detect Time
1~255
(16~4080ms)
188
(3008ms)
27
Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps)
1~255
(8~2040ms)
8
(64ms)
28
Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps)
1~255
(8~2040ms)
5
(40ms)
29
DP Inter-digit Time (10pps)
1~255
(32~8160ms)
25
(800ms)
30
Dial Pulse Break Time (20pps)
1~255
(8~2040ms)
4
(32ms)
31
Dial Pulse Make Time (20pps)
1~255
(8~2040ms)
2
(16ms)
6
(48ms)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
32
DP Inter-digit Time (20pps)
33
--- Not Used ---
34
--- Not Used ---
35
--- Not Used ---
36
Long Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
Input Data
Default
1~255
(32~8160ms)
16
(512ms)
1~255
(16~4080ms)
150
(2400ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 605
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for
the DID Unit.
Input Data
Item
2 - 606
Name
Input Data
Default
01
PCM Method Type
0 = u-law
1= A-law
0 (u-law)
02
Answer Signal Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
6
(60ms)
03
Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
7
(700ms)
04
Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
10
(100ms)
05
Hook Flash Time
1~255
(8~2040ms)
25
(200ms)
06
Pause Time
1~255
(32~8160ms)
94
(3008ms)
07
WINK/DELAY Duration Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
20
(200ms)
08
Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
3
(300ms)
09
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
48
(4800ms)
10
Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
13
(130ms)
11
Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max.
Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
31
(310ms)
12
Receive DP Make Minimum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
5
(10ms)
13
Receive DP Make Maximum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
50
(100ms)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
14
Receive DP Break Minimum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
5
(10ms)
15
Receive DP Break Maximum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
50
(100ms)
16
Receive DP Inter-Digit Time
1~255
(32~8160ms)
6
(192ms)
17
Loop Off Guard Time
0~25
(0,100~25500ms)
20
(2000ms)
18
DP Break Time (10pps)
1~255
(4~1020ms)
16
(64ms)
19
DP Make Time (10pps)
1~255
(4~1020ms)
8
(32ms)
20
DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps)
1~255
(16~4080ms)
38
(608ms)
21
DP Break Time (20pps)
1~255
(4~1020ms)
8
(32ms)
22
DP Make Time (20pps)
1~255
(4~1020ms)
4
(16ms)
23
DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps)
1~255
(16~4080ms)
29
(464ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 607
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for
the E&M Tie Line Unit.
Input Data
Item
2 - 608
Name
Input Data
Default
01
PCM Method Type
0 = u-law
1= A-law
0 (u-law)
02
Answer Signal Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
6
(60ms)
03
Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
7
(700ms)
04
Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
10
(100ms)
05
Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
7
(700ms)
06
Hook Flash Time
1~255
(10~2040ms)
20
(200ms)
07
Pause Time
1~255
(60~15300ms)
50
(3000ms)
08
WINK/DELAY Duration Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
20
(200ms)
09
Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
3
(300ms)
10
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time
1~255
(100~25500ms)
48
(4800ms)
11
Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
13
(130ms)
12
Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max.
Time
1~255
(10~2550ms)
31
(310ms)
13
Receive DP Make Minimum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
5
(10ms)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
14
Receive DP Make Maximum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
50
(100ms)
15
Receive DP Break Minimum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
5
(10ms)
16
Receive DP Break Maximum Time
1~255
(2~510ms)
50
(100ms)
17
Pause Time after WINK/DELAY Receive
1~255
(8~2040ms)
13
(104ms)
18
Loop Off Guard Time
0~255
(0,100~25500ms)
20
(2000ms)
19
DP Break Time (10pps)
1~255
(2~512ms)
32
(64ms)
20
DP Make Time (10pps)
1~255
(2~512ms)
16
(32ms)
21
DP Inter-digit Time (10pps)
1~255
(32~8160ms)
19
(608ms)
22
DP Break Time (20pps)
1~255
(2~510ms)
16
(32ms)
23
DP Make Time (20pps)
1~255
(2~510ms)
8
(16ms)
24
DP Inter-digit Time (20pps)
1~255
(32~8160ms)
16
(512ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 609
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the
various basic data for layer 1 of ISDN BRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Wait time for Physical Activation
(Timer 3)
1~255
(200~5100ms)
100
(20sec)
02
Detection time for Physical
Deactivation
1~255
(200~5100ms)
5
(1sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 610
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define
the various basic data for layer 2 of ISDN BRI and PRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Description
Input Data
Default
01
Timer T200
Specifies the timer
value in 1/100ths of a
second at the end of
which transmission
of a frame may be
initiated.
1~255
(100~25500ms)
10 (1sec)
02
Timer T201
Specifies the
minimum time in
1/100ths of a second
between
retransmissions of
the TEI Identity
check messages.
1~255
(100~25500ms)
10 (1sec)
03
Timer T202
Specifies the
minimum time in
1/100ths of a second
between
retransmissions of
the TEI Identity
check messages.
1~255
(100~25500ms)
20 (2sec)
04
Timer T203
Specifies the
maximum time in
1/100ths of a second
allowed without
exchanging frames.
1~255
(100~25500ms)
250 (25sec)
05
N200
Specifies the
retransmission
count.
1~255
06
N201
Specifies the frame
lengths in ocelots.
1~65535 (Byte)
07
N202
Specifies the
maximum number of
transmissions from a
TEI identity request
message when the
user requests a TEI.
1~255
3
260
3
2 - 611
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 612
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the
various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).
Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number
1~5
Item
No.
Item
Description
01
T301
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when the ALERT message is
received.
0,180~254 (sec)
180 (sec)
02
T302
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when the SETUP ACK is sent. Timer
is also restarted when INFO is
received.
1~254 (sec)
15 (sec)
03
T303
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when SETUP is sent.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
04
T304
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when the SETUP ACK is received.
Timer is also restarted when INFO is
received.
0~254 (sec).
30 (sec)
05
T305
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when DISC without progress No. 8 is
sent.
1~254 (sec)
30 (sec)
06
T306
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when DISC with progress indicator
No. 8 is sent. This timer is valid for
Network side use only.
0~254 (sec)
30 (sec)
07
T307
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when SUSPEND ACK is sent. This
timer is valid for Network side use
only.
1~254 (sec)
180 (sec)
Programming Manual
Input Data
Default
2 - 613
Issue 1.0
2 - 614
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
Description
08
T308
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when REL is sent.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
09
T309
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second upon data link
disconnection.
1-254 (sec)
90 (sec)
10
T310
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when CALL PROC is sent.
0~180 (sec)
180 (sec)
11
T312
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when SETUP is sent or re-sent on
broadcast data link. This timer is only
valid for Network side use only.
1~254 (sec)
6 (sec)
12
T313
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when connection request is sent.
Valid range 1 ~ 4 seconds in 1 second
increments. Value of 0 indicates timer
not used.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
13
T314
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when message segment is received.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
14
T316
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when RESTART is sent.
(T317+1)~254 (sec)
120 (sec)
15
T317
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when RESTART is received.
1~(T316-1)
60 (sec)
16
T318
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when RES is sent. This timer is valid
for user side use only.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
17
T319
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when SUSPEND is sent. This timer is
valid for user side use only.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
18
T320
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second when B-channel access:
connection is received, or D-channel
access: DL-ESTABLISH confirmation
or indication is received.
1~254 (sec)
30 (sec)
19
T321
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second of the timer to be started
when STATUS ENQ is received.
1~254 (sec)
30 (sec)
20
T322
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths
of a second upon D-channel failure.
1~254 (sec)
4 (sec)
Input Data
Default
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual
2 - 615
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the
CODEC (QSLAC) Filter for each analog trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk Number
CODEC Filter Type
0 = No filter
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
1~200
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 616
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each
T1 Trunk type.
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
01
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
02
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
03
Answer Signal Detection Time
(DID)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
04
Answer Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
05
Answer Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
06
Clear Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
07
Clear Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
08
Clear Signal Detection Time
(DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
09
Clear Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
10
Clear Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
11
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
10
80ms
12
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
10
80ms
13
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(DID)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
10
80ms
Programming Manual
2 - 617
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
2 - 618
Name
Input Data
Default
14
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
10
80ms
15
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
10
80ms
16
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
50
5000ms
17
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
50
5000ms
18
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
50
5000ms
19
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
50
5000ms
20
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
50
5000ms
21
Loop Current Detection Time
(Loop)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
40
160ms
22
Loop Current Detection Time
(Ground)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
40
160ms
23
Loop Current Detection Time
(DID)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
40
160ms
24
Loop Current Detection Time
(E&M)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
40
160ms
25
Loop Current Detection Time
(OPX)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
40
160ms
26
DP Break Send Time (ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
15
60ms
27
DP Make Send Time (ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
10
40ms
28
DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
7
700ms
29
HookFlash Send Time (Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
5
500ms
30
HookFlash Send Time (Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms )
5
500ms
31
HookFlash Send Time (DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms )
5
500ms
32
HookFlash Send Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms )
5
500ms
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
5
500ms
33
HookFlash Send Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms )
34
Pause Send Time (ALL)
1~255
(1sec ~ 255sec )
3
3sec
35
Wink Send Duration Time (DID)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
25
200ms
36
Delay Send Duration Time (DID)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
25
200ms
37
Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
3
300ms
38
Wink Send Duration Time (E&M)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
25
200ms
39
Delay Send Duration Time (E&M)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
25
200ms
40
Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
3
300ms
41
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive
Max. Time (DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
48
4800ms
42
Receive Wink Duration Min.
Time (DID)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
12
96ms
43
Receive Wink Duration Max.
Time (DID)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
45
360ms
44
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive
Max. Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
48
4800ms
45
Receive Wink Duration Min.
Time (E&M)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
12
96ms
46
Receive Wink Duration Max.
Time (E&M)
1~250
(8ms ~ 2000ms)
45
360ms
47
Receive DP Make Min. Time
(ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
3
12ms
48
Receive DP Make Max. Time
(ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
19
76ms
49
Receive DP Break Min. Time
(ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
3
12ms
50
Receive DP Break Max. Time
ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
25
100ms
51
Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time
(ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
125
500ms
Programming Manual
2 - 619
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
2 - 620
Name
Input Data
Default
52
Receive HookFlash Duration
Min. Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
3
300ms
53
Receive HookFlash Duration
Max. Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
54
Receive HookFlash Duration
Min. Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
3
300ms
55
Receive HookFlash Duration
Max. Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
56
Loop Off Guard Time (Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
57
Loop Off Guard Time (Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
58
Loop Off Guard Time (DID)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
59
Loop Off Guard Time (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
60
Loop Off Guard Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
61
Double Ringing Send Time 1
(OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
5
500ms
62
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 1 (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
5
500ms
63
Double Ringing Send Time 2
(OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
25
2500ms
64
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 2 (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
30
3000ms
65
Single Ringing Send Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
10
1000ms
66
Receive DP Make Max. Time
(ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
67
Receive DP Break Min. Time
(ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
68
Receive DP Break Max. Time
ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
69
Single Between Ringing Send
Time (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
70
Guard Time 1 (Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
71
Guard Time 1 (Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
9
900ms
72
Guard Time 1 (DID)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
3
12ms
73
Guard Time 1 (E&M)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
20
2000ms
74
Guard Time 1 (OPX)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
40
4000ms
75
Guard Time 2 (ALL)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
6
600ms
76
Dial Sending Complete Time
(ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
77
ON-HOOK bit Send Time (ALL)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
78
Open Loop Time (Loop)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
79
Open Loop Time (Ground)
1~255
(100ms ~ 25500ms)
6
600ms
80
Open Loop Time (DID)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
13
52ms
81
Open Loop Time (E&M)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
13
52ms
82
Open Loop Time (OPX)
1~250
(4ms ~ 1000ms)
13
52ms
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 621
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting
data (when Program 81-07 is set to 4).
2 - 622
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
01
B1 Filter Setup(1)
0~255
162
02
B1 Filter Setup(2)
0~255
98
03
B1 Filter Setup(3)
0~255
165
04
B1 Filter Setup(4)
0~255
42
05
B1 Filter Setup(5)
0~255
34
06
B1 Filter Setup(6)
0~255
177
07
B1 Filter Setup(7)
0~255
170
08
B1 Filter Setup(8)
0~255
18
09
B1 Filter Setup(9)
0~255
194
10
B1 Filter Setup(10)
0~255
186
11
B1 Filter Setup(11)
0~255
54
12
B1 Filter Setup(12)
0~255
181
13
B1 Filter Setup(13)
0~255
218
14
B1 Filter Setup(14)
0~255
192
15
B2 Filter Setup(1)
0~255
46
16
B2 Filter Setup(2)
0~255
1
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 623
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-10 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for
each COT trunk port.
Input Data
Trunk No.
Item
No.
01
1~ 200
Item
Input Data
DP Interdigit Time Selection
The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum
pause time between dial pulses. Use this
Program to select either Pattern A or
pattern B.
02
Prepause Time Selection
Specifies the loop open time for a hookflash
signal sent to the CO or PBX when the
Recall key on a multiline terminal is
pressed. A single line telephone (SLT)
generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX
line when a SLT hookflash is assigned.
03
Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection
Specifies the time after the incoming signal
from another system is detected before the
acknowledge signal is sent out.
04
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
Specifies the minimum time before a
disconnected circuit can be accessed
again.
05
Auto Release Signal Detection Time
Specifies the signal detection time for
release of a CO/PBX line after a disconnect
signal is received from the distant CO or
PBX.
06
2 - 624
Pause Time Selection
0 = Pattern A
(Pattern A: 10pps – 650ms,
20pps – 50ms)
1 = Pattern B
(Pattern B: 10pps – 800ms,
20pps – 80ms)
1~13
(1~13 seconds)
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
(Pattern B)
1
(1sec)
0~15
(50~800ms)
3
(200ms)
1~15
(100ms~1.5 seconds)
(0 = No Setting)
3
(300ms)
1~14
(50~700ms)
15 = ∞ (No limit)
(0 = No Setting)
7
(350ms)
1~15
(500~7500ms)
6
(3000ms)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
07
Item
Hookflash Time Selection 1
Normal Hook Flash
08
Hookflash Time Selection 2
Long Hook Flash
Input Data
Default
0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
9
(600ms)
0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
14
(3.0sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 625
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-11 : Tie Line Initial Setup to define the various initial data for DID/
TLI/DTI packages.
Input Data
Trunk No.
Item
No.
01
1~ 200
Item
Input Data
DP Interdigit Time Selection
The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum
pause time between dial pulses. Use this
Program to select either Pattern A or
pattern B.
02
Prepause Time Selection
Specifies the loop open time for a hookflash
signal sent to the Tie Line when the Recall
key on a multiline terminal is pressed. A
Single Line Telephone (SLT) generates a
hookflash to the Tie Line when a SLT
hookflash is assigned.
03
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
Specifies the time before a UNIVERGE
SV8100 system answer (Off-Hook) is
recognized as an answer.
04
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection
Specifies the circuit disconnect detected on
the Tie Line on the distant system side is
recognized as Tie Line.
2 - 626
0 = Pattern A
(Pattern A: 10pps – 650ms,
20pps – 500ms)
1 = Pattern B
(Pattern B: 10pps – 800ms,
20pps – 800ms)
1~4
(1~4 = 0.5~2.0 seconds)
(5~15 = 3.0~13 seconds)
(0 = No Setting)
Default
1
0
(No Setting)
0~15
(130ms~1950ms)
(0 = No Setting)
4
(520ms)
0~15
(130ms~1950ms)
(0 = No Setting)
4
(520ms)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
05
Item
Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection
Specifies the time after the incoming signal
from another system is detected before the
acknowledge signal is sent out.
Input Data
[Wink Start]
1~15
(130ms~1950ms)
(0 = No Setting)
[Delay]
1~15
(30ms~450ms)
(0 = No Setting)
06
Loop Off-Guard Time Selection
Assign loop off-guard time to prevent noise
that could cause the system to be unable to
answer an incoming Tie line.
07
Length of Wink Signal Selection
Specifies the time a wink pulse is sent to
another system.
08
Length of Delay Signal Selection
Specifies the time a delay pulse is sent to
another system.
09
Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection
To specify the time, in seconds, that an
address signal is missing during the
incoming call detection process before an
error tone is returned to the other system.
10
Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout
Selection
To specify a maximum time, in seconds, for
receiving an acknowledgment signal from a
distant system before sending a busy tone.
11
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
Specifies the minimum time before a
disconnected circuit can be accessed
again.
12
Automatic Release Signal Detection
Selection
Specifies the signal detection time for
release of a Tie Line after a disconnect
signal is received from the distant CO or
PBX.
13
Programming Manual
Pause Time Selection
Default
[Wink Start]
3
(390ms)
[Delay]
3
(90ms)
1~4
(0.5sec~2.0sec)
5~15
(3sec~13sec)
(0 = No Setting)
4
(2.0sec)
0~15
(30ms~480ms)
5
(180ms)
1~15
(300ms~4.5sec)
(0 = No Setting)
1
(300ms)
0=8
1~15
(1~15 seconds)
6
(6 seconds)
0=8
1~15
(1~15 seconds)
7
(7 seconds)
1~15
(0.1~1.5 seconds)
(0 = No Setting)
3
(0.3 second)
1~14
(50~700ms)
15 = ∞ (No limit)
(0 = No Setting)
7
(350ms)
1~15
(500~7500ms)
6
(3000ms)
2 - 627
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
14
Hookflash Time Selection 1
0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
9
(600ms)
15
Hookflash Time Selection 2
0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
14
(3.0sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 628
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 81-12 : Trunk Pad Level Data Setup to define the various initial data for
TLI/DTI/DID/BRT/PRT package.
Input Data
Trunk Number
Item
No.
1~200
Item
01
Internal Transmit Pad Level
02
Internal Receive Pad Level
03
External (tandem) Transmit Pad Level
04
External (tandem) Receive Pad Level
Input Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
+2dB
+4dB
+6dB
+8dB
+12dB
+16dB
+3dB
-3dB
0dB
Default
3 = +8dB
3 = +8dB
8 = 0dB
8 = 0dB
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 629
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 630
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which
are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are
grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1~4), also called patterns, that consist of a
combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program
22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each Range there are three
frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to
choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two
frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone.
These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in
Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency
Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The
chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each
Range.
Program
82
Input Data
Incoming Ringing Tone Number
1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)
2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern
Ringing Tone Type Number
1 = High
2 = Mid
3 = Low
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
01
Frequency 1
02
Frequency 2
Input Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
520Hz
540Hz
660Hz
760Hz
1100Hz
1400Hz
2000Hz
2 - 631
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Modulation
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No Modulation
8Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
Envelope
Default
Incoming Ringing Tone
Number
Tone
Type
Frequency 1
(Hz)
Frequency 2
(Hz)
Modulation
Pattern 1
(Trunk Incoming)
High
Mid
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
Pattern 2
(Trunk Incoming)
High
Mid
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
Pattern 3
(Trunk Incoming)
High
Mid
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
16Hz Modulation
Pattern 4
(Trunk Incoming)
High
Mid
Low
2000
1400
1100
760
660
540
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
Pattern 5
Intercom Incoming Pattern
High
Mid
Low
1100
660
520
1400
760
660
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
8Hz Modulation
Pattern 6
Alarm Sensor Pattern
High
Mid
Low
760
760
760
760
760
760
No Modulation
No Modulation
No Modulation
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
Selectable Ring Tones
2 - 632
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for
special functions on a DSS console.
Input Data
Item No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
ACD Log In
0~7
1
02
ACD Log Out
0~7
4
03
ACD Emergency Call
0~7
3
LED Pattern 0 : [OFF]
On
Off
LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)]
On
Off
LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)]
On
Off
LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]
On
Off
Programming Manual
2 - 633
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)]
On
Off
LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)]
On
Off
LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]
On
Off
LED Pattern 7 : [ON]
On
Off
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
2 - 634
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the LCA.
Input Data
Item No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Companding Method Type
0 = u-law
1 = A-law
0
02
Ringing Frequency
0 = 25Hz
1 = 20Hz
2 = 16Hz
1 (20Hz)
03
Minimum Break Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
2 (10ms)
04
Maximum Break Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
20(100ms)
05
Minimum Make Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
2 (10ms)
06
Maximum Make Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
20 (100ms)
07
Minimum Hook Flash Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
21 (105ms)
08
Maximum Hook Flash Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
200 (1000ms)
09
Minimum Ground Flash Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
21 (105ms)
10
Minimum Off-Hook Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
21 (105ms)
11
No Detection Time after Off-Hook
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
60 (300ms)
12
No Detection Time after Pulse Dial
Detection
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
70 (350ms)
13
Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal
Time
1~255 (10ms~2550ms)
60 (600ms)
14
Ring, Message Wait Period Time
1~255 (5ms~1275ms)
150 (750ms)
2 - 635
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 636
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter
value of the CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.
Input Data
Station Port Number
CODEC Filter Type
0 = No filter
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
1~ 256
Default
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Programming Manual
2 - 637
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
Level:
MF
Description
Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone
volume.
There are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or
analog trunk.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Input
Digital
Sidetone Level
Analog
Sidetone Level
0
-54 (dB)
-54 (dB)
1
-48 (dB)
-54 (dB)
2
-42 (dB)
-54 (dB)
3
-36 (dB)
-48 (dB)
4
-30 (dB)
-42 (dB)
5
-24 (dB)
-36 (dB)
6
(default)
-18 (dB)
-30 (dB)
7
-12 (dB)
-24 (dB)
8
-12 (dB)
-18 (dB)
9
-12 (dB)
-12 (dB)
Description
Sidetone Volume
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 638
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data
(when Program 82-07 is set to 4).
Input Data
Programming Manual
Item
Name
Input Data
Default
01
B1 Filter Setup(1)
0~255
42
02
B1 Filter Setup(2)
0~255
251
03
B1 Filter Setup(3)
0~255
93
04
B1 Filter Setup(4)
0~255
188
05
B1 Filter Setup(5)
0~255
77
06
B1 Filter Setup(6)
0~255
195
07
B1 Filter Setup(7)
0~255
58
08
B1 Filter Setup(8)
0~255
76
09
B1 Filter Setup(9)
0~255
166
10
B1 Filter Setup(10)
0~255
168
11
B1 Filter Setup(11)
0~255
244
12
B1 Filter Setup(12)
0~255
255
13
B1 Filter Setup(13)
0~255
34
14
B1 Filter Setup(14)
0~255
240
15
B2 Filter Setup(1)
0~255
61
16
B2 Filter Setup(2)
0~255
1
2 - 639
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 640
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-11 : LCA Initial Data Setup to define the various timers for LCA
Packages.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Description
01
Bounce Protect Time
Specify a time for detection of a
valid off-Hook indication that is long
enough to prevent an unintentional
bounce of the receiver from being
detected as a new Off-Hook
indication from a Single Line
Telephone.
0 = No Setting
1~15 = 100ms~1.5sec
3
02
HookFlash Start Time
Specify the minimum hookflash
time from a Single Line Telephone
or analog Voice Mail system before
it is detected as the beginning of a
valid hookflash.
0 = 40ms
1~15 = 90ms~790ms
5
03
HookFlash End Time
Specify the maximum hookflash
duration from a Single Line
Telephone to receive a second dial
tone.
0 = HST+0ms
1~15 = HST+100ms~HST+1500ms
(HST=Hookflash Start Time)
7
Input
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 641
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup to define the various initial data for
OPX packages.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Description
01
Bounce Protect Time
Specify a time for detection of a valid
off-Hook indication that is long enough
to prevent an unintentional bounce of
the receiver from being detected as a
new Off-Hook indication from a single
line telephone.
0 = No Setting
1~15 = 100ms~1.5sec
3
02
HookFlash Start Time
Specify the minimum hookflash time
from a single line telephone or analog
Voice Mail system before it is detected
as the beginning of a valid hookflash.
0 = 40ms
1~15 = 90ms~790ms
5
03
HookFlash End Time
Specify the maximum hookflash
duration from a single line telephone to
receive a second dial tone.
0 = HST+0ms
1~15=HST+100ms~HST+1500ms
(HST=Hookflash Start Time)
7
Input
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 642
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic
information of the H.323 Trunk.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
02
Number of G.711 audio frames
1~4
3
03
G.711 VAD mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
04
G.711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
05
Number of G.729 audio frames
1~6
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms
3
06
G.729 VAD mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
07
G.729 Jitter Buffer( min)
0~270ms
30
08
G.729 Jitter Buffer (average)
0~270ms
60
09
G.729 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~270ms
120
11
Number of G.723 audio frames
1~2
1
12
G.723 VAD mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
13
--- Not Used ---
Programming Manual
Input Data
Default
84
2 - 643
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Default
15
Jitter Buffer Mode
1 = Fixed
2 = Self adjusting (silence period)
3 = Self adjusting
3
16
G.711 Jitter Buffer( min)
0~160
30
17
G.711 Jitter Buffer (average)
0~160
60
18
G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160
120
19
G.723 Jitter Buffer( min)
0~270
30
20
G.723 Jitter Buffer (average)
0~270
60
21
G.723 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~270
120
22
VAD Threshold
0~30 (-19db~ +10db and self
adjustment)
0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9db (-21dbm)
30 = 10db (-20dbm)
20
23
Idle Noise Level
-5000dbm ~ -7000dbm
24
Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
25
Echo Canceller Tail Size
1 = 4ms
2 = 8ms
3 = 16ms
4 = 32ms
5 = 64ms
6 = 128ms
6
26
Echo Canceller NLP Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
28
Echo Canceller NLP Noise
Setting
0 = Automatic level adjustment
1 = Fixed level
0
30
TX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm~ +20dbm)
20
31
RX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm~ +20dbm)
20
Priority CODEC setting
0~3
0 = G.711
1 = G.723
2 = G.729
3 = G.722
0
33
Priority of voice encoding
method.
2 - 644
Input Data
7000
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
34
--- Not Used ---
35
--- Not Used ---
36
The Maximum FAX
Transmission Rate
0 = V.27ter, 2400bps
1 = V.27ter, 4800bps
2 = V.29, 7200bps
3 = V.29, 9600bps
4 = V.17, 12000bps
5 = V.17, 14400bps
37
FAX FIFO Considering Delay
Time
0~600ms
300
38
Size of FAX Packet
20~48 bytes
20
39
FAX Modem Transmission
Level
0~13 (0dBm ~ -13dBm)
9
40
FAX Modem Carrier Signal
Detection Threshold
0 = -26dBm
1 = -33dBm
2 = -43dBm
1
41
FAX Communication no
Communication Time-Out
10~32000 seconds
30
43
High-speed Signal Data (fax
picture signal) Packet Length
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
4
44
Low-speed Signal Data (FAX
Procedure Signal)
0~5
0
45
High-speed Signal Data (FAX
Procedure Signal)
0~2
0
46
TCF Operation Setting
1 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax
is locally generated and checked.
2 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax
is sent over the network.
1
47
The Maximum, Low-speed
Signal Data (Size of Packet)
1~65535 bytes
1
48
Network Transmission Timeout
10~32000 seconds
150
49
Eflag Beginning Timer
0~65535
2600
50
Eflag Stop Timer
0~65535
2300
51
The Former Line Substitution
of Scanning Line
0
1
= Disable
= Enable
5
1
(FAX Relay item)
Programming Manual
2 - 645
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
52
Item
Input Data
Default
1
Eflag Setting at Head DIS
(FAX Relay item)
53
(FAX Relay item)
54
1
TFOP Protocol
NSF Superscription
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
(FAX Relay item)
55
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
1
56
Enable Modified Read Code
1
57
NSF Country Code Setting
58
NSF Vendor Code Setting
59
FAX Relay Function
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Each port mode
0
60
Echo Canceller Type
0~3
0
61
Auto Gain Control
0~5
0
62
DTMF Relay Mode
0 = VoIP
1 = RFC2833
2 = H.245
3 = Disable
0
Set up information of VoIP is set
by PRG 84-06-10.
0~65535
0
0
63
Number of G.722 audio frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
64
G.722 Voice Activity Detection
Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
65
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
66
G.722 Jitter Buffer (average)
0~160ms
60
67
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
2 - 646
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic
setup information of H.225 and H.245.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
H.225
0~255sec
180
02
H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer
0~255sec
9
03
H.225 Setup Timer
0~255sec
4
04
H.225 Info Ack Timer
0~255sec
9
05
H.225 Call Proceeding Timer
0~255sec
10
07
H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer
0~255sec
5
08
H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count
0~255sec
3
09
H.245 Capability Exchange Timer
0~255sec
5
10
H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer
0~255sec
50
11
H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer
0~255sec
50
12
H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer
0~255sec
50
13
H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer
0~255sec
50
14
H.245 Maintenance Loop
0~255sec
50
15
RAS GRQ Timer
0~255sec
5
16
GRQ Retry Count
0~255
2
17
RAS RRQ Timer
0~255sec
5
18
RRQ Retry Count
0~255
3
19
RAS URQ Timer
0~255sec
3
20
URQ Retry Count
0~255
1
21
RAS ARQ Timer
0~255sec
5
Programming Manual
2 - 647
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
22
ARQ Retry Count
0~255
2
23
RAS BRQ Timer
0~255sec
5
24
BRQ Retry Count
0~255
2
25
RAS IRR Timer
0~255sec
5
26
IRR Retry Count
0~255
2
27
RAS DRQ Timer
0~255sec
8
28
DRQ Retry Count
0~255
2
29
RAS LRQ Timer
0~255sec
5
30
LRQ Retry Count
0~255
2
31
RAS RAI Timer
0~255sec
3
32
RAI Retry Count
0~255
2
33
Call Signaling Port Number
0~65535:
0~1719,
1721~65535
1730
35
Fast Start Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable0
1
36
RAS Unicast Port Number
0~65535
37
Terminal Type setting
0~255
20001
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 648
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup to define the details of IP
Terminals and Adapters.
Input Data
Terminal Type
Item
No.
Programming Manual
1 = Dterm IP / UNIVERGE SV8100 Multiline
Terminal with IP Adapter
2 = Soft Phone
3 = Bundle IP Phone
Item
Input Data
06
Area Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
10
Signaling Server Port
0~65535
11
Negotiation Timer
0~255 (sec)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Japan
USA
Australia
EU
Asia
Other Country
Germany
Italy
Netherlands
Austria
Belgium
Spain
Sweden
UK
Denmark
Greece
Switzerland
RSA
New Zealand
Default
1
5029
5
2 - 649
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 650
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-06 : PVA Data Setting
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-06 : PVA Data Setting to set up threshold levels of every CD-PVAA
slot.
(This program is not available with V1000)
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
Item
01~24
Input Data
Default
Description
01
RTP Port Number
0~65534
10020
02
RTCP Port Number
RTP Port Number + 1
10021
04
Fract Lost Threshold
0~100%
0
The data is sent to the
CD-CP00-US if the value
exceeds the defined value.
05
Packets Lost
Threshold
0~16777215
0
The data is sent to the
CD-CP00-US if the value
exceeds the defined value.
07
Jitter Threshold
0~4294967295 (sec)
0
The data is sent to the
CD-CP00-US if the value
exceeds the defined value.
09
Delay LSR Threshold
0~4294967295 (sec)
0
The data is sent to the
CD-CP00-US if the value
exceeds the defined value.
16
IMCP Redirect
0=No
1=Yes
0
The VOIP blade supports
sending the Internet Message
Control Protocol (IMCP)
redirect message.
Programming Manual
It has to be RTP Port Number
+ 1.
2 - 651
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 652
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to
Central Firmware Download for IP Phones.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Server Mode
0 = TFTP
1 = FTP
02
File Server IP Address
0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254
Default
0
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1~191.255255.254
192.0.1.1~223.255.254.254
03
Login Name
Up to 20 Characters
None
04
Password
Up to 20 Characters
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 653
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-08 : Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup to set up the directory and filename for
the firmware that is downloaded to IP phones.
Input Data
Terminal Type
1 = IP Terminal
2 = IP Adapter
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
Firmware File Name
Input Data
Up to 30 Characters
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 654
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
VLAN
(Future Use)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0
02
VLAN ID
(Future Use)
1~4094
0
03
Priority
(Future Use)
0~7
0
Conditions
System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 655
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-10 : ToS Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.
Input Data
Protocol Type
Item
No.
2 - 656
1 = Not Used
2 = Not Used
3 = Voice Control
4 = H.323
5 = RTP/RTCP
6 = SIP
7 = CCISoIP
8 = DT700 MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = NetLink
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
01
ToS Mode
0 = Disable (Invalid)
1 = IP Precedence
2 = Diffserv
0
When Input Data is set to 1,
Item No. 07 is invalid.
When Data is set to 2, Item
No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid.
02
Priority, IP Precedence
0~7
0 = Low
7 = High
0
1 = Router queuing priority
03
Low Delay
0~1
0 = Normal Delay, Low
Delay
0
1 = Optimize for low delay
routing
04
Wideband
(Throughout)
0~1
0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
0
1 = Optimize for high
bandwidth routing
05
High Reliability
0~1
0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability
0
1 = Optimize for reliability
routing
07
Priority (D.S.C.P. Differentiated Services
Code Point)
0~63
0
DSCP (Differentiated
Services Code Point)
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 657
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP
packet) encoding parameters.
Input Data
Type
Item
No.
2 - 658
1~5
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Number of G711 Audio
Frames
2~3
(2 = 20ms, 3 = 30ms)
3
02
G711 VAD mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
03
G711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer Min
0~160ms
30
05
G.711 Jitter Buffer Average
0~160ms
60
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer Max
0~160ms
120
07
Number of G.729 Audio
Frames
1~4
(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)
3
08
G.729 VAD mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
09
G.729 Jitter Buffer Min
0~200ms
30
10
G.729 Jitter Buffer Average
0~200ms
60
11
G.729 Jitter Buffer Max
0~200ms
120
17
Jitter Buffer Mode
1
2
= Static
= Immediate
2
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
18
VAD Threshold
0~30 = -19db~+10db
0 = Adaptec
Threshold
1 = -19db(-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9dbm(-21dbm)
30 = 10dbm(-20dbm)
20
26
TX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm~
+20dbm)
14
0
1
:
14
:
19
20
27
RX Gain
Audio Capability Priority
= 0dbm
= 5dbm
= 6dbm
0~40 (-20dbm~
+20dbm)
0
1
:
14
:
19
20
28
= -14dbm
= -13dbm
14
= -14dbm
= -13dbm
= 0dbm
= 5dbm
= 6dbm
0 = G.711_PT
2 = G.729_PT
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 659
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 660
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the
basic CODEC options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Number of G.711 Audio
Frames
1~4
(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)
2
02
G.711 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
03
G.711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
20
05
G.711 Jitter Buffer
(average)
0~160ms
40
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
80
07
Number of G.729 Audio
Frames
1~6
(1 = 10ms, 6 = 60ms)
2
08
G.729 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
09
G.729 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~270ms
20
10
G.729 Jitter Buffer
(average)
0~270ms
40
11
G.729 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~270ms
80
17
Jitter Buffer Mode
1
2
3
3
Programming Manual
Default
= Fixed
= Adaptive during
silence
= Adaptive Immediately
2 - 661
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 662
Item
Input Data
Default
18
VAD Threshold
0~30 (-19db~+10db)
0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
2 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30 = 10dbm (-20dbm)
20
26
TX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
27
RX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
28
Audio Capability Priority
0 = G.711_PT
1 = G.723_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726_PT
5 = Not Used
0
31
DTMF Payload Number
96~127
32
DTMF Relay Mode
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
0
33
Number of G.722 Audio
Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
34
G.722 VAD Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
110
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer
(average)
0~160ms
60
37
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
38
Number of G.726 Audio
Frames
1~4
(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)
3
39
G.726 VAD Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
40
G.726 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
41
G.726 Jitter Buffer
(average)
0~160ms
60
42
G.726 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
43
--- Not Used ---
44
--- Not Used ---
45
--- Not Used ---
46
--- Not Used ---
47
--- Not Used ---
48
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 663
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup
for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Default
7
INVITE ReTx Count
Specifies the number of
times the INVITE
message is sent.
02
Specifies the number of
times Request message
except INVITE are sent.
03
11
Request ReTx Count
0~255
7
Response ReTx Count
Specifies the number of
times the Response
message is sent.
04
2 - 664
Request ReTx Start
Time
5(500ms)
0~65535
(0ms~6553.5sec.)
05
Request Maximum
ReTx Interval
06
SIP Trunk Port Number
1~65535
5060
07
Session Timer Value
1~65535
0
08
Minimum Session
Timer Value
1~65535
1800
09
Called Party
Information
0 = Request URI
1 = To Header
0
10
URL Type
0 = SIP-URL
1 = TEL-URL
0
40(4000ms)
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 665
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive
Configuration of the H.323/SIP phone.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Registration Information Automatic Deletion
When set to 1 (Enable), the registration information
is automatically deleted (for H.323).
02
Keep Alive Message Interval
Default
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
1~10 minutes
1
1~10 seconds
5
1~5 times
3
Time interval that system sends a Ping to the
terminal.
03
Keep Alive Message Timeout
Time that system waits for a Ping response from the
terminal.
04
Keep Alive Timeout
How many times the system waits for a non
response before determining the terminal is down.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 666
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain to set the Limiter Control Gain
configuration of VoIP.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
RX Limiter Control Gain
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction
of IP
PCM.
This option adds gain to the voice input from
the LAN and removes it from the voice output
to highway.
02
TX Limiter Control Gain
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction
of PCM
IP.
Input Data
0~30 (-15dbm ~ +15dbm)
0 = -15dbm
1 = -14dbm
:
15 = 0dbm
:
29 = 14dbm
30 = 15dbm
Default
15
(0dbm)
15
(0dbm)
This option adds the gain to the voice input
from highway and removes it from the voice
output to the LAN.
03
RX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB)
This option controls the limiter gain for a
COIU call in the IP to PCM direction.
04
TX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB)
This option controls the limiter gain for a
COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.
15
(0dbm)
15
(0dbm)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 667
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup (IN Level)
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup to configure echo
cancellation.
Input Data
Type
Item
No.
4~5
(Type 1, 2 and 3 are not used)
Type 4 = Analog trunks
Type 5 = Digital/MEGACO trunks
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Type 4 = 1
Type 5 = 1
02
Echo Canceller Tail Size
1 = 8ms
2 = 16ms
3 = 32ms
4 = 64ms
5 = 128ms
Type 4 = 5
Type 5 = 1
03
Echo Canceller NLP Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Type 4 = 1
Type 5 = 0
04
Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting
0 = Adaptive
1 = Fixed
0
05
Echo Canceller NLP Noise Level
40~70
(-40dbm~ -70dbm)
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 668
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define
the CODEC information for the SIP extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Number of G.711 Audio
Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
2
02
G.711 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
03
G.711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
20
05
G.711 Jitter Buffer
(Average)
0~160ms
40
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
80
07
Number of G.729 Audio
Frames
1~6
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms
2
08
G.729 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
09
G.729 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~270ms
20
10
G.729 Jitter Buffer
(average)
0~270ms
40
11
G.729 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~270ms
80
2 - 669
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
17
Item
Jitter Buffer Mode
1
2
3
2 - 670
Input Data
Default
= Static
= Adaptive during
Silence
= Adaptive
Immediately
3
18
VAD Threshold
0~30
20
26
TX Gain
0~30 (-19db ~ +10db,
Auto)
0 = Auto Adjust
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = +9db (-21dbm)
30 = +10db (-20dbm)
20
27
RX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm ~
+20dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = +19dbm
40 = +20dbm
20
28
Audio Capability Priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
31
DTMF Payload Number
96~127
96
32
DTMF Relay Mode
0
1
0
33
Number of G.722 Audio
Frames
1~4
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
34
G.722 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0
1
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
=
=
=
=
=
=
G.711_PT
G.723_PT
G.729_PT
G.722
G.726
Not Used
= Disable
= RFC2833
3
10ms
20ms
30ms
40ms
= Disabled
= Enabled
0
30
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer
(Average)
0~160ms
60
37
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
38
Number of G.726 Audio
Frames
1~4
(1 = 10ms, 4 = 40ms)
3
39
G.726 Voice Activity
Detection Mode
0
1
0
40
G.726 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
41
G.726 Jitter Buffer
(Average)
0~160ms
60
42
G.726 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
43
--- Not Used ---
44
--- Not Used ---
45
--- Not Used ---
46
--- Not Used ---
47
--- Not Used ---
48
--- Not Used ---
= Disabled
= Enabled
Conditions
These commands are for SIP analog extensions.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 671
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy
information, session timers, called party information and expire value of invite.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Registrar/Proxy Port
1~65535
5070
02
Session Timer Value
0~65535
180
03
Minimum Session Timer
Value
0~65535
180
04
Called Party Info
0
1
05
Expire Value of Invite
0~256 (seconds)
180s
1~3600 (seconds)
180s
= Request URI
= To Header
0
Arrival of a message is
ended when this time
expires and there is no cut
from the caller.
06
Expire Value of Invite
(send)
The expiration time is set
for the Invite message.
Conditions
These commands are for SIP analog extensions.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 672
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the
codec parameters of the PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA, and PZ-128IPLA.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Number of G.711 Audio Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
02
G.711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
03
G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer Min
0~160ms
30
05
G711 Jitter Buffer Average
0~160ms
60
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer Max
0~160ms
120
07
G.729 Audio Frame Number
1~6
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms
3
08
G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
09
G729 Jitter Buffer Min
0~270ms
30
10
G729 Jitter Buffer Average
0~270ms
60
11
G729 Jitter Buffer Max
0~270ms
120
Programming Manual
2 - 673
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 674
Item
Input Data
Default
12
G.723 Audio Frame Number
1 = 30ms
2 = 60ms
1
13
G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
14
G723 Jitter Buffer Min
0~270ms
30
15
G723 Jitter Buffer Average
0~270ms
60
16
G.723 Jitter Buffer Max
0~270ms
120
17
TX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm)
0 = -20 dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = +19 dbm
40 = +20 dbm
20
18
RX Gain
0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm)
0 = -20 dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = +19 dbm
40 = +20 dbm
20
19
1st Priority of Audio Capability
0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = Not Used
0
20
2nd Priority of Audio Capability
0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = Not Used
1
21
DTMF Relay Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Inbound (RFC2833)
2 = Outbound (H.245)
0
22
Jitter Buffer Mode
1 = Static
2 = Silence
3 = Immediate
3
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
23
Item
Voice Activity Detection Threshold
0
1
:
20
:
29
30
Input Data
Default
= Self adjustment
= -19dbm (-49dbm)
20
= 0dbm (-30dbm)
= +9dbm (-21dbm)
= +10dbm (-20dbm)
24
Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
25
NLP Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
26
UDP Checksum Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
27
G.722 Audio Frame Number
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
28
G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
29
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
30
G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average)
0~160ms
60
31
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
32
G.726 Audio Frame Number
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
33
G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
34
G.726 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
35
G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average)
0~160ms
60
36
G.726 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
37
--- Not Used ---
38
--- Not Used ---
39
--- Not Used ---
Programming Manual
2 - 675
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
40
--- Not Used ---
41
--- Not Used ---
42
FAX Relay Mode
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Each Port Mode (each
extension)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 676
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DT700
Multiline logon information.
Input Data
Personal ID Index
1~512
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
User ID
Input Data
Default
Up to 32 characters
No Setting
Up to 16 characters
No Setting
Input the User ID when using manual or auto
registration (10-46-01).
02
Password
Input the Password when using manual or
auto registration (10-46-01).
03
User ID Omission
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
04
Log Off
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
05
Nick Name
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Up to 32 characters
No Setting
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 677
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic
information for the DT700 Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Registration Expire Timer
Input Data
Default
60~65535 (sec)
180
60~65535 (sec)
3600
60~65535 (sec)
180
60~65535 (sec)
180
0~65535 (sec)
180
0x00~0xFF
(0~9, A~F)
00
0~65535 (sec)
0
The Expires value of the REGISTER
message which received from DT700
terminal is out of range or when the Expire
value is not set up, in case it assigns the
effective time to the DT700 terminal. The
timer for supervising whether DT700 terminal
is connected or not.
02
Subscribe Expire Timer
The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and
receive the terminal operation instructions
between the Main Device and DT700
terminal.
03
Session Expire Timer
Set effective time for supervising the Voice
Path.
04
Minimum Session Expire Timer
Set minimum value of effective time for
supervising the Voice Path.
05
Invite Expire Timer
Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call
when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DT700
terminal.
06
Signal Type of Service
Set Type of Service value which applied to
send SIP Message Packet from DT700
terminal to Main Device.
07
2 - 678
Error Display Timer
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
08
Digest Authorization Registration Expire
Timer
0~4294967295 (sec)
0
10
Number of Password Retries
0~255
0
0
Input the number of times an incorrect
password can be entered when the security
key is pressed.
11
Password Lock Time
0~120
12
Reference Number
Up to 32 digits
(0~9, , #, P, R, @)
13
Media Type of Service
0x00~0xFF
(0~9, A~F)
00
14
Refer Expire Timer
0~65535 (sec)
60
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 679
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the
codec of each type of DT700 Multiline Telephone.
Input Data
Type
Item
No.
01
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
Item
Number of G.711 Audio Frames
Input the amount of audio in the packets
when using the G.711 CODEC.
02
--- Not Used ---
03
G.711 Type
This decides the G.711 type. In North
America, typically u-law is used.
2 - 680
Input Data
Default
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
2
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer Min
0~160ms
20
05
G.711 Jitter Buffer Average
0~160ms
40
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer Max
0~160ms
80
07
Number of G.729 Audio Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
2
08
--- Not Used ---
09
G729 Jitter Buffer Min
0~270ms
20
10
G729 Jitter Buffer Average
0~270ms
40
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Item
No.
Item
Default
11
G729 Jitter Buffer Max
0~270ms
80
17
Jitter Buffer Mode
1 = Static
2 = Adaptive during
silence
3 = Adaptive immediate
3
18
--- Not Used ---
19
Idle Noise Level
5000~7000
(-5000dbm~ 7000dbm)
20
Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
21
Echo Canceller Tail Size
1 = 4ms
2 = 8ms
3 = 16ms
4 = 32ms
5 = 64ms
6 = 128ms
6
22
Echo Canceller NLP Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
24
Echo Canceller CNG Configuration
0 = Adaptive
1 = Fixed
0
26
TX Gain
0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
0~3
0 = G.711_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
0
Input the TX gain from the IPLA to the
telephone.
27
RX Gain
Input the RX gain from the IPLA to the
telephone.
28
Programming Manual
Input Data
Audio Capability Priority
7000
2 - 681
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
29
30
Item
Input Data
Default
0~3
0 = Auto
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
0
Auto (0) means that the system automatically
decides a type (Type 4 or Type 5) of echo
canceller on PRG84-17 for a telephone on
the basis of a seized trunk.
Auto Gain Control
0~5
0
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
Echo Canceller Configuration Type
Auto (0) means that the system automatically
decides a type (Type 4 or Type 5) of echo
canceller on PRG84-17 for a telephone on
the basis of a seized trunk.
2 - 682
32
G.722 Audio Frame Number
33
--- Not Used ---
34
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average)
0~160ms
60
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 683
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the CODEC
with NetLink.
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 684
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Number of G.711 Audio Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
02
G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
03
G.711 Type
0 = A-law
1 = u-law
1
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer Min
0~160ms
30
05
G.711 Jitter Buffer Average
0~160ms
60
06
G.711 Jitter Buffer Max
0~160ms
120
07
Number of G.729 Audio Frames
1~6
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms
3
08
G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
09
G729 Jitter Buffer Min
0~270ms
30
10
G729 Jitter Buffer Average
0~270ms
60
11
G729 Jitter Buffer Max
0~270ms
120
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Programming Manual
Item
Input Data
Default
12
Number of G.723 Audio Frames
1~2
1 = 30ms
2 = 60ms
1
13
G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
14
G.723 Jitter Buffer Min
0~270ms
30
15
G.723 Jitter Buffer Average
0~270ms
60
16
G.723 Jitter Buffer Max
0~270ms
120
17
Jitter Buffer Mode
1 = Static
2 = Adaptive during
silence
3 = Adaptive immediate
3
18
Voice Activity Detection Threshold
0~30 (-19db~ +10db)
0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9db (-21dbm)
30 = 10db (-20dbm)
20
19
Idle Noise Level
5000~7000
(-5000dbm~ -7000dbm)
20
Echo Canceller Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
21
Echo Canceller Tail Size
1 = 4ms
2 = 8ms
3 = 16ms
4 = 32ms
5 = 64ms
6 = 128ms
6
22
Echo Canceller NLP Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
24
Echo Canceller CNG Configuration
0 = Adaptive
1 = Fixed
0
7000
2 - 685
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
2 - 686
Item
Input Data
Default
26
TX Gain
0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
27
RX Gain
0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm)
0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm
20
28
Audio Capability Priority
0~3
0 = G.711_PT
1 = G.723_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726
5 = Not Used
0
29
Echo Canceller Configuration Type
0~3
0 = Auto
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
0
30
Auto Gain Control
0~5
0
31
DTMF Relay Mode
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
0
32
Fax Relay Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Each port mode
0
33
Number of G.722 Audio Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
34
G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average)
0~160ms
60
37
G.722 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
38
Number of G.726 Audio Frames
1~4
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
3
39
G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0
40
G.726 Jitter Buffer (min)
0~160ms
30
41
G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average)
0~160ms
60
42
G.726 Jitter Buffer (max)
0~160ms
120
43
--- Not Used ---
44
--- Not Used ---
45
--- Not Used ---
46
--- Not Used ---
47
--- Not Used ---
48
--- Not Used ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 687
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-26 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup to set the IP address of IPL and the port.
Index 1
Item
No.
2 - 688
Slot Number
1
VoIP GW Number
01~08
Item
Input Data
Default
Slot 1 = 172.16.0.20
:
Slot 4 = 172.16.0.44
VoIP GW Number 1~8:
172.16.0.20~172.16.16.0.27
01
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
02
RTP Port Number
0~65534
VoIP GW1 = 10020
VoIP GW2 = 10052
VoIP GW3 = 10084
VoIP GW4 = 10116
VoIP GW5 = 10148
VoIP GW6 = 10180
VoIP GW7 = 10212
VoIP GW8 = 10244
03
RTCP Port Number
(RTP Port Number +1)
0~65534
VoIP GW1 = 10021
VoIP GW2 = 10053
VoIP GW3 = 10085
VoIP GW4 = 10117
VoIP GW5 = 10149
VoIP GW6 = 10181
VoIP GW7 = 10213
VoIP GW8 = 10245
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 689
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-27 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode
of the IPL.
Index 1
Slot Number
1
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
DTMF Relay Setup
0 = DTMF Relay disabled
1 = In-Band DTMF Relay -Do not
report to host processor
2 = Out of Band Relay - Do not
pass tones as voice
2
02
Setup CODEC Mode
0 = Default
1 = Mode 1 (G.723)
0
Default means the system uses another
CODEC except G.723.
Mode 1 means the system uses all
CODECs, but the limitation of the total
number of available DSP will be applied.
2 - 690
03
SRTP Mode Setup
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
04
SRTP Mode Select
0 = Mode1
0
06
H.245 Port Number
0~65535
10100
07
Preparation Completion Response
Port Number
0~65535
4000
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 691
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware
name to download for the IP Phone.
Index 1
Terminal Type
1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1
2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT1D/ITL-24PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Firmware Directory
Maximum 64 characters
No Setting
02
Firmware File Name
Maximum 30 characters
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
2 - 692
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the
CODEC data of the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast.
Index 1
Type
1 = Type 1 (Multicast)
2 = Type 2 (reserved)
3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Audio Capability
1 = G.711 A-law
2 = G.711 u-law
3 = G.729
4 = G.723
5 = G.722
2
02
Number of Audio Frames
1~6
1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 693
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 694
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the
system.
Program
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Year
00~99
00 (No Setting)
02
Month
01~12
00 (No Setting)
03
Day
01~31
00 (No Setting)
Input Data
Default
90
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 695
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For
password entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:
Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0~9, # and )
Password level
The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The
SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type
(white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level.
You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the
program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs, and SB
level password can access to SB programs only.)
CAUTION
Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Programming or WebPro Programming to
make a backup copy of your system data.
Input Data
User Number
2 - 696
1~8
Item
No.
Item
01
User Name
Maximum 10 characters
02
Password
Up to 8 digits
03
User Level
0 = Prohibited User
1 = MF (Manufacturer Level)
2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Level 1)
Input Data
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Default
User
No.
User Name
Password
Level
1
necii
47544
1 (MF)
Manufacturer Level - Access to all
system programs.
2
tech
12345678
2 (IN)
Installer Level - Access to all IN
level programs.
3
ADMIN1
0000
3 (SA)
System Administrator Level 1 Restricted Access
4
ADMIN2
9999
4 (SB)
System Administrator Level 2 More Restricted Access
5
USER1
1111
5 (UA)
User Programming Level 1
6
5 (UA)
User Programming Level 1
7
5 (UA)
User Programming Level 1
8
5 (UA)
User Programming Level 1
Level Description
Conditions
More than one extension can be in the programming mode.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 697
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-03 : Save Data
Level:
SA
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the USB Flash Drive.
This program should be used after changing the programmed data.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Save Data
Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
When reloading a customer database, the system must be reset (either using
Program 90-08 or power down/power up) before all uploaded programming takes
affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 698
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-04 : Load Data
Level:
SA
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted USB Flash
Drive to the SRAM and Flash ROM in the system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Load Data
Input Data
Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
After uploading the programming, reset the system and wait a few minutes for the
system to reset completely before accessing any line or special system feature.
Otherwise, some unusual LED indications may be experienced.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 699
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-05 : Slot Control
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) blades (slots 1~24).
Delete allows you to completely uninstall the blade. You should do this if you want to
remove a blade and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If
a different type of interface blade is being installed in a slot previously used (e.g.,
changing from a LCA to an DLCA blade), the slot should be deleted (option 1) first
before installing the new interface blade.
Reset allows you to send a reset code.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Slot Control
1 = Delete
2 = Reset
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out
Input Data
Slot Number (1~24)
Conditions
When you delete or reset a blade, you must first remove it from its slot then run
Program 90-05. When reusing the slot for another blade, you must plug the blade
in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again.
When you delete or reset a blade, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is
set back to default.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 700
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-06 : Trunk Control
Level:
SA
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block
a blade from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the blade switch down). Once
busied out, none of the ports on the blade can be used for new calls. Existing calls,
however, are not torn down.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Control
0 = Set Busy Out
1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)
Input Data
Trunk Port Number: 001~200
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 701
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-07 : Station Control
Level:
SA
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.
Input Data
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Control
1 = Hardware Reset
2 = Software Reset
Input Data
Extension Number (up to eight digits)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 702
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-08 : System Reset
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
System Reset
Input Data
Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer key to cancel)
Conditions
After restoring a customer database, the system must be reset using Program
90-08 or by powering down/powering up before all the restored programming
takes affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 703
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for
the system to automatically reset.
Input Data
Item No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Month
00~12 (Note 1)
00
02
Day
00~31 (Note 2)
00
03
Hour
00~23
00
04
Minute
00~59
00
Note 1
If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system
is automatically reset every month on the
predefined day.
Note 2
If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets
every day at the predefined time.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 704
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You
can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not
the alarm is displayed to a multiline terminal and whether or not the alarm information
is reported to the pre-defined destination.
Input Data
Alarm Number
001~100
Item
No.
Item
01
Alarm Type
02
Report
Input Data
0 = Not Set
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
0 = Not Report (No autodial)
1 = Report (autodial)
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
1
2
0
PKG Initialize
Error.
2
2
0
PKG Mounting Error
Programming Manual
Content of Alarm
Recovery
Alarm
Status
Cause
Action
1. The PKG failed to
initialize.
2. The PKG did not start
normally.
1. PKG not inserted
firmly.
2. PKG was
removed, but not
reinserted firmly.
3. Old PKG data
still reported due to
no initialization.
1. Insert PKG firmly.
2. Insert PKG firmly.
3. Delete slot
information in
PRG 90-05 and reinsert
the PKG.
Upon
initialization,
the PKG is
recognized.
ERR
REC
The unit did not step on a
regular procedure and it
was pulled out. Or, it is not
normally inserted.
1.The package is
half.
2.The package is
out of order.
1.Please insert the
package firmly.
2.Please try again after
initializing the system
data once when LED
doesn't blink normally.
3.Exchange of
packages.
When the unit
is
reconfirmed,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
2 - 705
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
3
2
0
Communicati
on fault
between
CD-CP00-US
and other
PKGs.
4
2
0
5
1
0
2 - 706
Content of Alarm
Alarm
Status
Cause
Action
Recovery
The error occurred when
communicating with the
package. When the
package is broken, it
recognizes it as a
communication fault.
1.The unit is half.
2.The powersupply voltage of
the system is
outside ratings.
3.The equipment
that generates the
noise in the same
power supply
system as the
power supply origin
of the system is
connected, and it
malfunctions
because of the
power supply
noise.
4.The equipment to
which it is adjacent
to of a main device,
and has put out the
radiation noise
exists, and it
malfunctions
because of the
radiation noise.
5.The chassis is
not properly
grounded.
1.Please insert the unit
firmly.
2.The power-supply
voltage must use
another power supply
when is in the range of
ratings or measuring
with the voltmeter, and
deviating from the rated
range.
3.Please use the power
supply besides the
equipment with the
possibility of the noise
source.
4.Please separate as
much as possible and
use a main device from
the equipment by which
you seem may
generate the radiation
noise.
5.Please ground the
chassis correctly.
When the unit
is
reconfirmed,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
PKG S/W
Download
Error
The unit program was not
able to be downloaded
normally.
The unit was not able to be
started normally.
The package
software is not
stored in the
downloaded USB
memory.
The stored
package software
is illegal.
Package
information that
had been installed
before remains.
Delete slot information
that corresponds by
PRG90-05-01 to delete
package information
that had been installed
before.
There is a possibility
that the unit program is
broken though an
external factor of the
noise etc. is thought.
Please load into the
USB memory and try
again when you back
up the unit program.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when not
restoring it.
Please
exchange
units, though
it is likely to
restore by
mounting the
unit again.
When the unit
program is
normally
downloaded,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
Cooling fan
error
The cooling fan does not
work normally.
The cooling fan has
stopped working.
Confirm that the cooling
fan is turning.
Replace the
cooling fan if it
is defective.
The cooling fan has
come off.
Verify the mounting of
the cooling fan.
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
6
0
0
Blocking
7
1
0
8
1
0
9
Name
Content of Alarm
Alarm
Status
Cause
Action
Recovery
The link of terminals
connected with the ESI
package came off.
• Breakdown of
terminal.
• Faulty wiring and
wiring
determination.
• External noise.
• Breakdown of ESI
package.
Confirm the terminal
connected with same
ESI. If they work
normally, confirm the
breakdown or the wiring
for the terminal.
Exchange the terminal
that doesn't work and
the working terminal,
and confirm it’s
working. An external
factor of the noise etc.
is thought.
Please reconfirm wiring
and the installation,etc.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs after it
confirms it.
The error is
recovered
when
reconnecting
or exchanging
it.
ERR
REC
Power failure
The supply of the
commercial power
stopped.
• The power cable
came off.
• Power failure
• The power supply
unit broke down.
Confirm the power
supply outlet when the
commercial power has
not stopped.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs.
When the
commercial
power is
restored, the
error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
RAM Backup
Battery Error
RAM backup battery on the
CD-CP00-US blade is
unplugged or defective.
Check the battery
connector. If it is
connected correctly,
replace the battery.
The error is
recovered
once the
battery is
replaced.
ERR
REC
--- Reserved ---
10
0
0
ISDN Link
Error
Layer1 link of ISDN lines
came off.
• Connected
determination of
main device and
ISDN line
• Breakdown of
DSU
• The setting of
PRG10-03 is not
corresponding to
an actual line.
Confirm the data of
PRG10-03.
Reconfirm wiring and
the installation of DSU.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs after it
confirms it.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recover.
ERR
REC
11
0
0
CTI Link Error
The link with the CTI server
came off.
• LAN cable
defective.
• Connected HUB
broken.
• The CTI server
doesn't start
normally.
Please reconfirm the
CTI server, wiring, and
the connection.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs after it
confirms it.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recover.
ERR
REC
12
0
0
ACD MIS Link
Error
The link with ACD MIS
client PC came off.
• LAN cable
defective.
• Connected HUB
broken.
• The CTI server
doesn't start
normally.
Please confirm ACD
MIS client PC and
connected part.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs after it
confirms it.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recover.
ERR
REC
Programming Manual
2 - 707
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
Content of Alarm
13
0
0
Charge
Management
Link Error
The link with the charge
management device came
off.
1. Problem of
wiring to connect
main device with
charge
management
device.
2. Problem of PC.
1. It is confirmed that
there is no problem in
wiring to connect a
main device with the
charge management
device. (Whether ping
passes for LAN
connection is
confirmed.)
2. Restart the charge
management software.
3. Reboot PC, and start
the charge
management software.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recover.
ERR
REC
14
0
0
LAN Link
Error
The link with LAN on
CD-CP00-US came off.
• LAN cable
defective.
• Connected HUB
broken.
• Defect of
CD-CP00-US
Confirm the operation
of LAN connector, LAN
cable, and HUB again.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recover.
ERR
REC
15
0
0
Network Keep
Alive
1. The network connection
has been cut.
2. Network Keep Alive
restoration.
3. Response notification on
network Keep Alive.
• LAN cable is
defective.
• Net side trouble.
• Packet block by
firewall.
• Repetition of IP
address.
Confirm whether the
defect is on the Network
side.
Confirm the settings of
HUB and the router,
etc.
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
WAR
16
0
0
SMDR Link
17~28
Cause
Action
Recovery
Alarm
Status
--- Reserved ---
29
0
0
Charge
Management
Buffer full
The temporary buffer for
the charge management in
main device was
overflowed, and a part of
unoutput charge data
disappeared because it
was not able to output the
charge management data.
1. The charge data
is printed and not
deleted at the
simple charge
management.
2. The charge data
is not output to PC
for the charge
management
software.
1. Please print and
delete the charge data
at the simple charge
management.
2. Please connect the
charge management
software for the charge
management software
and output the charge
data.
When the
output is
restarted, the
error is
recovered.
However, the
charge
management
data after the
error occurs is
not recorded.
ERR
REC
30
2
0
SMDR Buffer
full
The temporary buffer for
SMDR in main device was
overflowed, and a part of
unoutput SMDR data
disappeared because it
was not able to output
SMDR data.
1. Problem of
wiring to connect
main device with
PC.
2. Problem of PC.
1. Please confirm
whether there is
problem in wiring to
connect a main device
with PC.
2. Please execute the
reactivation of PC.
When the
output is
restarted, the
error is
recovered.
However, the
SMDR data
after the error
occurs is not
recorded.
ERR
REC
31~34
2 - 708
--- Reserved ---
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
35
0
0
CS Blocking
36
0
0
37
0
38
39
Name
Alarm
Status
Cause
Action
Recovery
The link of the CSIU and
CS came off.
1. Outgoing noise.
2. Method of setting
up CS.
3. Wiring to
connect CSIU unit
with CS.
4. Hard defect of
CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
Please confirm the
following matter when
happening frequently
when operating it.
1. Please confirm CS is
normally connected.
2. Please confirm the
wiring between CSIUCS is normal.
3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.
The error is
recovered
when
reconnecting
or exchanging
it.
ERR
REC
CS error
notification 1
CS detected the problem
occurring in the air
synchronous signal
between CS-CSIU, BBIC
reset was executed, and it
was restored automatically.
1. Outgoing noise.
2. Method of setting
up CS.
3. Wiring to
connect CSIU unit
with CS.
4. Hard defect of
CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
Please confirm the
following matter when
happening frequently
when operating it.
1. Please confirm CS is
normally connected.
2. Please confirm the
wiring between CSIUCS is normal.
3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.
This error has
been
recovered
when it is
notified.
ERR
REC
0
CS
transmission
error.
Because CS had not
returned the response to
the control signal from a
main device longer than
the fixed time, it was
restored automatically
specifying reset to
concerned CS with a main
device.
1. Outgoing noise.
2. Method of setting
up CS.
3. Wiring to
connect CSIU unit
with CS.
4. Hard defect of
CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
Please confirm the
following matter when
happening frequently
when operating it.
1. Please confirm CS is
normally connected.
2. Please confirm the
wiring between CSIUCS is normal.
3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.
This error has
been
recovered
when it is
notified.
ERR
REC
0
0
CSIU Dch
Error×
It was restored
automatically specifying
reset to concerned CS with
a main device because a
main device had detected
the control signal from a
main device not normally
reaching CS.
1. Outgoing noise.
2. Method of setting
up CS.
3. Wiring to
connect CSIU unit
with CS.
4. Hard defect of
CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
Please confirm the
following matter when
happening frequently
when operating it.
1. Please confirm CS is
normally connected.
2. Please confirm the
wiring between CSIUCS is normal.
3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.
This error has
been
recovered
when it is
notified.
ERR
REC
0
0
CSIU transmission error.
This alarm is integrated
into "Communication fault
between the CD-CP00-US
and other PKG", and it is
not used in SV8100.
Programming Manual
Content of Alarm
2 - 709
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
Content of Alarm
Cause
Action
Recovery
40
0
0
CS error notification 2.
CS detected the factor that
the noise is generated
between CS-PS, BBIC
reset was executed, and it
was restored automatically.
1. Outgoing noise.
2. Method of setting
up CS.
3. Wiring to
connect CSIU unit
with CS.
4. Hard defect of
CS.
5. Hard defect of
CSIU.
Please confirm the
following matter when
happening frequently
when operating it.
1. Please confirm CS is
normally connected.
2. Please confirm the
wiring between CSIUCS is normal.
3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.
This error has
been
recovered
when it is
notified.
The system was
started.
No action needed.
41~49
1
0
System Start
Notification
The system started.
51
0
0
System Data
change
CD-CP00-US Upgrade is
performed or Programming
change is made.
52
0
0
--- Reserved ---
53
0
0
--- Reserved ---
54
2
0
License
Management
Table Full
A new TCP/IP terminal and
the DSP board were not
able to be added to the
application license
management table.
• The license management
table is registering full.
Maximum 512
license information
on the TCP/IP
terminal is
registered, and a
new terminal
cannot be
registered.
Please delete license
information on an
unnecessary TCP/IP
terminal with
PRG90-44.
55
2
0
Regular
maintenance
exchange
notification.
The regular maintenance
exchange day has passed.
• The regular
maintenance
exchange day that
had been set with
PRG90-51
exceeded it.
Please do the
maintenance
exchanges of pertinent
parts, and set the next
regular maintenance
exchange day with
PRG90-51.
The excess
on the regular
maintenance
exchange day
is canceled by
changing
PRG90-51 or
when the
function is
invalidated,
the error is
recovered.
SIP
Registration
Error
Notification.
1.The registration of the
SIP trunk to the SIP server
failed.
• The setting of the
system data is
wrong.
The error is
recovered
when normally
connecting it.
2.The registration of the
SIP trunk to the SIP server
failed in the authentication.
• The setting of the
router is wrong.
1.Reconfirm the
following system data
setting -- PRG10-12,
10-28, 10-29, 10-30,
and 10-36.
2.Confirm the setting of
routers.
3.Confirm whether
abnormality occurs on
the net side.
4.Reconfirm the
authentication system
data setting.
5.Reconfirm wiring and
the system data setting.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
60
No action needed.
WAR
ERR
REC
--- Reserved --2
0
3.There is no response
from the SIP server to the
SIP registration request.
2 - 710
ERR
REC
--- Reserved ---
50
56~59
Alarm
Status
• It is an error to the
link of LAN.
• Net side trouble.
ERR
REC
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
Content of Alarm
61
0
0
SIP extension
trouble
information.
It failed in the registration
of the SIP extension
terminal.
The SIP extension terminal
was not able to acquire
DSP.
• At Regist to SV8100 of
the SIP extension terminal.
• When you cannot acquire
the DSP resource when it
sends it.
• The registered
port is used by
other extension.
• The license is
insufficient.
• DSP of VoIPDB
was not able to be
acquired.
Reconfirm wiring and
the system data setting.
The error occurred by the
DtermIP relation.
• When the error occurs
while communicating with
VoIPU or DtermIP.
• When it becomes
impossible to do the
communication between
SV8100 and DtermIP
• When failing in the
acquisition of DSP.
• The packet loss
occurred on the
network or the
wiring cutting
occurred.
Confirm whether each
equipment such as
wirings and HUB is
normal.
The trouble occurred by
the SIP-MLT relation.
• The packet loss
occurred on the
network or the
wiring cutting
occurred.
62
63
0
0
0
0
DtermIP
trouble
information.
SIP-MLT
trouble
information.
• The DSP resource was
not able to be acquired at
incoming/outgoing.
64
1
0
VoIPDB LAN
Link Error.
Cause
Action
Recovery
Alarm
Status
ERR
REC
Confirm whether each
equipment such as
access points works
normally.
ERR
REC
• DSP of VoIP was
not able to be
acquired.
Confirm whether each
equipment such as
wirings and HUB is
normal.
• The negotiation with
VoIPDB failed.
• DSP of VoIP was
not able to be
acquired.
The link of LAN of VoIPDB
came off.
• LAN cable is
defective.
Confirm LAN connector
and wiring.
• Connected HUB
broke.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
WAR
When the
connection
returns
normally, the
error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
• Defect in
CD-CP00-US.
65
0
0
VoIPDB
trouble
information.
When DSP of VoIPDB
notifies Error.
• Defect of
PZ-32IPLA.
There is a defective
possibility of hardware.
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
66
2
0
SIP extension
License Error.
More than the number of
licenses to which the SIP
extension terminal was
turned on at REGISTER.
• Lack of number of
licenses.
Confirm the number of
licenses of SIP
extension terminals.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
67~79
80
When the
number of
registration of
SIP extension
terminals falls
below the
number of
licenses.
WAR
--- Reserved --1
0
NetLink start
error.
Programming Manual
The error occurred when
NetLink started.
•Defect on
CD-CP00-US.
There is a defective
possibility of hardware.
Please inquire of the
maker.
ERR
2 - 711
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
81
2
0
Name
NetLink call
trouble
information.
Content of Alarm
The trouble occurred by
the NetLink relation.
Cause
Action
• DSP of
PZ-32IPLA was not
able to be acquired.
Reconfirm wiring and
the system data setting.
• The DSP resource was
not able to be acquired at
incoming/outgoing.
82
83
84
2
2
2
0
0
0
NetLink
Virtual Slot
accommod.
error.
NetLink
Communicati
on Error.
NetLink
License Error
Alarm
Status
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
The trouble occurred by
virtual Slot relation.
• It exceeded it to the slot
accommodation upper
bound.
• It failed in making a virtual
slot.
• It exceeds it to the
number of slot
accommodation in
the entire system of
NetLink.
Confirm whether to
exceed the slot number
upper bound.
The communication error
occurred by NetLink.
• The setting of the
router is wrong.
Reconfirm LAN
connector and wiring.
• The checksum error
occurred.
• It is an error to the
link of LAN.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
• The index error occurred.
• Net side trouble.
The error related to the
license occurred by
NetLink.
• The expiration
date of a temporary
license
approaches.
• A temporary
license was
nullified.
Confirm license
information.
The connection of
Secondary was refused in
NetLink.
• SystemID overlaps.
• SystemID is illegal.
• The license is insufficient.
• It is memory shortage.
• Repetition setting
of SystemID.
• SystemID is
illegal.
• The number of
licenses is lack.
• The system
memory is
insufficient.
Confirm the setting and
license information on
SystemID.
Because the versions of
DB is different, replication
cannot be executed
between Primary and
Secondary.
• The versions of
data bases
between Primary
and Secondary is
different.
Confirm the versions of
data bases of Primary
and Secondary by PC
PRO.
• The expiration date of the
license approaches.
Recovery
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
WAR
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
• The license was nullified.
85
86
2
2
0
0
NetLink node
connection
refusal.
Data base
replication
fail.
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
WAR
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.
87
2
0
Data base
replication
fail.
Because the error occurred
in the communication
between Primary and
Secondary, replication
cannot be executed.
The link of LAN
between Primary
and Secondary was
disconnected.
Confirm the link of LAN
between Primary and
Secondary.
WAR
88
2
0
NetLink
phase shift.
Operation began as
Primary.
• Operation began
as Primary.
No action is necessary.
INF
89
2
0
NetLink
phase shift.
Operation began as
Secondary.
• Operation began
as Secondary.
No action is necessary.
INF
90
2
0
NetLink
phase shift.
It shifted to the node
search mode.
• It shifted to the
node search mode.
No action is necessary.
INF
91
2
0
Primary autointegration.
Primary auto-integration
function operated.
• Primary autointegration function
operated.
No action is necessary.
INF
2 - 712
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Table 2-20 Description of Alarm (Continued)
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
92
2
0
Primary
compulsion
specification.
The Primary compulsion
specification function was
executed.
• The Primary
compulsion
specification
function was
executed.
No action is necessary.
INF
93
2
0
NetLink node
connection
detection.
The connection of the node
was detected with Primary
of NetLink.
• The connection of
the node was
detected with
Primary of NetLink.
No action is necessary.
INF
94
2
0
NetLink node
secession
detection.
The secession of the node
was detected with Primary
of NetLink.
• The secession of
the node was
detected with
Primary of NetLink.
No action is necessary.
INF
95
2
0
Data Base
replication
fail.
Because Secondary is in
programming mode, the
replication of DB cannot be
executed.
• It is possible to be
logging it in with
Secondary in the
Web Pro or the PC
Pro as the cause.
Log out from the
programming mode
with Secondary.
WAR
96
1
0
Data base
recovery fail.
Error happened when
DataBase recovery
operation.
Lack of resource
Memory, protected
area, recovery data
file corruption
maybe reason of
this.
Delete unnecessary file
and keep open area to
restore, then operation
again.
WAR
Start Data base
recovery operation.
No action is necessary.
INF
Finish Data base
recovery operation.
No action is necessary.
INF
Content of Alarm
Backup/Restore
97
2
0
DB recovery
operation
start.
Start Data base recovery
operation.
Cause
Action
Recovery
Alarm
Status
Backup/Restore/Delete
98
2
0
99
--- Reserved ---
100
--- Reserved ---
DB recovery
operation
finish.
Finish DataBase recovery
operation.
Backup/Restore/Delete
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 713
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm
report.
Input Data
Item
No.
02
Item
Input Data
0 = No Report
1 = E-mail Address
Report Method
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this
option to 1. E-mail address set in 90-11-08.
04
--- Not Used ---
06
SMTP Host Name
Up to 255 Characters
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
SMTP name (ex: smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your
ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry
if needed.
07
0~65535
SMTP Host Port Number
Default
0
No
Setting
25
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
SMTP host port number. Contact your ISP
(internet service provider) for the correct entry if
needed.
08
To E-mail Address
Up to 255 Characters
No
Setting
Up to 255 Characters
No
Setting
Up to 255 Characters
No
Setting
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this
e-mail address to which the report should be sent.
09
Reply Address
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
e-mail address where replies should be e-mailed.
10
From Address
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this
e-mail address for the station sending the report.
11
DNS Primary Address
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
DNS primary address.
2 - 714
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Input Data
Item
No.
12
Item
DNS Secondary Address
Input Data
Default
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
Up to 255 Characters
No
Setting
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
DNS secondary address.
13
Customer Name
When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, enter a
name to identify the particular system.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 715
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report.
This program has six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the
output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can
have up to 50 reports.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Input Data
Indicate the type of connection used for the System
Alarms. The baud rate for the COM port should be
set in Program 10-21-02.
0 = No Setting
1~3 = -- Reserved -4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB Memory
CTA Output Destination Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Output Port Type
Default
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 716
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-13 : System Information Output
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be
used as the system information output. The baud rate for the COM port should be set
in Program 10-21-02.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Default
0
Indicate the type of connection used to print the
system information.
0 = No Setting
4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB
02
CTA Output Destination Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
No Setting
04
Output Destination System ID
0~50
0
05
Output Command
Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
–
Output Port Type
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 717
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-16 : Main Software Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software
information on the CD-CP00-US. Main software information can also be viewed
outside of system programming by pressing Feature and the 3 key on any multiline
terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Component
01
Version Number
01.00~99.99
ASCII Code
(5 Bytes)
02
Software Release Date
May 22 2002 17:53:46
ASCII Code
(20 Bytes)
Conditions
This Program is “Read Only.”
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 718
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-17 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the
various system blades.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DSP Firmware Version No.
Display Data
00.00.00.00~15.15.15.15
Data Format
BCD Code (2 Byte)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 719
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level:
SA
Description
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the
extension is released from the Dial Block restriction.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Dial Block Release
Up to eight digits
Input Data
[Release?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Code Restriction
2 - 720
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic
report.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
0 = Not Measured
1 = Measure
0
All Line Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
04
DTMF Receiver Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
05
Dial Tone Detector Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
06
Caller ID Receiver Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
07
Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
08
ACD Operator All Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
01
Call Traffic Output
02
--- Not Used ---
03
Programming Manual
2 - 721
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
09
Attendant Channel All Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
10
Base Station All Busy Output
0 = Not Detected
1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Traffic Reports
2 - 722
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as
the traffic report output.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
Input Data
0 = No Setting
3 = LAN
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Traffic Reports
Programming Manual
2 - 723
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-22 : Terminal Version information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-22 : Terminal Version Information to determine the hardware and
firmware versions. These are read-only commands and cannot be changed.
Input Data
Item No.
Item
Input Data
01
Hardware Version
00~FF
02
Firmware Version
00.00~FF.FF
Default
00
00.00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 724
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the
registered IP telephone from the system.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete IP Telephone
This assignment removes the station number
association with the MAC address of the IP station.
Up to 8 digits
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Programming Manual
2 - 725
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the
date and time for the alarm report to print.
Input Data
Notification Number
1~12
Item
No.
Item
01
Month
00~12
00
02
Day
00~31
00
03
Hour
00~23
00
04
Minute
00~59
00
Input Data
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 726
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail
address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup.
Input Data
CC Number
Item
No.
Item
01
CC Mail Address
1~5
Input Data
Up to 255 Characters
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 727
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access
level required to change a system program.
Input Data
Program Numbers
1001~9201
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Maintenance Level
1 = MF Level
2 = IN Level
3 = SA Level
4 = SB Level
Refer to the Level indication for
each individual program (located in
the upper left corner at the
beginning of each program).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 728
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password
used to enter the user programming mode.
Input Data
Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Item
Password
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Fixed four digits
Default
1111
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 729
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic
Information Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and
password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level
information.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
Access Enabling
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
02
Username
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
SV8100
03
Password
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
12345678
0 (Disable)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 730
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-34 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware
blades installed in the system.
Input Data
Slot No.
Item
No.
1~24
Item
01
Pkg Name
02
Firmware Version Number
Display Data
PKG Name
00.00~0F.FF
Conditions
These Programs are ‘Read Only.’
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 731
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance
level for Wizard Programming.
Input Data
Wizard Number
Item
No.
01
1~250
Item
Maintenance Level
Display Data
0 = All
3 = SB (System Administrator B)
4 = SA (System Administrator A)
5 = IN
6 = MF
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 732
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the
firmware update feature. This data is available to set for the WebPro/PC
Programming FW update feature. A compact flash card must be inserted in the
CD-CP00-US for this feature.
The following firmware is available to update with this feature:
main.bin
Dspdbu.bin
dsp.bin
Item
No.
01
02
Programming Manual
Item
Firmware Update
Schedule Time
Update mode
Input Data
Default
Year: 0~99
0
Month: 0~12
0
Day: 00~31
0
Hour: 00~23
0
Minute: 00~59
0
0 = Non Active
1 = Activated
0
Description
This Program sets the time to
update the firmware using a
compact flash card.
Time registration fails if an
expired time is registered.
This Program activates the
Firmware Update feature. If
this setting is 1, new firmware
on the compact flash card
updates according to the setting
at 90-36-01.
2 - 733
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Item
No.
03
Item
Input Data
Update Report
Default
256 characters max.
No
Setting
Description
This Program outputs a report
when the update is executed
and saves one copy on the
system.
If a new update occurs, the new
report overwrites the old report.
Refer to the Sample Report
shown.
Sample Report
Result
Report Display
Update Success
Update is successful with the Update Time.
Update Fail
Update failed. Drive A (Compact Flash) was not available.
Update Fail
Update failed. The file, main.up, does not exist on drive A.
Update Fail
Update failed. The scheduled time has expired.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 734
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.
(Not supported in V1000)
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Virtual Loop Back
Reset
Input Data
[Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 735
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the
Primary DNS Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data
Roaming Server address.
Input Data
Server Information
Item
No.
01
02
03
1~13
Item
Input Data
Default
Server Address Type
0 = IPv4
1 = IPv6
0
Server Address
IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)
–
Port Number
0~65535
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 736
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the
hardware version and firmware version of the DT700 MLT Terminal.
Input Data
Terminal Type
Item
No.
Item
1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1
2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT-1D/ITL-24PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1
Input Data
Default
01
Software Version
00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF
00.00.00.00
02
Hardware Version
00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF
00.00.00.00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 737
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 to delete the terminal
license information delivered to the DT700 terminal.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal
License
Up to eight digits
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 738
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the
terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.
Input Data
License Delete Code
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal
License
000~000~000
–
999~999~999
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 739
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to
change the Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Temporary Password
Change Request
Input Data
00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF
Change? (Yes :1)
Default
00.00.00.00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 740
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone to set the
button kit information on a new telephone on the SV8100 system.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Button Kit Information of
Multiline Telephone
Eight digits (except virtual extension)
Input Data
0 = No Setting
1 = Not Used
2 = Type A with Cursor Key
3~9 = Not Used
10 = Type A without Cursor Key (Retrofit)
11~12 = Not Used
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 741
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone to set the
protection mode of each multiline (IP) telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Default
01
Release Protection Mode
Release? (Yes : 1)
None
02
Initialize Protection Password
Initialize? (Yes : 1)
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 742
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report
display.
Input Data
Index Number
Item
No.
01
Item
System Alarm Display Telephone
01~50
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 743
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for
the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.
Input Data
System ID
0~50
Index
1~10
Item
No.
2 - 744
Item
Input Data
Default
Refer to table
01
Display Name
Up to 16 characters
02
Year
00~99
00
03
Month
01~12
00
04
Day
01~31
00
Index
Default
01
Power battery
02
Backup battery
03
Cooling fan
04~10
--- No setting ---
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 745
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.
Input Data
System ID of Source System
0~50
System ID of Destination System
0~50
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Save All Alarm Reports
Print All? (1 = Yes)
02
Save New Alarm Reports
Print All? (1 = Yes)
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 746
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.
Input Data
System ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Clear All Alarm Reports
0~50
Input Data
Default
All Clear? ( 1 = Yes)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 747
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-55 : Free License Select
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Start Free License
Input Data
Default
0 = Stop
1 = Start
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 748
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-56 : NTP Setup
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
NTP Synchronize
0 = No
1 = Yes
02
Server Address
IPv4 form:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 form:
xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
Default
0
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 749
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the flash
memory on the CD-CP00-US and to make the recovery data.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
1~5
Item
Backup Recovery Data
Input Data
[Backup?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 750
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in
the flash memory of the CD-CP00-US. After this command is executed, the system
restarts automatically.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Restore Recovery Data
1~5
Input Data
[Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 751
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level:
SA
Description
Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data
stored in the flash memory of the CD-CP00-US.
Input Data
Data ID
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Recovery Data
1~5
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer
(Press Transfer to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 752
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status
information for T1/PRI/BRI/CD-CCTA packages.
Input Data
Item No.
01
System ID
1~50
Slot No.
1~24
Item
Link Status
Input Data
– = No link
0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot
Default
N/A
Conditions
This Program is Read-Only.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 753
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-61 : Manual Slot Install
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Install to manually install any package. If another
package is already assigned, the new package cannot be assigned.
Input Data
System ID
1~50
Slot No.
1~24
Item No.
01
Item
Install
Input Data
0 = None
1 = Router
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 754
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-62 : Security ID Information
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to display the security ID of the
CD-CP00-US.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Security ID
Display Data
0~9 and A~F (32 digits or less)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 755
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-63 : DT700 Control
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 90-63 : DT700 Control to adjust settings of the DT700.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Priority Timer
Input Data
Default
0~255
80
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 756
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through
PC Programming).
Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to
another multiline terminal, port, group, or other number. Refer to the following
charts to see which programs can be copied.
Input Data
Program Number
Item
No.
Item
Source Number
Enter the extension, trunk, group or other
number from which the data is to be
copied.
Program
92
XX-XX
Input Data
In case of Trunk Base :
Trunk Port Number 1~200
In case of Trunk Group Base :
Trunk Group Number 1~100
In case of Extension Base :
Extension Number (up to eight digits)
In case of Department Group Base :
Department Group Number 1~64
In case of DSS :
DSS Console Number 1~32
01
Destination Number (From)
Enter the first extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied.
Destination Number (To)
Enter the last extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied. If the information is being
copied only to one extension, trunk, group
or other number, enter the information
entered in the Destination Number (From)
entry.
Programming Manual
2 - 757
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs:
Trunk Port Base
Program
No.
Program Name
14-01
Trunk Basic Data Setup
14-02
Analog Trunk Data Setup
14-04
Behind PBX Setup
14-08
Music on Hold Source for Trunks
14-09
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk
21-03
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
21-12
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
21-21
Toll Restriction for Trunks
21-22
CO Message Waiting Indication
22-02
Incoming Service Type Setup
22-03
Trunk Ring Tone Setup
22-05
IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk
22-08
Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG
31-05
Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker
Note
Copy all data except Trunk Name
(Item 01).
Trunk Group Base
Program
No.
35-03
Program Name
Note
SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Extension Base
Program
No.
2 - 758
Program Name
15-01
Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual
Extension)
15-02
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Note
Copy all data except extension
name (item 01).
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program
No.
Program Name
15-06
Trunk Access Map for Extension
15-07
Programmable Function Key
15-08
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-09
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-10
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order
Setup
15-11
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
15-12
Conversation Recording Destination for
Extension
15-17
CO Message Waiting Indication
15-18
Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options
15-20
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
20-06
Class of Service for Extension
20-29
Timer Class for Extension
21-02
Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-04
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-11
Hotline Assignment
23-02
Call Pickup Groups
23-03
Ringing Line Preference
23-04
Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
24-03
Park Group Assignment
31-02
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Note
Department Group Base
Program
No.
Programming Manual
Program Name
16-01
Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup
35-04
SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group
Note
Copy all data except Group Name
(Item 01).
2 - 759
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
DSS Console Base
Program
No.
Program Name
30-01
DSS Console Operation Mode
30-03
DSS Key Assignment
Note
Door Box Base
Program
No.
32-02
Program Name
Note
Door Box Ring Assignment
Conditions
Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys,
copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming
is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is
already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE
DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or copy only from
an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to
which the programming is being copied.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 760
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension
numbers. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted.
Input Data
Extension No. Delete Yes: 1
[Dial 1] + Transfer key (Only press Transfer
key is canceled)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 761
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the
data of each outside line.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Source Number
Enter the port number from which the
data is to be copied.
02
Destination Number (From)
Enter the first port number to which the
information is to be copied.
03
Destination Number (To)
Enter the last port number to which the
information is to be copied. If the
information is only to be copied to one
port, enter the information entered in
the Destination Number (From) entry.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 762
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level:
IN
Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).
Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
1st Extension Number
02
2nd Extension Number
Input Data
Up to eight characters.
The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.
Program Number
Programming Manual
Program Name
11-02
Extension Numbering
12-05
Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
13-03
Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions
13-06
Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
15-01
Extension Basic Data Setup
15-02
Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-06
Trunk Access Map for Extension
15-07
Programmable Function Key
15-08
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-09
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-10
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
15-11
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
2 - 763
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program Number
2 - 764
Program Name
15-12
Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
15-13
Loop Key Data
15-14
Programming One-Touch Keys
15-17
CO-Message Waiting Indication
15-18
Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options
15-19
System Telephone book Setup for Extension
15-20
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
16-02
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
20-06
Class of Service for Extension
20-29
Timer Class for Extensions
21-02
Trunk Group Routing for Extension
21-04
Toll Restriction Class for Extension
21-07
Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
21-10
Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions
21-11
Hotline Assignment
21-13
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-15
Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-18
IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension
21-19
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-20
SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
21-23
Out Going Key Sized Virtual Extension Priority Setup
22-04
Incoming Ring Group Setup
22-06
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
23-02
Call Pickup Group
23-03
Ringing Line Preference
23-04
Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension
24-03
Park Hold Group Assignment
24-06
Fixed Call Forward
24-07
Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise
24-08
Call Forward for Centrex
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program Number
Program Name
24-09
Call Forward Split Settings
26-04
ARS Class of Service
26-07
LCR Cost Center Code Table
31-02
Internal Paging Group Assignment
41-02
ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group
41-17
ACD Login Mode Setup
42-02
Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup
43-33
Print Table for Extension
43-37
Fixed Call Restrict Table Setup
90-28
User Programming Programming Password Setup
92-05
Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2 - 765
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit
password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Password
Password required on a per station basis
when utilizing the station swap feature.
Input Data
Fixed four digits
(No setting at
default)
Related
Programming
11-15-12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 766
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-06 : Fill Command
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number
of each extension group or each table.
Input Data
Program Number
Item
No.
XX-XX
Item
Input Data
01
Source Number
02
Destination Number (From)
03
Destination Number (To)
Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06)
Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08)
Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17)
The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.
Program Number
Programming Manual
Program Name
11-02
Extension Numbering
11-04
Virtual Extension Numbering
11-06
ACI Extension Numbering
11-07
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
11-08
ACI Group Pilot Number
11-17
ACD Group Pilot Number
2 - 767
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 768
Program 92 : Copy Program
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 1.0
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-07 : Delete Command
Level:
IN
Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number
of each extension group or each table.
Input Data
Program Number
Item
No.
XX-XX
Item
Input Data
01
Destination Number (From)
02
Destination Number (To)
Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06)
Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08)
Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17)
The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.
Program Number
Programming Manual
Program Name
11-02
Extension Numbering
11-04
Virtual Extension Numbering
11-06
ACI Extension Numbering
11-07
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
11-08
ACI Group Pilot Number
11-17
ACD Group Pilot Number
2 - 769
Issue 1.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2 - 770
Program 92 : Copy Program
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Issue 1.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement